Skip to main content

Full text of "Studies in logic"

See other formats


PRESENTED 

TO 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 


THE  JOHNS  HOP.KINS  UNIVERSITY 


BALTIMORE 
1890 


STUDIES    IN    LOGIC, 


, 


BY    MEMBERS 


OF   THE 


JOHNS   HOPKINS   UNIVEKSITY. 


^J 


BOSTON: 
LITTLE,  BROWN,  AND   COMPANY. 

1883. 


Copyright,  1883, 
BY  C.  S.  PEIRCE. 


UNIVERSITY  PRESS: 
JOHN  WILSON  AND  SON,  CAMBRIDGE. 


PKEFACE. 


THESE  papers,  the  work  of  my  students,  have 
been  so  instructive  to  me,  that  I  have  asked 
and  obtained  permission  to  publish  them  in  one 
volume. 

Two  of  them,  the  contributions  of  Miss  Ladd 
(now  Mrs.  Fabian  Franklin)  and  of  Mr.  Mitchell, 
present  new  developments  of  the  logical  algebra 
of  Boole.  Miss  Ladd's  article  may  serve,  for 
those  who  are  unacquainted  with  Boole's  "  Laws 
of  Thought,"  as  an  introduction  to  the  most  won 
derful  and  fecund  discovery  of  modern  lo^ic. 
The  followers  of  Bo#le  have  altered  their  mas 
ter's  notation  mainly  in  three  respects. 

1.  A  series  of  writers,  —  Jevons,  in  1864; 
Peirce,  in  1867;  Grassman,  in  1872;  Schroder, 
in  1877  ;  and  McColl  in  1877,  — successively  and 
independently  declared  in  favor  of  using  the  sign 
of  addition  to  unite  different  terms  into  one  aggre 
gate,  whether  they  be  mutually  exclusive  or  not. 
Thus,  we  now  write 

European  +  Eepublican, 

to  stand  for  all  Europeans  and  Republicans  taken 


IV  PREFACE. 

together,  without  intending  to  count  twice  over 
the  European  Republicans.  Boole  and  Venn  (his 
sole  living  defender)  would  insist  upon  our  writ 
ing 

European  +  Non-European  Bepublican, 

or 

Non-Republican  European  +  Bepublican. 

The  two  new  authors  both  side  with  the  ma 
jority  in  this  respect. 

2.  Mr.  McColl  and  I  find  it  to  be  absolutely 
necessary  to  add  some  new  sign  to  express  exist 
ence  ;  for  Boole's  notation  is  only  capable  of 
representing  that  some  description  of  thing  does 
not  exist,  and  cannot  say  that  anything  does  exist. 
Besides  that,  the  sign  of  equality,  used  by  Boole 
in  the  desire  to  assimilate  the  algebra  of  logic  to 
that  of  number,  really  expresses,  as  De  Morgan 
showed  forty  years  ago,  a  complex  relation.  To 
say  that 

African  —  Negro 

implies  two  things,  that  every  African  is  a  Negro, 
and  that  every  Negro  is  an  African.  For  these 
reasons,  Mr.  McColl  and  I  make  use  of  signs  of 
inclusion  and  of  non-inclusion.  Thus,  I  write 

Griffin  -<  breathing  fire 

to  mean  that  every  griffin  (if  there  be  such  a 
creature)  breathes  fire;  that  is,  no  griffin  not 
breathing  fire  exists;  and  I  write 

Animal  -<  Aquatic, 

to  mean  that  some  animals  are  not  aquatic,   or 


PREFACE.  V 

that  a  non-aquatic  animal  does  exist.  Mr.  McColl's 
notation  is  not  essentially  different. 

Miss  Ladd  and  Mr.  Mitchell  also  use  two  signs 
expressive  of  simple  relations  involving  existence 
and  non-existence;  but  in  their  choice  of  these 
relations  they  diverge  both  from  McColl  and  me, 
and  from  one  another.  In  fact,  of  the  eight  sim 
ple  relations  of  terms  signalized  by  De  Morgan, 
Mr.  McColl  and  I  have  chosen  two,  Miss  Ladd 
two  others,  Mr.  Mitchell  a  fifth  and  sixth.  The 
logical  world  is  thus  in  a  situation  to  weigh  the 
advantages  and  disadvantages  of  the  different 
systems. 

3.  The  third  important  modification  of  Boole's 
original  notation  consists  in  the  introduction  of 
new  signs,  so  as  to  adapt  it  to  the  expression  of 
relative  terms.  This  branch  of  logic  which  has 
been  studied  by  Leslie  Ellis,  De  Morgan,  Jo 
seph  John  Murphy,  Alexander  MacFarlane,  and 
myself,  presents  a  rich  and  new  field  for  investi 
gation.  A  part  of  Mr.  Mitchell's  paper  touches 
this  subject  in  an  exceedingly  interesting  way. 

The  method  of  using  the  Boolian  calculus  — 
already  greatly  simplified  by  Schroder  and  by 
McColl  —  receives  still  further  improvements  at 
the  hands  both  of  Miss  Ladd  and  Mr.  Mitchell, 
and  it  is  surprising  to  see  with  what  facility  their 
methods  yield  solutions  of  problems  more  intri 
cate  and  difficult  than  any  that  have  hitherto  been 
proposed. 


VI  PEEFACE. 

The  volume  contains  two  other  papers  relating 
to  deductive  logic.  In  one  of  these  Mr.  Grilman 
develops  those  rules  for  the  combination  of  rela 
tive  numbers  of  which  the  general  principles  of 
probabilities  are  special  cases.  In  the  other,  Dr. 
Marquand  shows  how  a  counting  machine,  on  a 
binary  system  of  numeration,  will  exhibit  De 
Morgan's  eight  modes  of  universal  syllogism. 

There  are,  besides,  two  papers  upon  inductive 
logic.  In  the  first,  Dr.  Marquand  explains  the 
deeply  interesting  views  of  the  Epicureans,  known 
to  us  mainly  through  the  work  of  Philodemus, 
irepl  <T77/xeiW  KOLI  crrjjjLeictxTewv,  which  exists  in  a 
fragmentary  state  in  a  Herculaneum  papyrus. 

The  other  paper  is  one  which,  at  the  desire  of 
my  students,  I  have  contributed  to  the  collection. 
It  contains  a  statement  of  what  appears  to  me  to 
be  the  true  theory  of  the  inductive  process,  and 
the  correct  maxims  for  the  performance  of  it. 
I  hope  that  the  thoughts  that  a  long  study  has 
suggested  to  me  may  be  found  not  altogether 
useless  to  those  who  occupy  themselves  with  the 
application  of  this  kind  of  reasoning. 

I  have  to  thank  the  Trustees  of  the  Johns 
Hopkins  University,  for  a  very  liberal  contribu 
tion  toward  the  expenses  of  this  publication. 

C.  S.  PEIKCE. 
BALTIMORE,  Dec.  12, 1882. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGB 

THE  LOGIC  OP  THE  EPICUREANS 1 

By  Allan  Marguand. 


A  MACHINE  FOR  PRODUCING  SYLLOGISTIC  VARIATIONS    12 

By  Allan  Marquand. 

NOTE  ON  AN  EIGHT-TERM  LOGICAL  MACHINE  ...     16 
ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC 17 

By  Christine  Ladd. 

ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC 72 

By  0.  H.  Mitchell. 

OPERATIONS   IN  EELATIVE  NUMBER  WITH   APPLICA 
TIONS  TO  THE  THEORY  OF  PROBABILITIES     .     .     .     107 
By  B.  I.  Oilman. 

A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE 126 

NOTE  A 182 

NOTE  B 187 

By  C.  S.  Peirce. 


THE  LOGIC  OF  THE  EPICUREANS. 

BY  ALLAN  MARQUAND. 


WHEN  we  think  of  the  Epicureans  we  picture  a  friendly 
brotherhood  in  a  garden,  soothing  eacli  other's  fears,  and 
seeking  to  realize  a  life  of  undisturbed  peace  and  happi 
ness.  It  was  easy,  and  to  their  opponents  it  became 
natural,  to  suppose  that  the  Epicureans  did  not  concern 
themselves  with  logic ;  and  if  we  expect  to  find  in  their 
writings  a  highly  developed  formal  logic,  as  that  of  the 
Stoics,  our  search  will  be  in  vain.  But  if  we  examine 
the  letters  of  Epicurus,  the  poem  of  Lucretius,  and  the 
treatise  of  Philodemus1  with  a  view  to  discovering  the 
Epicurean  mode  of  thought,  we  find  a  logic  which  out 
weighs  in  value  that  of  their  Stoic  rivals.  This  logic  is 
interesting  to  us,  not  only  because  it  is  the  key  to  that 
school  of  Greek  Philosophy  which  outlasted  every  other, 
but  because  a  similar  logic  controls  a  powerful  school 
of  English  thought. 

The  logic  of  Epicurus,  like  that  of  J.  S.  Mill,  in  op 
position  to  conceptualism,  attempts  to  place  philosophy 
upon  an  empirical  basis.  Words  with  Epicurus  are  signs 
of  things,  and  not,  as  with  the  Stoics,  of  our  ideas  of 

1  Gomperz:  Herkulanische  Studien  I.  Leipzig,  1865.  Bahnsch:  Des 
Epicureers  Philodemus  Schrift  Ilepi  o-wduv  nai  ffweidxreuv.  Eine  Darleg- 
ung  ihres  Gedankengehalts.  Lyck,  1879. 

1 


2  THE   LOGIC    OF   THE   EPICUKEANS. 

things.1  There  are,  therefore,  two  methods  of  inquiry  : 
One  seeks  for  the  meanings  of  words ;  the  other,  for  a 
knowledge  of  things.  The  former  is  regarded  as  a  pre 
liminary  process  ;  the  latter,  the  only  true  arid  necessary 
way  of  reaching  a  philosophy  of  the  universe. 

All  our  knowledge  is  to  be  brought  to  the  test  of 
sensation,  pre-notion,  and  feeling.2  By  these  we  do  not 
understand  three  ultimate  sources  of  knowledge.  De- 
mocritus  3  held  to  only  one  source,  viz.,  Feeling  ;  and  Epi 
curus,  who  inherited  his  system,  implicitly  does  the  same. 
But  each  of  these  modes  of  feeling  has  its  distinguishing 
characteristic,  and  may  be  used  to  test  the  validity  of  our 
knowledge.  It  is  the  peculiarity  of  sensation  to  reveal  to 
us  the  external  world.  Sensation4  reasons  not,  remem 
bers  not ;  it  adds  nothing,  it  subtracts  nothing.  What 
it  gives  is  a  simple,  self-evident,  and  true  account  of 
the  external  world.  Its  testimony  is  beyond  criticism. 
Error  arises  after  the  data  of  sensation  become  involved 
in  the  operations  of  intellect.  If  we  should  compare  this 
first  test  of  truth  with  Hume's  "  impressions,"  the  second 
test,  pre-notion,  would  correspond  with  Hume's  "  ideas." 
Pre-notions  5  were  copies  of  sensations  in  a  generalized  or 
typical  form,  arising  from  a  repetition  of  similar  sensa 
tions.  Thus  the  belief  in  the  gods6  was  referred  to  the 
clear  pre-notions  of  them.  Single  effluxes  from  such  re 
fined  beings  could  have  no  effect  upon  the  senses,  but 
repeated  effluxes  from  deities  sufficiently  similar  produce 
in  our  minds  the  general  notion  of  a  god.7  In  the  same 

1  The  hypothesis  of  XeKrd,  or  of  immaterial  notions,  was  a  conceptu- 
alistic  inconsistency  on  the  part  of  the  Stoics.     The  Epicureans  and  the 
more   consistent  empiricists  among  the  Stoics  rejected  them.     -Sextus 
Empiricus,  Math.  viii.  258. 

2  Diogenes  Laertius,  x.  31.  8  Sextus:  Math.,  vii.  140. 
*  D.  L.,  x.  31.               6  D.  L.,  x.  33.  6  D.  L.,  x.  123,  124. 

'  Cicero:  De  Nat.  Deor.,  i.  49;  D.  L,.  x.  139. 


THE   LOGIC   OF   THE   EPICUREANS.  3 

manner,  but  through  the  senses,  the  continued  observa 
tion  of  horses  or  oxen  produce  in  us  general  notions,  to 
which  we  may  refer  a  doubt  concerning  the  nature  of  the 
animal  that  moves  before  us. 

The  third  criterion,  Feeling  (in  the  limited  sense),  was 
the  ultimate  test  for  ethical  maxims.  The  elementary 
forms  are  the  feeling  of  pleasure  and  the  feeling  of  pain. 
A  fourth  criterion  was  added,  viz.,  The  Imaginative  rep 
resentations  of  the  intellect.  Its  use  is  by  no  means 
clear. 

Upon  this  foundation  rises  the  structure  of  Epicurean 
logic.     When  we  leave  the  clear  evidence  of  sense  we 
pass  into  the  region  of  opinion,  away  from  the  stronghold 
of  truth  to  the  region  where  error  is  ever  struggling  for 
the  mastery  of  our  minds.     A  true  opinion l  is  character 
ized  as  one  for  which  there  is  evidence  in  favor  or  none 
against ;  a  false  opinion,  one  for  which  there  is  no  evi 
dence  in  favor  or  some  against.     The  processes  by  which 
we  pass  to  the  more  general  and  complex  forms  of  know 
ledge  are  four  :  Observation,  Analogy,  Resemblance,  Syn 
thesis.2     By  Observation,  we  come  into  contact  with  the 
data  of  the  senses  ;  by  Analogy,  we  may  not  only  enlarge 
and  diminish  our  perceptions,  as  we  do  in  conceiving  a 
Cyclops  or  a  Pygmy,  but  also  extend  to  the  unperceived 
the  attributes  of  our  perceptions,  as  we  do  in  assigning 
properties  to  atoms,  the  soul,  and  the  gods ;  by  Resem 
blance,  we  know  the  appearance  of  Socrates  from  having 
seen  his  statue ;  by  Synthesis,  we  combine  sensations,  as 
when  we  conceive  of  a  Centaur. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  Epicurus  regards  only  two  proces 
ses, —  Observation  and  Analogy.     Our  knowledge,  then, 

1  D.  L.,  x.  34,  51.     Sextus:  Math.,  vii.  211. 

2  D.  L.,  x.  32.     The  Stoics  held  a  similar  view;  see  D.  L.,  vii.  52. 


4  THE    LOGIC    OF    THE    EPICUREANS. 

consists  of  two  parts  : l  (1)  The  observed,  or  phenomena 
clear  and  distinct  to  consciousness ;  and  (2)  The  unob 
served,2  consisting  of  phenomena  which  are  yet  to  be  ob 
served,  and  of  hidden  causes  which  lie  forever  beyond 
our  observation.     The  function  of  logic3  consists  in  in 
ference  from  the  observed  to  the  unobserved.     This  was 
called  a  sien-iiiference.     According  to  Epicurus  there  are 
two  methods4  of  making  such  an  inference;  one  resulting 
in  a  single  explanation,  the  other  in  many  explanations. 
The  former  may  be  illustrated  by  the  argument,— Motion 
is  a  sign  of  a  void.     Here  the  void  is  regarded  as  the 
only  explanation  to  be  given  of  motion.     In  other  cases 
many  explanations  are  found  equally  in  harmony  with 
our  experience.     All  celestial  phenomena  belong  to  this 
class.     That  explanation  which  alone  represents  the  true 
cause  of  such  a  phenomenon  being  unknown,  we  must 
be  content  to  admit  many  explanations  as  equally  prob 
able.     Thus  thunder5  is  explained  by  supposing  either 
that  winds  are  whirling  in  the  cavities  of  the  clouds,  or 
that  some  great  fire  is  crackling  as  it  is  fanned  by  the 
winds,  or  that  the  clouds  are  being  torn  asunder  or  are 
rubbing  against  each  other  as  they  become  crystallized. 
In  thus  connecting  celestial  and  terrestrial  phenomena, 
Epicurus  aimed  only  to  exclude  supernaturalistic  expla 
nations.     This  done,  he  was  satisfied. 

In  the  garden  at  Athens  this  logic  took  root  and  grew ; 
and  by  the  time  that  Cicero  visited  Greece  and  sat  at  the 
feet  of  Zeno,6  he  may  have  listened  to  that  great  repre- 

1  Philodemus:     Rhet,,  lib.  iv.,  i.  col.  xix. 

2  That  is,  TO  Trpocr^vov  Kai  TO  &St]\ov,  D.  L.,  x.  38. 

8  D.  L.,  x.  32.  66 ev  /ecu  irepl  TWV  ddyXuv  diro  T&V  <f>au>0(J,frwv  Xp?j  <T77/xei- 
ovcrOai. 

*  Ibid.,  x.  86,  87. 

5  Ibid.,  x.  100.     Cf.  Lucretius,  lib.  vi.  95-158. 

6  See  Zeller's  Stoics,  Epicureans,  and  Sceptics.     London,  1880,  p.  412, 
n.  3. 


THE    LOGIC    OF   THE    EPICUKEANS.  5 

sentative  of  the  Epicurean  School  discussing  such  ques 
tions1  as,  —  How  may  we  pass  from  the  known  to  the 
unknown  ?  Must  we  examine  every  instance  before 
we  make  an  induction  ?  Must  the  phenomenon  taken 
as  a  sign  be  identical  with  the  thing  signified  ?  Or,  if 
differences  be  admitted,  upon  what  grounds  may  an  in 
ductive  inference  be  made  ?  And,  Are  we  not  always 
liable  to  be  thwarted  by  the  existence  of  exceptional 
cases  ?  —  But  such  questions  had  no  interest  for  Cicero. 
He  was  too  much  an  orator  and  rhetorician  to  recognize 
the  force  of  the .  Epicurean  opposition  to  dialectic.  The 
Epicurean  logic  2  to  him  was  barren  and  empty.  It  made 
little  of  definition  ;  it  said  nothing  of  division ;  it  erected 
no  syllogistic  forms ;  it  did  not  direct  us  how  to  solve 
fallacies  and  detect  ambiguities.  And  how  many  have 
been  the  historians  of  philosophy  who  have  assigned 
almost  a  blank  page  to  Epicurean  logic ! 

With  a  supreme  confidence  in  the  truth  of  sensation 
and  the  validity  of  induction  the  Epicureans  stood  in  con 
flict  with  the  other  schools  of  Greek  philosophy.  The 
Stoics,  treating  all  affirmation  from  the  standpoint  of  the 
hypothetical  proposition,  acknowledged  the  validity  of 
such  inductions  only  as  could  be  submitted  to  the  modus 
tottens.  The  Sceptics  denied  the  validity  of  induction 
altogether.  Induction  was  treated  as  a  sign-inference, 
and  a  controversy  appears  to  have  arisen  concerning 
the  nature  of  signs,  as  well  as  concerning  the  mode 
and  validity  of  the  inference.  The  Stoics  divided  signs 
into  suggestive  and  indicative?  By  means  of  a  sug 
gestive  sign  we  recall  some  previously  associated  fact : 
as  from  smoke  we  infer  fire.  By  indicative  signs  we 
infer  something  otherwise  unknown :  thus  motions  of 

1  Philodemus  TTC/H  <yrnj.etC)v,  col.  xix.-xx.         2  Cicero:    De  Fin.,  i.  7,  22. 
3  See  PraiuUl's  Ges.  d.  Log.,  i.  458. 


6  THE   LOGIC    OF   THE    EPICUKEANS. 

,the  body  are  signs  of  the  soul.  Objectively  a  sign  was 
viewed  as  the  antecedent  of  a  valid  conditional  propo 
sition,  implying  a  consequent.  Subjectively,  it  was  a 
thought,  mediating  in  some  way  between  things  on  the 
one  hand,  and  names  and  propositions  on  the  other. 
The. Epicureans  looked  upon  a  sign  as  a  phenomenon^ 
from  whose  characters  we  might  infer  the  characters  of 
other  phenomena  under  conditions  of  existence  suf 
ficiently  similar.  The  sign  was  to  them  an  object  of 
sense.  In  considering  the  variety  of  signs,  the  Epicureans 
appear  to  have  admitted  three  kinds ;  but  only  two  are 
defined  in  the  treatise  of  Philodemus.1  A  general  sign  is 
described  as  a  phenomenon  which  can  exist  whether  the 
thing  signified  exists  or  not,  or  has  a  particular  character 
or  not.  A  particular  sign  is  a  phenomenon  which  can 
exist  only  on  the  condition  that  the  thing  signified  act 
ually  exists.  The  relation  between  sign  and  thing  sig 
nified  in  the  former  case  is  resemblance ;  in  the  latter,  it 
is  invariable  sequence  or  causality.  The  Stoics,  in  devel 
oping  the  sign-inference,  inquired,  How  may  we  pass  from 
the  antecedent  to  the  consequent  of  a  conditional  prop 
osition  ?  They  replied,  A  true  sign  exists  only  when 
both  antecedent  and  consequent  are  true.2  As  a  test, 
we  should  be  able  to  contrapose  the  proposition,  and  see 
that  from  the  negative  of  the  consequent  the  negative  of 
the  antecedent  followed.  Only  those  propositions  which 
admitted  of  contraposition  were  allowed  to  be  treated  as 
hypothetical.3 

On  this  prepositional  ground,  therefore,  the  Epicurean 
must  meet  his  opponent.  This  he  does  by  observing 
that  general  propositions  are  obtained  neither  by  contra 
position  nor  by  syllogism,  nor  in  any  other  way  than 

1  Philod.,  loc.  cit.,  col.  xiv.        2  Sextus  :  Math.,  viii.  256. 
3  Cicero:    De  Fato,  6,  12;  8,  15. 


THE   LOGIC    OF   THE   EPICUKEANS.  7 

by  induction.1  The  contraposed  forms,  being  general 
propositions,  rest  also  on  induction.  Hence,  if  the  in 
ductive  mode  of  reasoning  be  uncertain,  the  same  degree 
of  uncertainty  attaches  to  propositions  in  the  contra- 
posed  form.2  The  Stoics,  therefore,  in  neglecting  in 
duction,  were  accused  of  surrendering  the  vouchers  by 
which  alone  their  generalizations  could  be  established.3 
In  like  manner  they  were  accused  of  hasty  generalization, 
of  inaccurate  reasoning,  of  adopting  myths,  of  being  rhet 
oricians  rather  than  investigators  of  Nature.  Into  the 
truth  of  these  accusations  we  need  not  inquire.  It  is 
enough  that  they  cleared  the  way  for  the  Epicureans  to 
set  up  a  theory  of  induction. 

The  first  question  which  Zeno  sought  to  answer  was, 
"  Is  it  necessary  that  we  should  examine  every  case  of 
a  phenomenon,  or  only  a  certain  number  of  cases  ?  "  4 
Stoics  and  Sceptics  answered,  The  former  is  impossi 
ble,  and  the  latter  leaves  induction  insecure.  But  Zeno 
replied  :  "  It  is  neither  necessary  to  take  into  considera 
tion  every  phenomenon  in  our  experience,  nor  a  few  cases 
at  random  ;  but  taking  many  and  various  phenomena  of 
the  same  general  kind,  and  having  obtained,  both  from 
our  observation  and  that  of  others,  the  properties  that  are 
common  to  each  individual,  from  these  cases  may  we 
pass  to  the  rest."  5  Instances  taken  from  a  class  and 
exhibiting  some  invariable  properties  are  made  the  basis 
of  the  inductive  inference.  A  certain  amount  of  variation 
in  the  properties  is  not  excluded.  Thus  from  the  fact  that 
the  men  in  our  region  of  country  are  short-lived,  we  may 
not  infer  that  the  inhabitants  of  Mt.  Athos  are  short 
lived  also ;  for  "  men  in  our  experience  are  seen  to  vary 
considerably  in  respect  to  length  or  brevity  of  life." 

1  Philod.,  loc.  cit.,  col.  xvii.  2  Ibid.,  col.  ix. 

3  Ibid.,  col.  xxix.  *  Ibid.,  col.  xix.  13-15. 

5  Ibid.,  col.  xx.  30-col.  xxi.  3.  6  Ibid.,  col.  xvii.  18-22. 


THE   LOGIC   OF   THE   EPICUREANS. 

Within  limits,  then,  we  may  allow  for  variation  due  to  the 
influence  of  .climate,  food,  and  other  physical  conditions ; 
but  our  inference  should  not  greatly  exceed  the  limits  of 
our  experience.  But,  in  spite  of  variations,  there  are 
properties  which  in  our  experience  are  universal.  Men 
are  found  to  be  liable  to  disease  and  old  age  and  death ; 
they  die  when  their  heads  are  cut  off,  or  their  hearts 
extracted;  they  cannot  pass  through  solid  bodies.  By 
induction  we  infer  that  these  characteristics  belong  to 
men  wherever  they  may  be  found,  and  it  is  absurd  to 
speak  of  men  under  similar  conditions  as  not  susceptible 
to  disease  or  death,  or  as  having  the  ability  to  pass  through 
iron  as  we  pass  through  the  air.1 

The  Epicurean  looks  out  upon  Nature  as  already  di 
vided  and  subdivided  into  classes,  each  class  being  closely 
related  to  other  classes.  The  inductive  inference  proceeds 
from  class  to  class,  not  in  a  hap-hazard  way,  but  from  one 
class  to  that  which  resembles  it  most  closely.2  In  case  the 
classes  are  identical,  there  is  no  distinction  of  known  and 
unknown  ;  and  hence,  properly  speaking,  no  inductive  in 
ference.3  In  case  the  classes  are  widely  different,  the 
inference  is  insecure.  But  within  a  certain  range  of  re 
semblance  we  may  rely  as  confidently  upon  an  inductive 
inference  as  we  do  upon  the  evidence  of  sense.4 

In  speaking  of  the  common  or  essential  characters,  the 
basis  of  induction,  it  was  usual  to  connect  them  with  the 
subject  of  discourse  by  the  words  ?;,  Ka06,  or  nrapo.  These 
words  may  be  taken  in  four  senses  :  5  (1)  The  properties 
may  be  regarded  as  necessary  consequences ;  so  we  may 
say  of  a  man  that  he  is  necessarily  corporeal  and  liable 
to  disease  and  death.  (2)  Or  as  essential  to  the  concep 
tion  or  definition  of  the  subject.  This  is  what  is  con- 

1  Philod.,  loc.  cit.,  col.  xxi. 

2  Ibid.,  col.  xviii.  20  ;  col.  xxviii.  25-29.         3  Ibid.,  col.  vi.  8-10. 

4  Ibid.,  Frag.  2,  5-6.  6  Ibid>j  col>  xxxiii>  33_col>  xxxiv§  34 


THE    LOGIC    OF    THE   EPICUREANS.  9 

veyed  in  the  expression,  "  Body  as  body  has  weight  and 
resistance  ;  man  as  man  is  a  rational  animal."  (3)  That 
certain  properties  are  always  concomitant.  (4)  The 
fourth  sense,  lost  in  the  lacunas,  appears  from  the  fol 
lowing  examples  to  involve  degree  or  proportion :  "  The 
sword  cuts  as  it  has  been  sharpened ;  atoms  are  im 
perishable  in  so  far  as  they  are  perfect ;  bodies  gravitate 
in  proportion  to  their  weight." 

Zeno's  theory  of  induction  may  be  formulated  in  the 
following  Canons  :  — 

CANON  I.  —  If  we  examine  many  and  various  instances 
of  a  phenomenon,  and  find  some  character  common  to 
them  all,  and  no  instance  appears  to  the  contrary,  this 
character  may  be  transferred  to  other  unexamined  in 
dividuals  of  the  same  class,  and  even  to  other  closely 
related  classes. 

CANON  II.  —  If  in  our  experience  a  given  character  is 
found  to  vary,  a  corresponding  amount  of  variation  may 
be  inferred  to  exist  beyond  our  experience. 

The  most  important  objection  made  to  this  theory  was, 
that  phenomena  exist  in  our  experience  exhibiting  pecu 
liar  and  exceptional  characters,  and  that  other  exceptions 
might  exist  beyond  our  experience  to  vitiate  any  induc 
tion  we  may  make.  The  following  examples  are  given  : l 
The  loadstone  has  the  peculiar  property  of  attracting  iron  ; 
amber,  of  attracting  bran  ;  the  square  number  4  X  4,  of 
having  its  perimeter  equal  to  its  area.  Exceptional  char 
acters  are  found  in  the  Alexandrian  anvil-headed  dwarf, 
the  Epidaurian  hermaphrodite,  the  Cretan  giant,  the 
pygmies  in  Achoris.  The  sun  and  moon  also  are  unique  ; 
so  are  time  and  the  soul.  Admitting  such  exceptional 
phenomena,  the  Epicurean  replies,  that  the  belief  that  a 
similar  state  of  things  exists  beyond  our  experience  can 

1  Philod.,  loc.  cit.,  col.  i.,  ii. 


10  THE   LOGIC    OF   THE  EPICUREANS. 

be  justified  only  inductively.1  And  exceptional  phenom 
ena  must  be  viewed  not  as  closely  resembling,  but  as 
being  widely  different  from,  other  phenomena.  Induc 
tions  concerning  loadstones  must  be  confined  to  load 
stones,  and  not  extended  to  other  kinds  of  stones.  Each 
class  of  exceptional  phenomena  offered  a  new  field  for 
induction,  and  hence  could  be  said  to  strengthen  and  not 
to  weaken  the  inductive  argument.2 

The  correctness  of  all  inductions  could  be  tested  by 
the  rule  of  Epicurus  for  the  truth  of  opinion  in  general. 
An  induction  is  true,  when  all  known  instances  are  in  its 
favor,  or  none  against;  it  is  false,  when  no  instances  are 
in  its  favor,  or  some  against.  When  the  instances  are 
partly  one  way  and  partly  another,  we  cannot  reach 
universal  conclusions,  but  only  such  as  are  probable.3 

This  theory  of  induction  was  completed  by  a  considera 
tion  of  fallacies,  summarized  in  a  work  called  the  "  Deme- 
triac."  4  These  consisted  in  — 

1.  Failing  to  see  in  what  cases  contraposition  is  ap 
plicable. 

2.  Failing  to  see  that  we  should  make  inductions  not 
in  a  hap-hazard  way,  but  from  properties  which  resemble 
each  other  very  closely. 

3.  Failing  to  see  that  exceptional  phenomena  are  in 
no  way  at  variance  with  the  inductive  inference,  but  on 
the  other  hand  add  to  its  force. 

4.  Failing  to  observe  that  we  infer  from  the  known  to 
the  unknown,  only  when  all  the  evidence  is  in  favor  and 
no  shadow  of  evidence  appears  to  the  contrary. 

5.  The  failure  to  perceive  that  general  propositions 
are  derived  not  by  contraposition,  but  by  induction. 

When  we  compare  the  work  of   Zeno  with   that   of 

1  Philod.,  loc.  cit.,  col.  xxv.          2  Ibid.,  col.  xxiv.  10-col.  xxv.  2. 
8  Ibid.,  col.  xxv.  31-34.  4  Ibid.,  col.  xxviii.  13-col.  xxix.  24. 


THE   LOGIC    OF   THE    EPICUREANS.  11 

Epicurus,  an  important  logical  difference  is  brought  to 
view.  Both  are  occupied  with  the  sign-inference,  and 
look  upon  inference  as  proceeding  from  the  known  to  the 
unknown.  Epicurus,  however,  sought  only  by  means  of 
hypothesis  to  explain  special  phenomena  of  Nature.  Zeno 
investigated  generalizations  from  experience,  with  a  view 
to  discovering  the  validity  of  extending  them  beyond  our 
experience.  This  resulted  in  a  theory  of  induction,  which, 
so  far  as  we  know,  Epicurus  did  not  possess.  In  the 
system  of  Aristotle,  induction  was  viewed  through  the 
forms  of  syllogism,  and  its  empirical  foundation  was  not 
held  in  view.  The  Epicureans,  therefore,  were  as  much 
opposed  to  the  Aristotelian  induction,  as  they  were  to  the 
Aristotelian  syllogism.  It  was  Zeno  the  Epicurean  who 
made  the  first  attempt  to  justify  the  validity  of  induction. 
The  record  of  this  attempt  will  give  the  treatise  of  Philo- 
demus  a  permanent  value  in  the  history  of  inductive 
logic. 

It  is  refreshing  to  see  the  formalistic  and  rhetorical 

o 

atmosphere  which  had  surrounded  the  subject  of  logic 
breaking  away,  and  an  honest  attempt  being  made  to 
justify  the  premises  of  syllogism.  As  yet,  this  had  not 
been  done  by  all  the  moods  of  the  philosophers. 

It  is  also  interesting  to  find  in  the  ancient  world  a 
theory  of  induction  which  rests  upon  observation,  sug 
gests  experiment,  assumes  the  uniformity  of  Nature,  and 
allows  for  the  variation  of  characters. 


A  MACHINE  FOR  PRODUCING  SYLLOGISTIC 
VARIATIONS. 

BY  ALLAN  MARQUAND. 


FROM  any  syllogism  a  number  of  logical  variations 
may  be  derived.  One  operation  by  which  this  may  be 
accomplished  is  contraposition.  This  operation  consists 
in  effecting  a  change  in  the  order  of  the  terms  of  a 
proposition,  the  state  of  things  which  the  proposition  is 
designed  to  express  being  supposed  to  remain  unchanged. 
Thus  the  state  of  things  expressed  by  the  proposition 
"  every  A  is  a  B "  may  be  expressed  also  by  "  every 
non-B  is  a  non-A,"  or  by  the  form,  "  there  is  a  B  for 
every  A." 

We  proceed  now  to  apply  this  principle  to  the  syllo 
gism.  For  our  notation  let  us  take  letters  A,  B,  C, 
etc.  for  general  terms,  and  express  their  negatives  by 
writing  dashes  over  them,  A,  B,  C,  etc.  Let  a  short 
curved  mark  over  a  letter  indicate  that  its  logical  quan 
tity  has  been  changed ;  thus,  A,  B,  C,  etc.  A  general 
term  will  be  thus  made  particular,  and  a  term  already 
particular  will  be  made  general.  Let  us  use  the  sign 
-<  for  the  copula.1  We  may  then  express  the  syllo 
gism  Barbara  in  the  form 

A-<B 

B-<  C 

.-.  A  -<  C 

1  This  notation  is  that  used  by  Mr.  C.  S.  Peirce,  "On  the  Logic  of 
Relatives."  Memoirs  Am.  Acad.  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  vol.  ix,  1870. 


A   MACHINE   FOR   SYLLOGISTIC   VARIATIONS.        13 

From  this  as  a  starting-point  we  may  produce  formal 
variations  by  various  modes  of  contraposition.  The  ex 
hibition  of  two  such  forms  will  suffice. 

(1)  We  may  regard  the  logical  quality  of  the  terms 
and    contrapose.      The    form    A  -<  B    then    becomes 
B-<  A,  or,  "every  non-B  is  a  non-A." 

(2)  We  may  regard  the  logical  quantity  of  the  terms 
and    contrapose.      The    form    A  -<  B    then    becomes 
B  -<  A.     The  latter  form  we  may  take  to  mean,  "  there 
is  a  B  for  every  A,"  or  "  the  B's  include  all  the  A's." 

Applying  these  two  kinds  of  contraposition  to  Barbara, 
we  obtain  the  following  variations  :  — 

Qualitative  Variations. 

B<A        A-<B        B-<A        A<B        B-<A        A-<B        B-<A 
Fundamental          B^CC         0<B         0-<B        B-<C        B<C         CKB        C-<B 

Form'  /.  A-<C    .'.  A<C     .-.A-<C    .'.C-<A    .-.C<A    .-.  C  -<  A  .-.  C  -<  A 

J  Quantitative  Variations. 

B-<C 


B-<A        AKB        B^A        A-<B 
B-<0         C-<B        C<B         B^C 

.-.  C-<A   /. 


These  may  be  classed  as  two  figures  according  as  the 
conclusion  has  the  fundamental  or  contraposed  form  ;  or 
they  may  be  classed  as  four  figures  according  as  one  or 
other,  or  both,  or  neither  premise  has  been  contraposed ; 
or  as  eight  figures,  if  we  regard  merely  the  relative  posi 
tion  of  the  terms.  The  number  of  such  variations  may 
be  indefinitely  increased  by  admitting  other  modes  of 
contraposition,  or  by  starting  from  other  syllogistic 
forms.  All  these  variations  may  be  easily  produced 
by  a  mechanical  contrivance.  In  order  to  secure  this 
I  have  constructed  a  machine  (Fig.  1)  which  pre 
sents  to  view  three  flaps  in  which  are  inserted  cards 
containing  the  premises  and  conclusion  of  the  syllogism 
which  is  to  undergo  transformation.  Each  flap,  on 


14        A  MACHINE   FOR   SYLLOGISTIC   VARIATIONS. 


making  a  half-revolution,  presents  its  proposition  in  a 
contraposed  form.     The  flaps  terminate  on  one  side  of 


FIG.  l. 


Scale  i  in. 

the  machine  in  one-inch  brass  friction  wheels.  These 
are  marked  a,  5,  and  c  in  Fig.  2.  The  wheels  d,  e, 
and  /  are,  respectively,  one,  two,  and  four  inches  in 
diameter.  Upon  each  of  these  wheels  is  fitted  the  sec 
tor  of  a  wheel  of  like  dimensions.  Wheel  d  has  on  its 
outer  side  a  sector  of  180° ;  wheel  e,  on  its  inner  side, 
one  of  90° ;  wheel  /,  on  its  outer  side,  one  of  45°.  The 
friction  of  these  sectors  against  the  wheels  a,  5,  and  c 
causes  the  half-revolutions  of  the  three  flaps.  By  turn- 


A   MACHINE    FOR   SYLLOGISTIC    VARIATIONS.        15 


FIG.  2. 


ing  a  crank  attached  to  wheel  d,  the  proposition  A  -<  B 
is  contraposed  at  the  end  of  every  turn,  B  -<  C  at  every 
alternate  turn,  and  A  -<  C  at  the  end  of  every  fourth 
turn.  Eight  turns  of 
the  crank  will  exhibit 
seven  variations,  and 
restore  the  fundamen 
tal  syllogism  to  view. 
This  mechanism 
could  be  readily  ex 
tended  so  as  to  pro 
duce  variations  in  a 
Sorites.  A  Sorites  of 
n  propositions  would 
require,  to  contrapose 
its  conclusion,  a  wheel 
of  2n~1  inches  in  di 
ameter.  We  should 
secure,  as  in  the  syl 
logism,  2n  —  1  varia 
tions  for  each  kind 
of  contraposition. 

Scale  J  in. 

NOTE.  —  The  Syllogistic  Variation  Machine  will  unfold  to  view 
the  combinations  of  three  logical  terms  and  their  negatives  ;  or  if  we 
take  the  letters  B  —  C,  A  —  U,  D  —  T,  we  obtain  the  words 

BCBCBCBC 

AAUUAAUU 
DDDDTTTT 


NOTE  ON  AN  EIGHT-TERM  LOGICAL  MACHINE. 


I  HAVE  completed  the  design  of  an  8-term  Logical 
Machine,  of  which  a  4-term  model  is  now  nearly  fin 
ished.  If  the  premises  be  reduced  to  the  form  of  the 
combinations  to  be  excluded,  as  suggested  by  Boole  and 
carried  out  by  Venn,  the  operation  of  excluding  these 
combinations  may  be  performed  mechanically  by  this 
machine.  I  have  followed  Jevons  in  making  use  of  keys, 
but  require  for  the  8-term  machine  only  eight  positive 
and  eight  negative  letter  keys  and  two  operation  keys. 
The  excluded  combinations  are  exhibited  by  indicators, 
which  fall  in  the  squares  of  one  of  my  logical  diagrams 
(Phil.  Mag.  ON.  '81)  from  the  perpendicular  to  a  hori 
zontal  position.  The  non-excluded  combinations,  which 
constitute  the  conclusion,  are  exhibited  by  the  indicators 
which  are  left  standing. 


ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

BY  CHRISTINE  LADD. 


THERE  are  in  existence  five  algebras  of  logic,  —  those 
of  Boole,  Jevons,  Schroder,  McColl,  and  Peirce,  —  of 
which  the  later  ones  are  all  modifications,  more  or  less 
slight,  of  that  of  Boole.  I  propose  to  add  one  more  to 
the  number.  It  will  bear  more  resemblance  to  that  of 
Schroder  than  to  any  of  the  others;  but  it  will  differ 
from  that  in  making  use  of  a  copula,  and  also  in  the 
form  of  expressing  the  conclusion.1 

ON  IDENTICAL  PROPOSITIONS. 

The  propositions  which  logic  considers  are  of  two 
kinds,  —  those  which  affirm  the  identity  of  subject  and 
predicate,  and  those  which  do  not.  Algebras  of  logic 
may  be  classified  according  to  the  way  in  which  they 
express  propositions  that  are  not  identities.  Identical 
propositions  have  the  same  expression  in  all.  Of  the 
logical  theorems  which  are  identities,  I  shall  give  those 
which  are  essential  to  the  subject,  and  for  the  most  part 
without  proof. 

(1)  The  sign  —  is  the  sign  'of  equality,  a  =  5,  a 
equals  #,  means  that  in  any  logical  expression  a  can 

1  The  substance  of  this  paper  was  read  at  a  meeting  of  the  Metaphysical 
Club  of  the  Johns  Hopkins  University,  held  in  January,  1881. 


18        ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

be  substituted  for  6,  or  b  for  #,  without  change  of  value. 
It  is  equivalent  to  the  two  propositions,  "  there  is  no  a 
which  is  not  5,"  and,  "  there  is  no  b  which  is  not  a." 

(2)  The  negative  of  a  term  or  a  proposition  or  a 
symbol  is  indicated  by  a  line  drawn  over  it.  a  =  what 
is  not  a. 


(3°)  a  +  b  =  what  is  either 
a  or  b.  As  a  class,  it  takes  in 
the  whole  of  a  together  with 
the  whole  of  b,  what  is  com 
mon  to  both  being  counted 
once  only.  It  has  the  quality 
of  either  a  or  b,  and  hence 
the  quality  of  the  entire  class 
is  the  quality  common  to  a 
and  b.  The  only  qualities  pos- 


(3')  aXb  =  what  is  both  a 
and  b.  As  a  class,  it  is  what 
is  common  to  the  classes  a  and 
b.  As  a  quality,  it  is  the 
combination  of  all  the  quali 
ties  of  a  with  all  the  qualities 
of  b.  When  relative  terms 
(XXI)1  are  excluded  from 
consideration,  ab  may  be  writ 
ten  for  a  X  b. 

sessed  by  every  member  of  the 
class  "  lawyers  and  bankers  '*  are  the  qualities  which  lawyers 
-and  bankers  have  in  common. 

When  arithmetical  multiplication  and  addition  are  to 
be  considered  at  the  same  time,  logical  multiplication 
and  addition  may  be  indicated  by  enclosing  +  and  X  in 
circles.  The  addition  of  logic  has  small  connection 
with  the  addition  of  mathematics,  and  the  multiplication 
has  no  connection  at  all  with  the  process  whose  name  it 
has  taken.  The  object  in  borrowing  the  words  and  the 
signs  is  to  utilize  the  familiarity  which  one  has  already 
acquired  with  processes  which  obey  somewhat  similar 
laws.  There  would  not  be  the  slightest  difficulty  in 
inverting  the  operations,  and  expressing  logical  multi 
plication  in  terms  of  addition,  and  logical  addition  in 
terms  of  multiplication.  The  essential  processes  of  sym 
bolic  logic  are  either  addition  or  multiplication  (for 
greater  convenience,  both  are  used),  and  negation.  The 
1  References  in  Roman  numerals  are  to  the  titles  at  the  end. 


ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.         19 

latter  process  renders  any  inverse  processes  which  might 
correspond  to  subtraction  and  division  quite  unneces 
sary,  and  it  is  only  on  account  of  a  supposed  resemb 
lance  between  the  logical  and  the  mathematical  processes 
that  an  attempt  to  introduce  them  has  been  made. 


(4;)  aaa  =  a. 

(5r)      abc  =  bca  =  cba. 
(6') 


(4°)      a  +  a  +  .  .  .  =  a. 

(5°)  a+b+c=b+c+a=c+b+a. 

(6°)  a  +  be=(a  +  b)(a  +  c). 
The  symbol  oo  represents  the  universe  of  discourse. 
(Wundt,  Peirce.)  It  may  be  the  universe  of  conceivable 
things,  or  of  actual  things,  or  any  limited  portion  of 
either.  It  may  include  non-Euclidian  w-dimensional 
space,  or  it  may  be  limited  to  the  surface  of  the  earth, 
or  to  the  field  of  a  microscope.  It  may  exclude  things 
and  be  restricted  to  qualities,  or  it  may  be  made  co 
extensive  with  fictions  of  any  kind.  In  any  proposition 
of  formal  logic,  oo  represents  wha,t  is  logically  possible  ; 
in  a  material  proposition  it  represents  what  exists. 
(Peirce.)  The  symbol  0  is  the  negative  of  the  sym 
bol  oo ;  it  denotes  either  what  is  logically  impossible,  or 
what  is  non-existent  in  an  actual  universe  of  any  degree 
of  limitation. 


(7') 
(80  a  = 

(9')ao=a+oo  =  a+(H5)+... 
(100  ab  +  al)  +  ab  +  aB 


(7°)   '      a  +  a  =  oo. 

(8°)    a=a+0  =  a+bt+cc+ 

(9°)    Q  =  aQ  = 

(10°) 


The  first  member  of  this  equa 
tion  is  called  the  complete  development  of  two  terms.  The 
complete  development  of  n  terms,  (a  +  a)  (b  +  1)  (c  +  c)  .  .  .  , 
consists  of  the  sum  of  2"  combinations  of  n  terms  each. 


(11')  a+ab  +  abc+  ...  =  a  \  (11°)  a(a+1>)(a+b+c).  .  .=a. 
This  is  called  by  Schroder  the  law  of  absorption. 


20  ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF  LOGIC. 

The  only  process  which  presents  any  difficulty  in  this 
calculus  is  the  process  of  getting  the  negative  of  a  com 
plex  expression  ;  and  that  difficulty  is  very  slight  if  the 
right  method  is  selected.  There  are  three  different 
methods,  of  which  the  last  is  of  most  frequent  use. 
The  first  proceeds  from  the  consideration  that  ab  +  al  + 
db  +  ab  is  a  complete  universe  (10'),  and  that  what  is 
not  one  portion  of  a  universe  must  be  some  other  portion, 
if  it  exists  at  all.  It  follows  that 

ab  —  ah  +  ab  +  ab, 

(12)  ab  +  al  =  ab  +  «5, 

ab  +  ab  +  ab  =  abj 

and  the  process  is  the  same  for  the  complete  develop 
ment  of  any  number  of  terms.  This  is  the  only  rule 
made  use  of  by  Boole  and  by  Mr.  Jevons  for  obtaining  a 
negative.  If  certain  combinations  of  ten  terms  are 
given  as  excluded,  to  get  those  which  are  not  excluded 
it  is  necessary,  by  this  method,  to  examine  1,024  combi 
nations  of  ten  terms  each. 

The  second  method  is  contained  in  the  following 
formulas  :  — 


(13') 


ab  —  a  +  b. 


(13°)        a  +  b  =  al. 
a  +  I  =  ab. 


That  is,  the  negative  of  a  product  is  the  sum  of  the 
negatives  of  the  terms,  and  the  negative  of  a  sum  is  the 
product  of  the  negatives  of  the  terms.1  For  example. 

1  Professor  Wundt  (XVIII.,  p.  257,  note)  makes  the  singular  mistake 
of  supposing  that  because  x  (y  -\-  2)  =  xy  -\-  xz,  the  parentheses  must  be 
removed  before  performing  any  general  operation  upon  an  expression. 
The  negative  of  a  product  of  the  form  (a  -f-  &  -f-  <?)  m,  he  says,  is  not 
dbc-{-m,  but  (a-f-m)  (b-\-m)  (c-}-m);  and  in  working  his  problems  he 
actually  expresses  it  in  this  way,  performs  the  indicated  multiplication, 
obtaining  doc  -f-  (a-f-  5  -f-  c)  m-\-m,  and  then  reduces  this  expression  by 
the  absorption  law  (11')  to  aoc-f-  ra. 


ON    THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  21 


a  +  be  +  def=  a  (5  +  c)  (a  +  e  +/). 

This  rule  was  first  given  by  De  Morgan  ("  On  the 
Syllogism,"  No.  III.,  1858).  It  may  be  proved  in  the 
following  way :  — 

by  (12), 


a  +  b  =  a  (b  +  b)  +  (a  +  a)  b 
=  ~ab~- 


ab  —  ab  +  al>  +  aft  +  aB 
=  a  (b  +  1)  +  (a  +  a)  I 

by  (12). 

It  appears  that  with  the  use  of  the  negative  sign  the 
sum  and  the  product  are  not  both  essential  to  complete 
expression.  A  sum  can  be  expressed  as  the  negative  of 
a  product,  or  a  product  can  be  expressed  as  the  negative 
of  a  sum.  The  dualism  which  has  been  pointed  out  by 
Schroder,  and  which  he  indicates  by  printing  his  theo 
rems  in  parallel  columns,  is,  then,  not  an  essential  quality 
of  things,  but  merely  an  accident  of  language.  We  prefer 
to  say  "  what  is  either  black  or  blue,"  to  saying  "  what 
is  not  at  the  same  time  both  not  black  and  not  blue ; "  but 
one  is  as  easy  to  express  symbolically  as  the  other.  It 
would  not  be  difficult  to  develop  the  whole  subject  in  terms 
of  multiplication  alone,  or  of  addition  alone  ;  but  the  gain 
in  simplicity  is  not  equal  to  the  loss  in  naturalness. 

The  third  method  of  obtaining  the  negative  of  an  ex 
pression  is  by  means  of  the  following  equation :  — 


(14)        pab  +  qal  +  rob  +  sab  —  pab  +  qab  +  fab  +  sab. 

That  is,  consider  any  number  of  the  letters  as  the 
elements  of  a  complete  development  (10'),  and  take  the 
negative  of  their  coefficients.  The  reason  is  the  same 
as  for  (12),  —  the  two  expressions  together  make  up  a 
complete  universe,  since 

pab  +  pa  b  =  ab,  etc. 
It  is  necessary  to  observe  that  if  any  part  of  the  develop- 


22  ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

ment  is  wanting,  its  coefficient  is  0,  and  the  negative  of 
its  coefficient  is  QO  .     For  instance, 


O  +  q  +  r)  xy  +  stxy  +  uvwxy 
=pqrxy  +  (§  +  t)  xy  +  (u  +  v  +  w)  xy  +  xy. 

The  entire  number  of  combinations  excluded  by  the 
first  member  is  7.25  +  26  +  25,  and  that  included  by 
the  second  member  is  25  +  3.26  +  7.26  +  28,  and  together 
they  make  up  1024.  This  rule  is  given  by  Schroder  only 
(XIV.,  p.  19).  It  is  much  easier  of  application  than 
(12)  or  (13),  except  when  the  given  expression  bears  no 
resemblance  to  a  complete  development. 

(15)  An  expression  may  be  said  to  be  in  its  simplest 
form  when  it  is  represented  by  the  smallest  possible 
number  of  letters.  It  does  not  follow  that  it  is  then  in 
its  least  redundant  form.  For  instance,  in 

a  +  b,  =  a  +  dbj  =  dL  +  b, 

a  +  b  is  simpler  than  either  of  the  other  expressions, 
but  it  is  redundant.  It  is 

a  (b  + 1)  +  (a  +  a)  b, 

which  contains  the  combination  ab  twice ;  while 
a  +  abj  =  a  (b  +  I)  +  ab, 

contains  each  combination  once  only.  The  reduction 
of  an  expression  to  its  simplest  form  may  usually  be 
accomplished  by  inspection.  Take,  for  example,  the 
expression 

a  +  be  +  abd  +  add. 
We  have 

a+  a($  +  c)d=  a  +  bed, 
and 

be  +  bed  =  be  +  d. 

Hence  the  whole  expression  is 

a  +  be  +  d. 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  23 

If  the  reduction  is  not  evident,  it  may  be  facilitated  by 
taking  the  negative  of  the  expression,  reducing  it,  and 
then  restoring  it  to  the  positive  form  (XVI.,  vol.  x. 
p.  18). 

OX  THE  COPULA. 

I  shall  adopt  the  convention  by  which  particular  pro 
positions  are  taken  as  implying  the  existence  of  their 
subjects,  and  universal  propositions  as  not  implying  the 
existence  of  their  subjects.  Mr.  Jevons  would  infer  that 
the  two  propositions 

The  sea-serpent  is  not  found  in  the  water, 
The  sea-serpent  is  not  found  out  of  the  water, 

are  contradictory ;  but  Mr.  McColl,  Mr.  Venn,  and  Mr. 
Peirce  would  infer  that  the  sea-serpent  does  not  exist. 
With  this  convention,  contradiction  can  never  exist 
between  universal  propositions  nor  between  particular 
propositions  taken  by  themselves.  A  universal  propo 
sition  can  be  contradicted  only  by  a  particular  propo 
sition,  and  a  particular  only  by  a  universal.  The  above 
premises  are  inconsistent  with 

The  sea-serpent  has  (at  least  once)  been  found. 

With  this  convention,  hypothetical  and  categorical  pro 
positions  receive  the  same  formal  treatment.  If  «,  then 
b  =  all  a  is  b  —  a  implies  b.  (Peirce.) 

Algebras  of  Logic  may  be  divided  into  two  classes,  ac 
cording  as  they  assign  the  expression  of  the  "  quantity  " 
of  propositions  to  the  copula  or  to  the  subject.  Algebras 
of  the  latter  class  have  been  developed  with  one  copula 
only,  —  the  sign  of  equality ;  for  an  algebra  of  the 
former  class  two  copulas  are  necessary,1  —  one  universal 

1  Every  algebra  of  logic  requires  two  copulas,  one  to  express  propo 
sitions  of  non-existence,  the  other  to  express  propositions  of  existence. 
This  necessarily  follows  from  Kant's  discussion  of  the  nature  of  the  affir 
mation  of  existence  in  the  "  Critik  der  reinen  Vernunft."  —  0.  S.  Peirce. 


24 


ON    THE    ALGEBEA    OF    LOGIC. 


and  one  particular.  The  following  are  the  propositional 
forms  which  have  been  used  by  the  principal  recent 
Avriters  on  the  algebra  of  logic  : 1  — 


Traditional. 

Boole 
and 
Schroder. 

Jevons 
and 
Grassmann. 

Grassmann. 

McColl. 

Peirce. 

Uni 
versal. 

All     a    is     b 

No      a    is     b 

a=vb 
a=vl) 

a  =  ab 
a  =  aB 

a  +  b=b 
a  +1=1 

a  :  b 

a  :  1} 

a-<b 
a-<l 

Partic 
ular. 

Some  a    is     b 
Some  a  is  not  & 

va  =  vb 
va  =  vfi 

ca  =  cab 
ca=cab 

ca-{-b  =  b 
ca-{-b=:b 

a-f-5 

a^-b 

a^<l 
a^<b 

v  is  a  special  symbol,  used  to  denote  an  arbitrary, 
indefinite  class.  It  is  immediately  eliminated  from  the 
universal  propositions,  which  then  appear  in  the  forms 
ab  =  0,  ab  =  0,  respectively.  In  particular  propositions 
"  v  is  not  quite  arbitrary,  and  therefore  must  not  be  eli 
minated"  (III.,  p.  124).  Jevons  makes  no  distinction 
between  an  indefinite  class  symbol,  c,  and  any  other 
class  symbol.  With  Mr.  McColl,  every  letter  denotes  a 
statement.  By  a  :  b  is  meant  that  the  statement  that 
any  object  is  a  implies  the  statement  that  it  is  also  5; 
but  this  does  not  affect  the  working  of  the  algebra. 
The  negative  copula,  -f-,  is  the  denial  of  the  affirmative 
copula,  : ,  arid  a  -f-  b',  or,  as  he  also  writes  it,  (a  :  5')',  is 
read  "  a  does  not  imply  non-5."  Mr.  Peirce' s  symbol  for 
the  same  copula  is  a  modification  of  ^.  a  ^<  b  is  the 
denial  of  a  -<  6,  and  is  read,  "  a  is  not  wholly  contained 
under  6."  a  and  b  may  be  either  terms  or  propositions. 
The  copula  -<  has  an  advantage  over  :  in  that  it  ex 
presses  an  unsymmetrical  relation  by  an  unsymmetrical 


1  Mr.  Venn  has  collected  some  two  dozen  ways  in  which  "a  is  b"  has 
been  put  into  logical  form. 


ON    THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  25 

symbol,  a  -<  b  may  be  written  b  >-  a  and  read,  "  b 
contains  a." 

This  quantified  copula  (-<  or  :)  is  positive  for  uni 
versal  propositions,  and  negative  for  particular  proposi 
tions.     Another  kind  of  quantified  copula  is  possible,— 
namely,  one  which  is  particular  when  positive,  and  uni 
versal  when  negative.     Instead  of  writing 

(  A^<  B 

\      and      \       A  is-not-wholly  B 
(or  A  is-partly-not  B, 

we  might  write 

AVB  I      an(l      J       AV  B 

A  is-wliolly-not  B  )  (A  is-partly  B, 

and  it  will  appear  that  this  latter  plan  has  certain  advan 
tages.  It  comes  perhaps  a  little  nearer  to  common  use. 
The  sense  "  wholly "  is  usually  attached  to  both  is  and 
is-not,  but  somewhat  more  strongly  to  the  latter  than  to 
the  former.  We  say,  for  instance,  "  flowers  are  fra 
grant,"  meaning  that  flowers  are  nearly  always  fra 
grant  ;  but  "  leaves  are  not  blue "  means  that  leaves 
are  absolutely  never  blue.  "  Knives  are  sharp  "  would 
be  taken  as  true  ;  "  knives  are  not  blunt "  would  excite 
opposition  in  the  mind  of  the  hearer. 

The  sign  V  is  a  wedge,  sign  of  exclusion.  A  V  B  is  to 
be  read  "  A  is-not  B,"  or  "  A  is  excluded  from  B"  The 
sign  V  is  an  incompleted  wedge,  sign  of  incomplete  ex 
clusion.  A  V  B  is  to  be  read  "  A  is  in  part  B"  or 
u  A  is  not-wholly  excluded  from  B"  V  is  made  into  V 
by  the  addition  of  the  negative  sign ;  what  is  not  not 
wholly  excluded  from  anything  is  wholly  excluded  from 
it.  AvB  and  AvB  are  contradictory  propositions ; 
each  simply  denies  the  other. 

The  eight  propositions  of  De  Morgan  are  then, — 


26  ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

A  V  B  A  is-not  B ;   no  A  is  B. 

A  V  B  A  is  in  part  B ;   some  A  is  .#. 

^  V  B  A  is-not  not-£ ;   all  A  is  ^. 

A  V  B  A  is  partly  not-1? ;    some  A  is  not  .B. 

AVB  What  is  not  ^4  is-not  B ;   .4  includes  all  B. 

V  ^  What  is  not  A  is  in  part  B;  A  does  not  include  all  B. 

What  is  not  A  is-not  not-^;  there  is  nothing  he- 
sides  A  and  B. 

What  is  not  ^  is  in  part  not-B ;  there  is  something 
besides  A  and  B,  — 

where  V  connects  terms  that,  exist,  while  V  connects 
terms  which  may  be  non-existent.  Only  six  of  these 
propositions  are  distinct,  since  there  is  no  difference  of 
form  ^between  A\/S  and  A\/£,  nor  between  A  V  5? 
and  A  V  B. 

Propositions  expressed  with  the  copula  :  or  -<  are 
called  inclusions ;  propositions  expressed  with  the  cop 
ula  V  may  be  called  exclusions.  Exclusions  with  an 
even  number  of  negative  signs  are  positive  (affirmative) 
propositions ;  those  with  an  odd  number  are  negative 
propositions  (De  Morgan,  "  Syllabus  of  a  Proposed  Sys 
tem  of  Logic,"  p.  22).  But  the  distinction,  as  Professor 
Wundt  and  others  have  pointed  out,  is  unimportant.  The 
only  division  of  propositions  which  is  of  consequence  is 
the  division  into  universal  and  particular.  The  copulas 
V  and  V  are  intransitive  copulas,  —  a  kind  of  copula  of 
which  De  Morgan  proposed  to  investigate  the  characters 
("  Syllabus,"  p.  31).  They  are  symmetrical  copulas,  and 
the  propositions  A  V  B,  A  V  B,  may  be  read  either  for 
ward  or  backward.  It  is  from  the  fact  that  there  is  no 
formal  difference  between  subject  and  predicate  that  the 
advantages  of  this  algebra  follow.  There  is,  however,  a 
slight  difference  in  meaning  between  A\/B  and  B  V  A ; 


ON  THE  ALGEBKA  OF  LOGIC.        27 

the  subject  of  the  proposition  is  more  evidently  the  subject 
of  discourse.  The  propositions,  "  no  men  are  mortal/' 
and  "  there  are  no  mortal  men,"  convey  the  same  infor 
mation;  but  the  first  offers  it  by  way  of  information 
about  men,  and  the  second  by  way  of  a  description  of 
the  universe.  Information  may  be  given  about  a  pre 
dicate  by  the  use  of  a  different  kind  of  copula;  as  in 
"  no  lack  of  hospitality  is  found  among  Baltimoreans." 

An  inclusion  is  changed  into  the  equivalent  exclusion 
by  changing  the  sign  of  the  predicate.  When  an  exclusion 
is  to  be  made  into  an  inclusion,  it  is  a  matter  of  indiffer 
ence  which  of  its  terms  is  regarded  as  predicate  ;  every 
exclusion  contains  within  itself  two  inclusions,  of  which 
each  is  the  converse  by  contraposition  of  the  other. 
That  is  to  say, 


AV  B  =  A^<B  =  B^<^.. 

With  this  copula,  therefore,  the  consideration  of  the  con 
version  of  propositions  is  rendered  unnecessary.  So  also 
is  the  consideration  of  the  quantification  of  the  predicate. 
With  the  copula  -<  the  subject  and  predicate  have  un 
like  quantity,  or,  more  exactly,  the  quantity  of  the 
subject  is  universal  and  that  of  the  predicate  is  indeter 
minate  ;  -<  means  either  equal  to  or  less  than.  But 
with  the  copula  V  the  quantity  of  both  subject  and  pre 
dicate  is  universal,  and  with  its  denial  V  both  subject 
and  predicate  are  taken  in  part  only. 

The  copula  -<  must  be  taken  in  an  inverted  sense 
according  as  subject  and  predicate  are  taken  in  exten 
sion  or  in  intension  ;  but  the  copula  V  possesses  the  same 
meaning,  whatever  interpretation  one  gives  to  the  terms 
which  it  separates.  The  proposition  men  are  animals 
means  that  all  the  individuals,  man,  are  contained  among 


28  ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

the  individuals,  animal  ;  but  that  the  qualities  which  dis 
tinguish  an  animal  are  contaiued  among  the  qualities 
which  distinguish  a  man.  The  proposition  no  stones  are 
plants  means  that  the  objects  denoted  and  the  qualities 
connoted  by  the  term  stone  are  inconsistent  with  the 
objects  denoted  and  the  qualities  connoted  by  the  term 
plant.  It  is  to  be  remembered  that  every  term  is  at 
once  a  sum  of  objects  and  a  product  of  qualities.  If 
the  term  a  denotes  the  objects  al9  «2>  az  .  .  .  and  con 
notes  the  qualities  al9  «2,  «3  .  .  .  ,  then 


a  =   al      a2  +  .  .  . 
and  the  full  content  of  the  proposition  no  a  is  b  is 


But  the  full  content  of  the  proposition  all  a  is  b  can  be 
expressed  only  by  the  two  statements 

a1  +  a2+...  +  ai-<  bL  +  b2+  bs+  ..  .  and  ftft.  .  .&-<  a^ag... 

where  the  i  objects  a  are  identical  each  with  some  one  of 
the  objects  b  and  they  qualities  ft  are  identical  each  with 
some  one  of  the  qualities  a. 

If  p  denotes  a  premise  and  c  a  conclusion  drawn  from 
it,  then 

p  V  G  (m) 

states  that  the  premise  and  the  denial  of  the  conclusion 
cannot  go  together  ;  and 

p  V  o  (n) 

states  that  the  premise  is  sometimes  accompanied  by  the 
falsity  of  the  conclusion.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  men 
tion  that  (w)  is  satisfied  by  either  the  truth  of  the  con 
clusion  or  the  falsity  of  the  premise,  and  that  (n) 
implies  that  both  the  premise  and  the  negative  of  the 
conclusion  must,  at  some  time,  be  true. 


CXN"   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


29 


The  word  inference  (or  consequence)  implies  proceed 
ing  in  a  definite  direction  in  an  argument,  —  either  from 
the  premise  to  the  conclusion,  or  from  the  negative  of  the 
conclusion  to  the  negative  of  the  premise.  The  argu 
ment  p  v  c  may  be  called  an  inconsistency.  It  is  a 
form  of  argument  into  which  the  idea  of  succession  does 
not  enter  ;  it  simply  denies  the  possible  co-existence  of 
two  propositions.  An  inconsistency  between  two  propo 
sitions  is  equivalent  to  each  of  two  equivalent  conse 
quences,  and  a  consistency  to  each  of  two  equivalent 
inconsequences  ;  or 


c=p-<c  = 


The  copulas  V  and  V  with  the  symbol  oo  give  means  for 
expressing  the  total  non-existence  and  the  partial  exist 
ence  of  expressions  of  any  degree  of  complexity.  Pro 
positions  with  the  symbol  0  do  not  occur  in  this  algebra. 


(16')  x  v  °°  =  "x  does 
not,  under  any  circumstances, 
exist." 

A  universal  proposition  does 
not  imply  the  existence  of  its 
subject;  therefore  x  \7  0  =  "x 
(if  there  is  any  x)  is  not 
non-existent,"  —  a  proposition 
which  is  true  whatever  x  may 
be. 


(16°)  x  V  oo  =  "x  is  at 
least  sometimes  existent." 

A  particular  proposition 
does  imply  the  existence  of  its 
subject ;  therefore  x  V  0  =  "  x 
exists,  and  at  the  same  time 
does  not  exist,"  —  a  propo 
sition  which  is  false  whatever 
x  may  be. 


Since  the  symbol  0  will  not  appear  at  all  in  proposi 
tions  expressed  with  these  copulas,  it  will  not  be  neces 
sary  to  write  the  symbol  co  .  I  shall  therefore  express 
"  there  is  no  x  "  simply  by  x  V- 


30 


ON    THE   ALGEBRA   OF    LOGIC. 


(170         a\Jb  =  aby 

abc  \/=a\/bc  =  ca\/b  =  ... 

To  say  that  no  a  is  b  is  the 
same  thing  as  to  say  that  the 
combination  ab  does  not  ex 
ist. 


(17°)        aVb 
abc  V  =  aV  bc 

To  say  that  some  a  is  b  is 
the  same  thing  as  to  say  that 
the  combination  ab  does  at 
least  sometimes  exist. 


The  factors  of  a  combination  which  is  excluded  or  not 
excluded  may  be  written  in  any  order,  and  the  copula 
may  be  inserted  at  any  point,  or  it  may  be  written  at 
either  end.  The  proposition  abc  y  de  may  be  read  "  abc 
is-not  de,"  "  cd  is-not  abe"  "  abe  is-not  do,  —  that  is,  is 
either  not  d  or  not  c,"  etc.  Any  0,  1,  2,  3,  4,  or  5  of  the 
letters  may  be  made  the  subject  and  the  others  the  predi 
cate,  and  the  positive  or  the  negative  universal  copula 
may  be  used  ;  or  there  are  in  all  2.32,  =  64,  different 
ways  of  putting  the  above  proposition  into  words. 

If  a  is  a  proposition,  a  \j  states  that  the  proposition  is 
not  true  in  the  universe  of  discourse.  For  several  pro 
positions,  abc  v  means  that  they  are  not  all  at  the  same 
time  true  ;  and  the  way  in  which  they  are  stated  to  be 
not  all  at  the  same  time  true  depends  on  the  character 
of  the  universe.  If  it  be  the  universe  of  the  logically 
possible,  then  pl  p2  c  \/  states  that  pi  and  p%  may  be 
taken  as  the  premises  and  c  the  conclusion  of  a  valid 
syllogism.  It  is  the  single  expression  in  this  system  for 
a  proposition  which  in  the  system  of  inclusions  appears 
in  the  several  forms 


from  the  premises  the  conclusion  follows  ;  if  the  conclu 
sion  is  false,  one  at  least  of  the  premises  is  false  ;  from 
one  premise  may  be  inferred  either  the  conclusion  or  the 
contradictory  of  the  other  premise,  and  from  one  pre 
mise  and  the  contradictory  of  the  conclusion  follows  the 


ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.         31 

contradictory  of  the  other  premise.  If  the  universe 
which  is  understood  is  the  universe  of  what  is  possible 
in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  nature,  then  ab  V  denotes 
that  the  simultaneous  truth  of  a  and  b  is  a  contradiction 
of  those  laws.  That  x  and  y  stand  in  the  relation  of 
cause  and  effect  may  be  expressed  by  xy  \j.  If  a?  is  a 
certain  position  and  y  its  attendant  acceleration,  the 
above  proposition  states  that  the  position  and  the  ab 
sence  of  the  acceleration  are  not  found  together;  that 
from  the  position  may  be  inferred  the  acceleration,  and 
from  the  absence  of  the  acceleration  may  be  inferred  the 
absence  of  the  position.  If  a  V  I  means  that  Greeks  are 
brave,  and  c  \j  d  means  that  the  megatherium  is  not 
extinct,  then 

(a\/l)\/(c\j  d) 

affirms  that  the  co-existence  of  these  two  propositions  is 
excluded  from  the  universe  of  what  is  actually  true.  In 
like  manner,  according  to  the  character  of  the  universe 
of  discourse,  a  V  6  denotes  either  that  the  two  proposi 
tions  are  logically  consistent,  or  that  they  are  possibly 
co-existent,  or  that  they  have  actually  been  at  some  mo 
ment  of  time  both  true.1 

ALGEBRA  OF  THE  COPULA. 
By  the  definition  (1),  we  have 

(18)  (a  =  b)  =  (ayt)(ayb). 
Since  also 

(a  =  5)  =  (*v!)(av»), 

it  follows  that 

(19)  (a  =  b)  =  (a  =  I). 
In  particular, 

(20)  (ab  =  0)  =  (ab  =  oo)  =  (ab  y  oo) ; 

1  The  thorough-going  extension  of  the  idea  of  a  limited  universe  to  the 
relations  between  propositions  is  due  to  Mr.  Peirce. 


32  ON   THE   ALGEBRA    OF    LOGIC. 

for  the  exclusions  to  which  each  equation  is  equivalent 
are  (ab  V  oo)  (db  V  0), 

and  ab  V  0  is  a  proposition  of  no  content. 

The  principles  of  contradiction  and  excluded  middle 
are  therefore  completely  expressed  by 

(70  aa  v-  1  (7°)  a+a  V. 

In  any  symbolic  logic  there  are  three  subjects  for  con 
sideration,  —  the  uniting  and  separating  of  propositions; 
the  insertion  or  omission  of  terms,  or  immediate  infer 
ence  ;  and  elimination  with  the  least  possible  loss  of 
content,  or  syllogism. 

On  uniting  and  separating  Propositions.  —  From  the 
definitions  of  logical  sum  and  logical  product  applied 
to  terms  and  to  propositions  we  have  the  following  iden 
tities  :  — 


(210  (a 

for  the  first  member  of  the 
equation  states  that  a  does 
not  exist  and  that  b  does  not 
exist;  and  the  second  mem 
ber  states  that  neither  a  nor 


(21°) 

for  the  first  member  of  the 
equation  states  that  either  a 
exists  or  b  exists;  and  the 
second  member  states  that 
either  a  or  b  exists. 


b  exists. 

In  both  cases,  a  and  b  may  be  logical  expressions  of 
any  degree  of  complexity.  A  combination  of  any  num 
ber  of  universal  propositions,  or  an  alternation  of  any 
number  of  particular  propositions,  is  then  expressed  as  a 
single  proposition  by  taking  the  sum  of  the  elements  of 
the  separate  propositions.  This  is  the  only  form  of  in 
ference  (if  it  should  be  called  inference  at  all)  in  which 
the  conclusion  is  identical  with  the  premises.  The  equa 
tions  (21')  and  (21°)  are  not  in  reality  two  distinct 


ON    THE    ALGEBKA    OF    LOGIC. 


33 


equations ;  they  are,  by  (19),  one  and  the  same  equa 
tion;  since,  by  (13),  the  negative  of  («v)  (^  V)  is 
(a  V)  +  (ft  V),  and  the  negative  of  a  +  by  is  a+  ft  V. 
They  are  each  equivalent  to  the  two  inconsistencies, 

(a  v)  (b  v)  V  0  +  ft  V) 
C    J 

(»  v)  +  0  v)  v  0  +  ^  v)- 

There  is  no  single  expression  in  this  algebra  for  a  sum 
of  universal  propositions  or  a  product  of  particular  pro 
positions. 


To  express  that  the  propo 
sitions,  some  a  is  b  and  some  c 
is  d,  are  not  both  at  the  same 
time  true  (or  that  it  is  true 
throughout  the  universe  of  dis 
course  that  either  no  a  is  b  or 


To  express  that  neither  of 
the  propositions,  no  a  is  b  and 
no  c  is  d,  is  true  (or  that  it  is 
true  throughout  the  universe 
of  discourse  that  both  some  a 
is  b  and  some  c  is  d),  we  must 
write 


else  no  c  is  d),  we  must  write 

(a  y  ft)  (c  V  d)  y> 
And   the   expression   for  the   corresponding  particular 
propositions  which  follow  from  these  universals  is 

(a  \7  ft)  +  (c  v  d)  v ; 
that   is,    there   is   some  time 


when  either  no  a  is  b  or  else 
no  c  is  d. 


(a  V  b)  (c  yd)  V ; 

that  is,  there  is  some  time 
when  both  some  a  is  b  and 
some  c  is  d. 


On  inserting  and  dropping  Terms.  —  The  following  in 
consistencies  are  immediate  consequences  of  the  defini 
tions  of  the  sum  and  the  product  :  — 


(23)  (abc  V)  v  (^  V)- 

The  first  asserts  that  the  total  non-existence  of  several 
things  is  inconsistent  with  the  existence  of  some  of 
them  ;  the  second  asserts  that  the  total  non-existence 


34 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


of  something,  as  ab,  is  inconsistent  with  the  existence  of 
some  part  of  it,  as  ab  which  is  c.  They  are  not  two  dis 
tinct  inconsistencies,  however ;  either  may  be  derived  as 
a  consequence  from  the  other.  These  inconsistencies, 
when  put  into  the  form  of  inferences,  become  — 

(22°)  If       a  +  b  V, 

then  a  +  b  +  c  V  ; 

(23°)  If       abc  V, 
then  ab  V. 

That  is  to  say,  given  a  par 
tial  inclusion,  factors  may  be 
dropped  and  parts  of  a -sum 
may  be  introduced,  but  not 
without  loss  of  content. 


(22')    If      a  +  b  +  c  V? 
then  a  +  b  y  > 

(23')    If       ab  V> 

then  abc  y . 

That  is  to  say,  given  a  uni 
versal  exclusion,  factors  may 
be  introduced  and  parts  of  a 
sum  may  be  dropped,  but  not 
without  loss  of  content. 


As  a  particular  case  of  both  of  the  inconsistencies 
(22)  and  (23)  we  have 

(a  yb)(cyd)y(ac\fb  +  d).1  I. 

If  into  the  expression  which  is  affirmed  not  to  exist, 
ab  +  cd,  we  introduce  the  factor  c  +  a ;  and  if  from  the 
product,  acb  +  acd  +  ab  +  cd,  we  drop  the  parts  of  a  sum, 
ab  +  cd, —  there  remains  ac  (6  +  eT),  the  existence  of 
which  is  inconsistent  with  the  non-existence  of  ab  and 
cd.  Since  there  is  no  difference  between  subject  and 

predicate, 

(ayb)(c~yd)y(a  +  c\f  bd) 

is  an  inconsistency  of  quite  the  same  nature  as  I.  For 
the  expression  of  /.  in  words  we  have  — 

Ia.  It  is  not  possible  that  what  is  common  to  several 
classes  should  have  any  quality  which  is  excluded  from 

1  In  its  affirmative  form,  "if  a  is  b  and  c  is  d,  then  ac  is  bd,"  this  is 
Theorem  I.  of  Mr.  Peirce's  paper  on  the  Algebra  of  Logic  (XXL).  As 
pointed  out  by  Mr.  Venn,  it  was  first  given  by  Leibnitz  :  "  Specimen  de- 
monstrandi,"  Erdmann,  p.  99. 


ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.         35 

one  of  them.  If,  for  example,  no  bankers  are  poor  and 
no  lawyers  are  honest,  it  is  impossible  that  lawyers  who 
are  bankers  should  be  either  poor  or  honest. 

In  this  way  the  theorem  is  put  into  words  in  terms  of 
a  quality  which  is  excluded  from  a  class.  It  is  a  pro 
perty  of  the  negative  copula  that  it  lends  itself  equally 
well  to  the  expression  of  propositions  wholly  in  exten 
sion  and  wholly  in  intension,  and  also  with  the  subject 
taken  intensively  and  the  predicate  extensively.  We 
should  have  in  words,  in  these  cases  respectively  — 

Ib.  If  several  classes  are  respectively  excluded  from 
several  others,  no  part  of  what  is  common  to  them  can 
be  included  in  any  of  the  others ; 

Ic.  If  several  qualities  are  inconsistent  respectively 
with  several  others,  their  combination  is  not  consistent 
with  any  of  the  others. 

Id.  It  is  not  possible  that  a  combination  of  several 
qualities  should  be  found  in  any  classes  from  each  of 
which  some  one  of  those  qualities  is  absent.  If,  for 
example,  culture  is  never  found  in  business  men  nor 
respectability  among  artists,  then  it  is  impossible  that 
cultured  respectability  should  be  found  among  either 
business  men  or  artists. 

The  inconsistency  I.  is  the  most  general  form  of  that 
mode  of  reasoning  in  which  a  conclusion  is  drawn  from 
two  premises,  by  throwing  away  part  of  the  information 
which  they  convey  and  uniting  in  one  proposition  that 
part  which  it  is  desired  to  retain.  It  will  be  shown  that 
it  includes  syllogism  as  a  particular  case.  The  essential 
character  of  the  syllogism  is  that  it  effects  the  elimina 
tion  of  a  middle  term,  and  in  this  argument  there  is  no 
middle  term  to  be  eliminated. 

When  combinations  of  any  number  of  terms  are  given 
as  excluded,  a  proposition  with  which  they  are  inconsis- 


36         ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

tent  can  be  formed  by  taking  any  number  of  terms  out 
of  each  and  uniting  them  as  a  sum  and  denying  their 
co-existence  with  the  product  of  the  terms  which  re 
main.     If  _  _ 
abc  v?        plh  V? 

affirm  that  no  American  bankers  are  uncharitable  and 
that  no  Philadelphia  lawyers  are  dishonest,  then  it  is  im 
possible  that  any  Philadelphia  bankers  are  either  un 
charitable  Americans  or  dishonest  lawyers;  that  any 
uncharitable  and  dishonest  lawyers  are  either  Philadel- 
phians  or  American  bankers  ;  that  any  bankers  who  are 
also  Philadelphia  lawyers  are  either  uncharitable  Ameri 
cans  or  dishonest,  etc.  Any,  none,  one,  two,  or  three, 
terms  from  the  first  premise  may  be  taken  to  form  the 
sum  with  any,  none,  one,  two,  or  three,  terms  from  the 
second  premise;  there  are,  therefore,  sixteen  different 
conclusions  to  be  drawn  in  this  way  from  these  two 
premises,  —  of  which  dbcpTil  \/  is  the  least,  since  it  has 
dropped  the  most  information,  and  abc  +  plh  y  is  the 
greatest,  since  it  has  dropped  none  of  the  information. 

The  inconsistency  I.  may  be  put  into  an  inference  in 
four  different  ways,  according  as  both  universals,  one 
universal,  one  universal  and  the  particular,  or  the  parti 
cular  alone,  is  taken  as  premise  and  the  negative  of  what 
remains  as  conclusion.  There  are,  therefore  (when  I. 
contains  the  smallest  possible  number  of  propositions), 
four  distinct  forms  of  inference,  or  progressive  argu 
ment,  with  no  middle  term,  in  each  of  which  the  con 
clusion  is  a  diminished  conclusion.  The  factors  of  I. 
are,  in  general,  one  particular  and  any  number  of  uni 
versals.  The  number  of  distinct  forms  of  progressive 
argument  which  can  be  made  out  of  an  inconsistency 
between  n  propositions  of  which  n  —  1  are  universal,  by 
taking  1,  2, . .  or  n  —  1  of  the  universal  propositions  with 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


37 


or  without  the  particular  proposition  as  premise  and  the 
negative  of  what  remains  as  conclusion,  is  2(^  —  1). 
Argument  by  way  of  inconsistencies,  therefore,  what 
ever  may  be  thought  of  its  naturalness,  is  at  least 
2  (n  —  1)  times  more  condensed  than  argument  in  the 
usual  form. 

When  I.  is  made  into  an  inference  in  such  a  way  that 
one  conclusion  is  drawn  from  two  premises,  we  have, 


if  the  premises  are  both  uni 
versal, 

(24')  «  V  * 

c  \7  d 
.'.  ac  \/  b  rh  d 

If  no  bankers  have  souls 
and  no  poets  have  bodies,  then 
no  banker-poets  have  either 
souls  or  bodies. 


if  the  premises  are  one  uni 
versal  and  one  particular, 

(24°)  ayb 

ac  v  #  +  d 
.'.  c  v  d 

If  no  Africans  are  brave 
and  some  African  chiefs  are 
either  brave  or  deceitful,  then 
some  chiefs  are  deceitful. 


On  Elimination.  —  In  (24')  there  is  no  elimination, 
and  in  (24°)  there  is  elimination  of  the  whole  of  the 
first  premise  and  part  of  the  second.  The  most  common 
object  in  reasoning  is  to  eliminate  a  single  term  at  a  time, 
—  namely,  one  which  occurs  in  both  premises.  Each  of 
these  inferences  gives  rise  to  a  form  of  argument,  as  a 
special  case,  by  which  that  object  is  accomplished,— 
the  premises  being  on  the  one  hand  both  universal,  and  on 
the  other  hand  one  universal  and  the  other  particular. 
The  inconsistency  I.  becomes,  when  d  is  equal  to  5,  and 
hence  b  +  d  equal  to  oo, 

(a  v  V)  (c  V  &)  (ac  v  <*>)  V> 
or 

(a  v  1)  (^  v  c)  (G  V  a)  V-  -^ 

Given  any  two  of  these  propositions,  the  third  proposi 
tion,  with  which  it  is  inconsistent,  is  free  from  the  term 


38 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


common  to  the  two  given  propositions  ;  a,  &,  and  c  are, 
of  course,  expressions  of  any  degree  of  complexity. 
The  propositions  ma ^/x  +  y,xy~\jc  +  n,  for  instance, 
arc  inconsistent  with  ma  V  c  +  n;  any  number  of  terms 
may  be  eliminated  at  once  by  combining  them  in  such  a 
way  that  they  shall  make  up  a  complete  universe. 

When  any  two  of  the  inconsistent  propositions  in  II. 
are  taken  as  premises,  the  negative  of  the  remaining  one 
is  the  conclusion.  There  are,  therefore,  two  distinct 
forms  of  inference  with  elimination  of  a  middle  term, 
special  cases  of  (24')  and  (24°).  If  we  write  x  for  the 
middle  term,  we  have 


(25')  a\/  x 

b\/x 
.-.  ab  v- 

The  premises  are 
a  (b  + 1)  x  \/ 
(a  +  a)  bx  v  ; 
and  together  they  affirm  that 


or 


ab  (x  +  x)  +  abx  +  abx  v> 

ab  +  abx  +  a£x  V- 

Dropping  the  information  con 
cerning  x,  there  remains 

ab  y. 

The  information  given  by  the 
conclusion  is  thus  exactly  one 


half  of  the  information  given 
by  the  premises  (Jevons). 


(25°)  a  v  x 

bV  x 
.-.  ba  V. 
The  second  premise  is 

bx  (ax+ax)  V, 
which  becomes,  since  there  is 


no  ax, 


or 


bx  (a  +  x)  V, 
bxa\f. 


Dropping  the  information  con 
cerning  x,  there  remains 

baV. 

This  conclusion  is  equivalent 
to 


ba  V  x  +  #; 

but  the  premises   permit  the 
conclusion 

ba  V  z; 

hence  the  amount  of  informa 
tion  retained  is  exactly  one  half  of  the  (particular)  infor 
mation  given  by  the  premises. 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


39 


Elimination  is  therefore  merely  a  particular  case  of 
dropping  irrelevant  information. 

When  a  and  b  are  single 
terms,  (25')  is  the  doubly  uni 
versal  syllogism,  and  it  is  the 
single  form  in  which  that 
syllogism  appears  in  this  alge 
bra.  When  it  is  translated 
into  syllogism  with  an  affirm 
ative  copula,  it  is  necessary 
to  consider  the  four  variations 
of  figure  which  are  produced 
according  as  x  or  x  is  made 
subject  or  predicate.  The 
eight  moods  in  each  figure 
correspond  to  the  eight  varia 
tions  of  sign  which  may  be 
given  to  a,  b.  and  x.  All  the 
rules  for  the  validity  of  the 
doubly  universal  syllogism  are 
contained  in  these  :  — 


(1)  The  middle  term  must 
have  unlike  signs  in  the  two 
premises. 

(2)  The  other  terms  have 
the  same  sign  in  the  conclu 
sion  as  in  the  premises. 


When  a  and  b  are  single 
terms,  (25°)  is  the  universal- 
particular  syllogism,  and  it 
is  the  only  form  of  that  syllo 
gism  in  this  algebra.  It  can 
be  translated  into  eight  differ 
ent  forms  of  syllogism  with 
unsymmetrical  copula,  accord 
ing  as  x  is  made  subject  or 
predicate  of  either  premise, 
and  according  as  a  or  b  is 
made  subject  of  the  conclu 
sion.  The  eight  moods  of  the 
major  and  minor  particular 
syllogism  in  each  figure  corre 
spond  to  the  eight  variations 
of  sign  which  may  be  given 
to  a,  b,  and  x.  All  the  rules 
for  the  validity  of  the  uni 
versal-particular  syllogism  are 
contained  in  these  :  — 

(1)  The  middle  term  must 
have  the  same  sign   in   both 
premises. 

(2)  The  other  term  of  the 
universal  premise  only  has  its 
sign   changed   in  the  conclu 
sion. 


Those  syllogisms  in  which  a  particular  conclusion  is 
drawn  from  two  universal  premises  become  illogical 
when  the  universal  proposition  is  taken  as  not  implying 
the  existence  of  its  terms.1 


1  McColl :  Symbolical  Reasoning,  —  Mind,   no.  xvii.     Peirce  :  Algebra 
of  Logic,  — Am.  Journal  of  Math.,  vol.  iii. 


40         ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

The  argument  of  inconsistency, 

(a  v  1)  (J>  V  <0  0  V  «)  v>  II- 

is  therefore  the  single  form  to  which  all  the  ninety-six 
valid  syllogisms  (both  universal  and  particular)  may  be 
reduced.  It  is  an  affirmation  of  inconsistency  between 
three  propositions  in  three  terms,  —  such  that  one  of  the 
propositions  is  particular,  and  the  other  two  are  univer 
sal  ;  and  such  that  the  term  common  to  the  two  universal 
propositions  appears  with  unlike  signs,  and  the  other  two 
terms  appear  with  like  signs.  Any  given  syllogism  is 
immediately  reduced  to  this  form  by  taking  the  contra 
dictory  of  the  conclusion,  and  by  seeing  that  universal 
propositions  are  expressed  with  a  negative  copula  and 
particular  propositions  with  an  affirmative  copula.  Thus 
the  syllogisms  Baroko  and  Bokardo,1 

All      P     is       M,  Some  M  is  not  P, 

Some  S  is  not  M,  All      M     is       £, 

.-.  Some  S  is  not  P,  /.  Some  S  is  not  P, 

are  equivalent  respectively  to  the  inconsistencies 

(P  V  M)  (S  V  M)  (S  V  P)  V, 
(MM  P)  (MV  S)  (S  V  P)  V. 

1  If  there  were  ever  any  occasion  to  use  the  mnemonic  verses  of  syllo 
gism,  it  might  be  worth  while  to  put  them  into  a  form  in  which  each  word 
should  bear  the  mark  of  its  figure,  as  well  as  of  its  mood  and  its  method 
of  reduction.  By  some  slight  changes  in  the  words,  the  first,  second, 
third,  and  fourth  figures  might  be  indicated  by  the  letters  r,  t,  I,  and  n 
respectively  :  — 

(r)    Barbara,  Cegare,  Darn,  Ferioque  prioris. 

(t)   Cesate,  Camestes,  Festive,  Batoko  secundee. 

(I)   Tertia,  Dalipi,  Disalmis,  Dalisi,  Felapo. 

(I)   Bokalo,  Feliso,  habet  ;  quarta  insuper  addit, 

(n)  Bamanip,  Camenes,  Dimanis,  Fesanpo,  Fesison. 


ON  THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  41 

It  is  then  possible  to  give  a  perfectly  general  rule,  easy 
to  remember  and  easy  of  application,  for  testing  the 
validity  of  any  syllogism,  universal  or  particular,  which 
is  given  in  words.  It  is  this :  — 

Rule  of  Syllogism.  —  Take  the  contradictory  of  the  con 
clusion,  and  see  that  universal  propositions  are  expressed 
with  a  negative  copula  and  particular  propositions  with 
an  affirmative  copula.  If  two  of  the  propositions  are 
universal  and  the  other  particular,  and  if  that  term  only 
which  is  common  to  the  two  universal  propositions  has 
unlike  signs,  then,  and  only  then,  the  syllogism  is  valid. 

For  instance,  the  syllogism  — 

Only  Greeks  are  brave, 
All  Spartans  are  Greeks, 
Therefore  all  Spartans  are  brave, 

is  equivalent  to  the  inconsistency  — 

Non-Greeks  are-not  brave, 
Spartans  are-not  non-Greeks, 
Some  Spartans  are  not-brave, 

which  fails  to  stand  the  test  of  validity  in  two  respects, — 
the  term  brave  appears  with  unlike  signs  and  the  term 
Greeks  with  like  signs.  The  syllogism  - 

All  men  are  mortal, 
Some  mortals  are  happy, 
Therefore  some  men  are  happy, 

is  equivalent  to  the  inconsistency  — 

Men  are-not  immortal, 
Some  mortals  are  happy, 
Men  are-not  happy, 

and  it  is  not  valid  for  the  same  reasons  as  before,  —  the 


42         ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

term  mortal  appears  with  unlike  signs,  and   the  term 
men  with  like  signs. 

When  #,  5,  and  x  are  expressions  of  any  degree  of 
complexity,  (25')  and  (25°)  still  furnish  the  only  means 
for  the  elimination  of  x.  For  instance,  if 

(ab  -f  cd)  x  v 

and 

(a  +  c)x  +  bfy, 
then 


or 

abc  +  dcd  +  bf  y, 

is  all  that  can  be  said  without  reference  to  x.    And  if 

(ab  +  cd)x  +  bfy 
and 

(a  +  c)x  y} 

then  the  conclusion,  irrespective  of  #,  is 


(ab  +  cd)  a  +  c  +  bf  y, 
or 

ac   b 


If  the  premises  consist  of  propositions  about  proposi 
tions,  then  any  proposition  which  it  is  desired  to  drop 
may  be  eliminated  in  accordance  with  these  two  rules. 

Syllogisms  are  the  inferences,  with  elimination,  which 
are  obtained  by  taking  two  of  the  propositions  of  I.  as 
premises  and  the  other  as  conclusion.  When  one  propo 
sition  only  is  taken  as  premise,  the  conclusion  is  an 
alternation  of  propositions  ;  and,  as  a  special  case,  a 
single  arbitrary  term  (instead  of  two  or  none)  may  be 
introduced.  We  have  — 


ON   THE   ALGEBKA   OF   LOGIC. 


43 


ayb, 


(26') 


or,  in  words,  if  no  a  is  b,  then 
either  no  ac  is  either  b  or  d, 
or  else  some  c  is  d.  If  no 
Africans  are  brave,  then  either 
some  chiefs  are  deceitful,  or 
else  no  African  chiefs  are 
either  brave  or  deceitful. 
When  c  =  x,  d  —  l,  this  be 
comes 
(27')  _«v* 

.•.  (a  v  x)  +  (5  V  x)- 
If  no  Africans  are  brave,  then 
either  no  Africans  are  Chinese 
or  else  some  Chinese  are  not 
brave. 


(26°) 


acVb  +  d', 


or,  in  words,  if  some  ac  is 
either  b  or  d,  then  either  some 
a  is  b  or  some  c  is  d.  If  some 
African  chiefs  are  either  brave 
or  deceitful,  then  either  some 
Africans  are  brave  or  some 
chiefs  are  deceitful.  When 
b  =  d  =  x,  this  becomes 

(27°)  ac  V 

.-.  (a  v  a;)  +  (c  V  ac). 

If  some  lawyers  are  bankers, 
then  either  some  lawyers  are 
honest  or  some  bankers  are 
dishonest. 


Inference  from  Universal  to  Particulars.  —  Dimin 
ished  statement  and  that  particular  form  of  diminished 
statement  which  is  syllogism  are  the  only  reasoning  pro 
cesses  that  are  valid  when  a  universe  which  contains 
nothing  is  included  among  possible  universes,  —  that  is, 
when  it  is  taken  as  possible  that  both  x  and  x  may  be  at 
the  same  time  non-existent.  When  that  universe  is  ex 
cluded, —  when  the  postulate  "z  and  non-z  cannot  both 
be  non-existent"  is  taken  as  true,  —  one  other  form  of 
reasoning  is  possible.  That  postulate  is  expressed  by 


(x  v)  V  (x  V)> 


P. 


which  is  equivalent  to  the  two  inferences,  "  if  x  does  not 
exist,  then  non-z  does  exist,"  and  "  if  non-z  does  not 
exist,  then  x  does  exist ;  "  or,  from  the  total  non-exist 
ence  of  any  expression  whatever  may  be  inferred  the 
existence  of  some  part  at  least  of  its  negative.  If 


44  ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

a(b+c)v,  then  «  +  5c  V  ,  and  iid  +  le  y  ,  then  a  (6  +  <?)  V  ; 
or, 


If  #  is  a  proposition,  &  V  5,  then  non-#  is  its  denial, 
a\/b',  and  the  postulate  states  that  a  proposition  cannot 
be  both  true  and  false  at  the  same  time. 
From  the  proposition 

ab  v 
follows,  in  this  way, 

ab  v  >  that  is,  a  +  5  V. 

The  complete  convention  in  regard  to  the  existence  of 
terms  is  therefore  :  the  particular  proposition  a  V  b  im 
plies  the  existence  of  both  a  and  b  ;  the  universal  propo 
sition  a  y  b  does  not  imply  the  existence  of  either  a  or  5, 
but  it  does  imply  the  existence  of  either  a  or  b.  The 
necessity  of  the  convention  (if  it  should  be  called  a  con 
vention)  is  even  more  evident  when  a  and  b  are  proposi 
tions  ;  in  that  case  it  is  equivalent  to  saying  that  two 
propositions  cannot  be  true  together  unless  each  is  at 
some  time  true,  and  that  they  cannot  be  not  true  to 
gether  unless  one  or  the  other  is  at  some  time  false. 

Mr.  McColl  has  pointed  out  that  from  u  all  a  is  5," 
"  some  a  is  b  "  does  not  follow,  because  there  may  not 
be  any  a.  But  from 

aB  v 
it  does  follow  that 

a5V  ;  that  is,  ab  +  ab  +  ab  V  ; 

or  from  "  all  a  is  b  "  it  does  follow  that  one  at  least  of 
the  propositions  "  some  a  is  6,"  "  some  not-a  is  5," 
"  some  not-a  is  not  5,"  is  true.  From  any  universal  prop 
osition  follows  some  one  at  least  of  the  three  particular 
propositions  which  it  does  not  contradict.  If  a  is  known 


ON   THE    ALGEBRA    OF   LOGIC.  45 

to  exist,  then  "  some  a  is  b"  follows  from  "  all  a  is  b  " 

by  a  syllogism  :  — 

aB  v 

aaV 
.'.  ab  V 

From  "  no  sea-serpents  have  gills  "  we  cannot  infer  that 
there  are  some  sea-serpents  which  are  without  gills,  un 
less  it  is  known  that  there  are  some  sea-serpents  ;  but 
we  can  infer  that  either  there  are  some  sea-serpents 
without  gills,  or  there  are  some  things,  with  or  without 
gills,  which  are  not  sea-serpents,  or  else  there  is  nothing 
in  the  universe. 

EESOLUTION   OF  PROBLEMS. 

Rule.  —  Express  universal  propositions  with  the  nega 
tive  copula  and  particular  propositions  with  the  affirma 
tive  copula,  remembering  that  a  —  b  is  equivalent  to 

ab  +  ab  Y, 

and  that  its  contradictory,  a  is  not  equal  to  6,  is  equiva 
lent  to 

al  +  ab  V. 

From  a  combination  of  universal  propositions,  the  con 
clusion,  irrespective  of  any  term  or  set  of  terms  to  be 
eliminated,  x,  consists  of  the  universal  exclusion  of  the 
product  of  the  coefficient  of  x  by  that  of  the  negative 
of  x,  added  to  the  excluded  combinations  which  are  free 
from  x  as  given.  If  the  premises  include  an  alternation 
of  particular  propositions,  the  conclusion  consists  of  the 
partial  inclusion  of  the  total  coefficient  of  x  in  the  par 
ticular  propositions  by  the  negative  of  that  of  x  in  the 
universal  propositions,  added  to  the  included  combina 
tions  which  are  free  from  x  as  given. 


46  ON   THE   ALGEBRA    OF   LOGIC. 

If  there  is  any  reason  for  expressing  a  universal 
conclusion  with  an  affirmative  copula  or  a  particular 
conclusion  with  a  negative  copula,  it  can  be  done  by 
taking  any  term  or  set  of  terms  as  subject  and  the 
negative  of  what  remains  as  predicate. 

The  premises  may  also  contain  an  alternation  of  any 
number  of  universal  propositions.  If  either 

(p  v  x)  or  (q  v  x)  or  (r  y  z), 
and  if  at  the  same  time 

am  y  x, 
then 

am  (p  +  q  +  rz)  V 

is  the  conclusion  irrespective  of  x.  When  a  combina 
tion  of  particular  propositions  is  included  among  the 
premises,  the  conclusion  consists  of  a  combination  of 
the  same  number  of  particular  propositions.  From 

(pyx)  fev^) 
(a  Vx)  (bV  x), 

may  be  inferred  the  two  propositions, 

(ay  fq)  (by  pq). 

From  particular  propositions  by  themselves  no  con 
clusion  follows,  otherwise  than  by  simply  dropping  un 
necessary  information. 

Particular  premises  may  be  attached  to  the  universal 
premises  by  the  conjunction  or  instead  of  the  conjunction 
and.  In  that  case  no  elimination  is  possible  (except 
what  can  be  done  between  the  universal  propositions  by 
themselves),  and  a  conclusion  can  be  obtained  only  by 
means  of  "the  postulate,  P.  If  either  (ayb  and  c  \j  cT) 
or  (jg  v  h  and  i  vy),  then  the  conclusions  are  gh  +  ab  y, 
ij  +  ab  V,  gli  +  cd  V,  ij  +  cd  V.  In  general,  then,  the 
premises  may  consist  of  a  combination  or  an  alter- 


ON    THE    ALGEBRA    OF   LOGIC.  47 

nation  of  universal  propositions  (two  cases),  or  of  par 
ticular  propositions  (two  cases),  or  a  combination  or 
an  alternation  of  universal  propositions  united  as  a  sum 
or  a  product  to  a  combination  or  an  alternation  of 
particular  propositions  (eight  cases). 

It  is  apparent  that  logical  notation  would  be  improved 
by  the  addition  of  another  sign,  by  means  of  which  an 
alternation  of  universal  and  a  combination  of  particular 
propositions  might  be  expressed  as  a  single  propo 
sition,  —  a  sign  such  that 

(p  +  x)  sign  qy  sign  rz  \/ 

should  mean  that  some  one  of  the  expressions  p  +  x,  qy, 
rz,  is  totally  non-existent,  and  its  contradictory, 

(p  +  x)  sign  qy  sign  rz  V, 

should  mean  that  all  of  these  are,  at  least  in  part, 
existent. 

The  plan  of  treating  a  set  of  universal  premises  as  a 
command  to  exclude  certain  combinations  of  the  terms 
which  enter  them  is  due  to  Boole ;  no  adequate  exten 
sion  of  his  method  so  as  to  take  in  particular  propo 
sitions  is  possible,  without  the  use  of  some  device  which 
shall  be  equivalent  to  a  particular  copula.  Boole's 
method  of  elimination  between  universal  propositions 
is  to  put  x  first  equal  to  0  and  then  to  1  in  the  given 
function,  and  to  take  the  product  of  the  results  so  ob 
tained.  The  only  difference  between  this  rule  and  that 
which  I  have  given  (which  is  Prof.  Schroder's)  is  that 
it  first  introduces  x  into  those  terms  which  are  already 
free  from  it,  and  then  proceeds  to  eliminate  it  from  all. 
The  value  of  the  function 

ax  _|_  ix  +  c,         or         ax  +  bx  +  c  (x  +  x), 
for  x  —  0  (in  this  case  b  +  c)  is  the  coefficient  of  x,  and 


48        ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

its  value  for  x  —  1  (in  this  case  a  +  c)  is  the  coefficient 
of  x.  I  have  shown  that  the  method  is  not  an  invention 
of  modern  times,  but  that  it  is  nothing  more  than  a  rule 
for  working  the  syllogism, 

All  b  is  x,         No  a  is  x,         .-.  No  a  is.ft, 

when  a,  5,  and  x  are  not  restricted  to  being  simple 
terms.  With  the  unsymmetrical  copula,  there  are  four 
different  forms  of  pairs  of  universal  propositions  which 
make  possible  the  elimination  of  x  (XXI.,  p.  39),  and 
for  its  elimination  between  a  universal  and  a  particular 
proposition  it  would  be  necessary  to  consider  eight 
different  forms,  corresponding  in  all  to  the  twelve  dis 
tinct  forms  of  syllogism. 

If  the  result  which  remains  after  elimination  is  of  the 
form 

am  +  bm  +  c  y  (c) 

(where  m  is  the  term  in  regard  to  which  information  is 
sought,  and  where  all  the  letters  are  expressions  of 
any  degree  of  complexity),  and  if  there  is  any  reason  for 
being  dissatisfied  with  the  conclusion  as  it  stands, — 
"  no  m  is  a,  no  b  is  not  m,  and  there  is  no  c," —  m  may 
be  made  subject  and  predicate  respectively  of  two  affirm 
ative  propositions,  "  all  b  is  w,  and  all  m  is  a."  If  it 
be  desired  to  express  the  conclusion  without  any  repe 
tition,  then  we  must  first  state  what  is  true  without 
regard  to  m,  —  in  this  case, 

ab  +  c  \7> 

"there  is  no  ab  nor  <?,"  —  and  then  this  information 
must  be  used  to  diminish  the  propositions  in  m.  The 

identities  

a  =  a  (ab  +  c  +  ab  +  c) 


b  =  b  (ab  +  c  +  ab  +  c) 
become,  when  there  is  no  ab  +  <?, 


(8') 


ON  THE  ALGEBKA  OF  LOGIC.         49 

a  =  a  .  ab  +  c  =  #5c, 
b  =  b  .  ab  +  c  =  bac  ; 
and  hence,  instead  of 

a  v  m>t         by  m, 
it  is  sufficient  to  write 

ale  v  m>)         boo  y  m  ; 
or,  affirmatively, 

All  m  is  b  +  c  +  a, 
All  bac  is  m. 

Prof.  Schroder  expresses  in  terms  of  m  such  a  con 

clusion  as 

am  +  &?H  +  c  (m  +  m)  =  0, 

by  means  of  the  formula 

[0  +  c)  m  +  (b  +  c)  m  =  0] 
=  [m  =  all  (b  +  c)  +  some  a  +  c]  [&&  +  c  =  0]. 

The  first  factor  of  the  second  member  of  the  equation  is 
equivalent  to  the  propositions, 

All  m  is  b  +  c  +  ac, 
All  (6  +  c)  is  w, 


Some  a  +  c  is  m  ; 

that  is,  it  contains  the  propositions  of  the  first  member 
(the  first  diminished  by  ab  +  c  =  0  and  the  second  not), 
but  it  contains  in  addition  the  particular  proposition 
"  some  a  +  c  is  wi,"  which  is  a  legitimate  inference 
from  "  no  (a  +  c)  is  m"  only  if  a  +  c  is  known  to  exist. 
A  more  condensed  equational  form  of  the  conclusion 
am  +  bm  +  c\/  is 

(m  =  all  bac  +  some  TJac)  (ab  +  c  =  0). 
Boole  reaches  the  same  conclusion,  ((7),  but  he  does 


50         ON  THE  ALGEBKA  OF  LOGIC. 

it  by  an  extremely  circuitous  route.  Nothing  could  well 
be  simpler  of  application  or  more  evident  than  this 
rule  of  Prof.  Schroder's,  and  there  is  no  reason  why 
one  should  not  place  implicit  confidence  in  it,  in  an 
algebra  in  which  particular  propositions  are  not  taken 
as  implying  the  existence  of  their  terms.  It  contains 
the  solution  of  what  Mr.  Jevons  calls  the  "  inverse  log 
ical  problem,"  and  which  he  solves  by  a  process  "  which 
is  always  tentative,  and  consists  in  inventing  laws  and 
trying  whether  their  results  agree  with  those  before  us  " 
(XXII.,  p.  252).  It  makes  all  reference  to  tables  and 
machines  quite  superfluous.  It  seems  to  have  been 
overlooked  by  the  latest  expositor  of  Boole's  system,  — 
Mr.  Venn.  He  says  that  Boole's  method  of  getting  his 
conclusion  is  "  a  terribly  long  process ;  a  sort  of  ma 
chine  meant  to  be  looked  at  and  explained,  rather  than 
to  be  put  in  use ; "  and  that  if  ever  we  do  feel  occasion 
to  solve  such  a  problem,  it  can  be  done  most  readily 
"  by  exercise,  so  to  say,  of  our  own  observation  and 
sagacity,  instead  of  taking,  and  trusting  to,  a  precise 
rule  for  the  purpose  of  effecting  it "  (XXIII.,  p.  316). 

But  Boole's  form  for  the  conclusion  (besides  being 
not  quite  legitimate  in  this  algebra)  is  not  that  which 
is  most  natural  or  most  frequently  useful.  It  is,  more 
over,  suited  only  to  a  logic  of  extension,  and  it  would 
be  difficult  to  interpret  intensively.  The  very  simple 
device  which  may  be  substituted  for  ,it  is  to  make  use 
of  the  same  method  for  getting  back  from  excluded 
combinations  to  affirmative  propositions  which  was  em 
ployed  in  passing  from  the  given  affirmative  propositions 
to  the  excluded  combinations  :  if 

All  b  is  m  =  b\/ m, 
then 

b     m  =  all  1)  is  m. 


ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.         51 

In  this  way  the  conclusions  are  given  in  the  form  which 
has  been  adopted  by  Mr.  McColl.  Complicated  prob 
lems  are  solved  with  far  more  ease  by  Mr.  McColl  than 
by  Mr.  Jevons ;  but  that  is  not  because  the  method  of 
excluded  combinations  is  not,  when  properly  treated, 
the  easiest  method.  A  method  of  implications,  such 
as  that  of  Mr.  McColl,  is  without  doubt  more  natural 
than  the  other  when  universal  premises  are  given  in 
the  affirmative  form,  but  the  distinction  which  it  pre 
serves  between  subject  and  predicate  introduces  a  rather 
greater  degree  of  complexity  into  the  rules  for  working 
it.  An  advantage  of  writing  abc  y  instead  of  dbc  =  0 
is  that  the  copula  can  be  inserted  at  any  point  in  the 
excluded  combination,  and  that  elimination  can  be  per 
formed  on  the  premises  as  they  are  given,  when  they 
have  been  expressed  negatively,  without  first  trans 
posing  all  the  members  to  one  side.  Without  some 
thing  corresponding  to  a  contradictory  copula,  particular 
propositions  cannot  be  treated  adequately,  and  compli 
cated  propositions  of  either  kind  cannot  be  simply 
denied.  With  it,  the  contradictory  of  "  all  a  is  all  £," 
that  is,  "  it  is  not  true  that  all  a  is  all  &,"  is  al  +  db  V  ; 
that  is,  "  either  some  a  is  not  b  or  some  b  is  not  a." 
And  the  contradictory  of 

abc  +  abc  +  abc  y 
is 

abc  +  abc  +  abc  V  ; 

that  is,  some  one  at  least  of  the  given  combinations  is 
in  existence. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  (By  Mr.  Venn  in  Mind  for  October,  1876.)  The 
members  of  a  board  were  all  of  them  either  bondhold 
ers  or  share-holders,  but  no  member  was  bond-holder 


52  ON    THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

and  share-holder  at  once  ;  and  the  bond-holders,  as  it 
happened,  were  all  on  the  board.  What  is  the  relation 
between  bond-holders  and  share-holders  ? 

Put 

a  =  member  of  board, 
b  —  bond-holder, 
c  =  share-holder. 

The  premises  are  evidently 

a  v  be  +  %Cj 
bya; 

and  taking  the  product  of  the  coefficient  of  a  by  that  of 
a,  we  have 

b  (be  +  5c)  Y> 
or 

bey. 

The  required  relation  is,  therefore, 

No  bond-holders  are  share-holders. 

2.  (XXII.,  p.  283.)  What  are  the  precise  points  of 
agreement  and  difference  between  two  disputants,  one 
of  whom  asserts  that  (1)  space  (a)  =  three-way  spread 
(5),  with  points  as  elements  (<?)  (Henrici)  ;  while  his 
opponent  holds  that  (2)  space  =  three-way  spread,  and 
at  the  same  time  (3)  space  has  points  as  elements  ? 

(a  =  be)  =  (aB  +  ac  +  abc  \/),  (1) 


ac  y.  (3) 

They  both  assert  that 

a5  +  ac  -f-  «#c  v? 

and  the  second  asserts  in  addition  that 

dbc  Y  j 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  53 

that  is,  that  a  three-way  spread  which  had  not  points  as 
elements  would  be  space. 

3.    (XVI.,  vol.  x.  p.  21.)     From  the  premises 


bxyc  (cl  +  i/)e 
ab  v  x  (3,  +  e)  c 

a  +  b  + 


deduce  a  proposition  containing  neither  x  nor  y. 

The  term  y  does  not  occur  at  all  ;  hence  y  can  be 
eliminated  only  by  dropping  the  parts  which  contain  it. 
There  remain 

acct  +  alj  (<l  +  e)  y  x, 

bcde  v  x  ; 
and  taking  the  product  of  the  first  members  we  have 

abcde  \/. 

4.    (XXIIL,  p.  310.) 

Given    ^  ~       >  ,  find  xz  in  terms  of  a  and  c. 
yz  =  c  )  ' 

The  equations  are  equivalent  to  the  exclusions 

xya  -\-xa-\-ya  v? 
yzc  -\-yc  +  zc\/; 
and  after  elimination  of  y  there  remains 

xa  +  zc  +  %ac  +  z<w  V-  O9) 

Collecting  the  predicates  of  xz  and  xz,  we  have 

xz  v  dc  +  «c, 

(?) 
ic  +  *  V  ac' 


54  ON   THE   ALGEBEA   OF   LOGIC. 

Prof.  Schroder's  formula,  (7,  p.  49, 

If  m  v  x  and  m  y  y>  then  m  =  all  y  +  some  x, 
gives,  in  this  case, 

xz  —  all  ac  +  some  (ac  +  ac) 

=  all  ac  +  some  do. 
If  it  were  required  to  find  xz  +  xz,  we  should  have 

xz  -\-xz\/  ac, 
xz  +  xz  v  ac  +  ac ; 
whence 

cci  +  ieg  =  all  (ac  +  ac)  +  some  (ac  +  ca  +  ac) 

=  all  (ac  +  ac)  +  some  ac. 
It  is  evident  that  (jp)  cannot  be  inferred  from  (g). 

5.  (Educational  Times,  Feb.  1, 1881,  6616.  By  W.  B. 
Grove,  B.  A.)  The  members  of  a  scientific  society  are 
divided  into  three  sections,  which  are  denoted  by  a.  b,  c. 
Every  member  must  join  one,  at  least,  of  these  sections, 
subject  to  the  following  conditions  :  (1)  Any  one  who 
is  a  member  of  a  but  not  of  5,  of  b  but  not  of  c,  or  of  c 
but  not  of  a,  may  deliver  a  lecture  to  the  members 
if  he  has  paid  his  subscription,  but  otherwise  not; 
(2)  one  who  is  a  member  of  a  but  not  of  c,  of  c  but  not 
of  a,  or  of  b  but  not  of  a,  may  exhibit  an  experiment 
to  the  members  if  he  has  paid  his  subscription,  but 
otherwise  not;  but  (3)  every  member  must  either 
deliver  a  lecture  or  perform  an  experiment  annually 
before  the  other  members.  Find  the  least  addition  to 
these  rules  which  will  compel  every  member  to  pay  his 
subscription  or  forfeit  his  membership,  and  explain  the 
result. 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  55 

Put  x  =  he  must  deliver  a  lecture,  y  =  he  must  per 
form  an  experiment,  and  z  =  he  has  paid  his  subscrip 
tion.  Then  the  premises  are 

ale  v  (a) 

al  +  Ic  +  cd  v  xz  (1) 

ac  +  cd  +  db  y  yz  (2) 

xyy.  (3) 

It  is  required  that  z  be  excluded  from  all  that  part  of 
the  universe  from  which  it  has  not  already  been  ex 
cluded  ;  namely,  from  the  negative  of 

(al  +  be  +  cd)  x  +  (ac  +  ca  +  ab)  y  +  ale  +  xy, 
which  is,  by  the  second  rule  for  getting  the  negative, 

(ale  +  abc  +  x)  (ale  +  ac  +  y)  (a  +  b  +  c)  (x  +  ?/), 
or 

abcx  +  ac^y. 

Hence  the  desired  "  least  addition  to  the  rules  "  is 
abcx  -f-  acxy  y  z, 

or,  "  No  one  who  has  not  paid  his  subscription  can  be 
a  member  of  all  three  sections  and  deliver  a  lecture, 
or  of  a  and  c  and  perform  an  experiment  without  lec 
turing." 

6.  (III.,  p.  237.  Proposed  for  simpler  solution  by 
Mr.  Grove,  Educational  Times,  April  1,  1881.)  A  num 
ber  of  pieces  of  cloth  striped  with  different  colors  were 
submitted  to  inspection,  and  the  two  following  observa 
tions  were  made  upon  them  :  — 

(a)  Every  piece  striped  with  white  (w~)  and  green  (#) 
was  also  striped  with  black  (5)  and  yellow  (?/),  and 
vice  versa. 


56  ON   THE   ALGEBRA    OF   LOGIC. 

(5)  Every  piece  striped  with  red  (d)  and  orange  (r) 
was  also  striped  with  blue  (w)  and  yellow,  and  vice 
versa. 

It  is  required  to  eliminate  yellow,  and  to  express  the 
conclusion  in  terms  of  green. 

The  premises  are 

W9  —  fy>  dr  =  uy ; 

and  by  (18')  they  are  equivalent  to  the  exclusions 


dr  (u  +  y)  +  uydr  y. 

Collecting  the  coefficients  of  y  and  y  we  have 
bwg  +  udr  y  y, 
Wff  +  dryy; 

and  taking  the  product  of  the  left-hand  members  we 
have 

uwgdr  +  bdr  (w  +  g)  y, 

which  is  to  be  added  to  that  part  of  the  premises  which 
does  not  contain  y ;  that  is,  to 

wig  +  dru  y. 
Concerning  g  we  have 

g  y  w  (5  +  udr),  bdr  y  g  ; 

or,  with  the  affirmative  copula,  by  (30), 

g  -<  w  +  bu  +  bdr,  bdr  -<  g. 

The  first  is  equivalent  to  Boole's  conclusion  when  that 
is  reduced  by  dru  =  0.  For  the  second  Boole  gives  only 
bdrwu  -<  g. 

To  solve  this  problem  by  Mr.  Jevons's  method,  it 
would  be  necessary  to  write  out  the  one  hundred  and 
twenty-eight  possible  combinations  of  seven  terms,  and 
to  examine  them  all  in  connection  with  each  of  the 


ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.         57 

premises.  As  Mr.  Jevons  himself  says  :  "  It  is  hardly 
possible  to  apply  this  process  to  problems  of  more  than 
six  terms,  owing  to  the  large  number  of  combinations 
which  would  require  examination"  (XIII.,  p.  96). 

7.    (III.,  p.  146).     From  the  premises 

xz  (v  +  wy  +  wy)  \f 

v  xw  (yz  +  yz)  \J 
x(v  +  y)  (zw  +  zw)  V 
(x  +  vy)  (zw  +  zw)  V 

it  is  required,  first,  to  eliminate  v  ;  second,   to   express 
the   conclusion   in  terms  of  x  ;   third,   in  terms  of  y  ; 
fourth,  to  eliminate  xm,  fifth,  to  eliminate  y. 
The  terms  which  involve  v  are 


xz  +  xw  (yz  +  yz)  +  y  (zw  +  zw)  y  v,  x  (zw  +  zw)  y  v  ; 

whence,  taking  the  product  of  the  left-hand  members, 
we  have  only 

xzyw  v,  (a) 

which  is  to  be  added  to  that  part  of  the  premises  which 
does  not  contain  v,  —  namely,  to 

xz  (wy  +  wy)  +  xy  (zw  +  zw)  +  x  (zw  +  zw)  \/. 
Collecting  the  parts  which  contain  x  and  x  we  have 

x  \7  zw  +  yzw,  (b) 

x  \7  zw  +  zw  +  zwy.  (c) 

The  negative  of  the  second  member  of  (<?)  is,  by  (14), 
zw  +  zwy^  hence,  by  (18'),  these  two  exclusions  are 
equivalent  to  the  identity 

x  =  zw  +  zw  +  zwy)  (^) 

or 

x  =  zw  +  yzw. 


58         ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

No  part  of  the  conclusion  lias  been  dropped  in  .(ft) 
and  (c)  ;  hence  the  propositions  which  concern  y  may  be 
taken  from  them.  They  are 


y      xzw,  xzw  V  $ 

or 

y  -<  x  +  z  +  w,  xzw 

These  exclusions  yield  nothing  upon  the  elimination 
of  y  ;  hence  the  only  relation  between  a?,  s,  and  w  is, 
from  (5)  and  (c), 

cezw;  +  Jezw  +  5J£«#  y".  (y) 

These  conclusions  are  the  same  as  those  of  Mr.  McColl, 
and  they  are  equivalent  to  those  of  Boole  and  Schroder. 
Prof.  Wundt  (XVIII.,  p.  356)  accidentally  omits  (a)  in 
getting  the  conclusions  in  regard  to  y,  and  they  are  in 
consequence  altogether  wrong.  He  remarks  that  Schro 
der  has  treated  the  problem  in  a  partly  coincident 
manner.  I  do  not  find  that  Mr.  Jevons  has  treated  it 
at  all. 

8.  Six  children,  #,  b,  c,  d,  e,  /,  are  required  to  obey 
the  following  rules:  (1)  on  Monday  and  Tuesday  no 
four  can  go  out  together  ;  (2)  on  Thursday,  Friday, 
and  Saturday,  no  three  can  stay  in  together;  (3)  on 
Tuesday,  Wednesday,  and  Saturday,  if  b  and  c  are  to 
gether,  then  a,  b,  e,  and  /  must  remain  together  ;  (4) 
on  Monday  and  Saturday  b  cannot  go  out  unless  either 
d,  or  c,  e,  and  /  stay  at  home,  b  and/  are  first  to  decide 
what  they  will  do,  and  c  makes  his  decision  before  «, 
d,  or  e.  Find  («)  when  c  must  go  out,  (/3)  when  he 
must  stay  in,  and  (7)  when  he  may  do  as  he  pleases. 

Let  a  be  the  statement  that  a  goes  out,  and  a  the 
statement  that  he  stays  in,  etc.  Then  we  have  for  the 
first  two  premises 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  59' 

M+  T\J  abed  +  bcde  +  .  .  .  (1) 

Th  +  F+  S  v  ale  +  aid  +  .  .  .  (2) 

The  third  premise  excludes  from  certain  days  the  com 
bination  in  which  b  and  c  are  both  out  or  both  in,  ex 
cept  when  a,  6,  e,  and/  are  together  ;  that  is, 


T+W+  S~y(bc  +  bc)  abef+  abej 
V  (T>c  +  bc)  (a  +  5  + 


or,  finally, 

T+W+  S\/tca  +  bce  +  bcf+  bca  +  bee  +  bcf.         (3) 

The  last  premise  is,  for  Monday, 

M~ybd(c  +  e+f).  (4) 

On  Saturday,  c,  e,  and  /  cannot  all  stay  at  home,  by 
(2)  ;  therefore,  this  part  of  the  premise  is 

Sybd.  (4') 

The  first  thing  required  is  the  elimination  of  a,  d,  and 
e.  That  part  of  the  premises  which  is  already  free  from 
those  letters  is 


(3') 

Nothing  can  be  eliminated  between  (1)  and  (2),  because 
MTh  =  0,  etc. 

For  the  same  reason,  d  cannot  be  eliminated  between 
(4)  and  (2)  ;  and  therefore  the  premise  (4)  must  bo 
simply  dropped,  a  and  e  can  be  eliminated  at  once  by 
combining  (3)  with  (1)  and  with  (2).  From  (3)  and 
(1),  we  have  respectively 

(T  +  W+  S)bcya  +  e, 


60         ON  THE  ALGEBEA  OF  LOGIC. 

and  taking  the  product  of  the  right-hand  members  and 
the  sum  of  the  left-hand  members,  we  have 

T(4o)v.  (5) 

From  (3)  and  (2)  we  have  respectively 

(T+W+  S)Zc  ya  +  e, 


whence,  in  the  same  way, 

S(lo)  v.  (6) 

By  combining  (4')  with  that  part  of  (2)  which  does  not 
contain  a,  e,  or  25,  and  does  contain  cl,  —  namely,  with 


we  obtain 

Sybfc.  (7) 

The  conclusion  required  is  then  contained  in  (2'),  (3'), 
(5),  (6),  and  (7).  But  the  information  given  in  regard 
to  S  and  T  may  be  somewhat  simplified  by  collecting 
their  predicates.  We  have 

S\/lcf+  lcf+  Ic  +  bcf+  be/, 
or 

Sytc  +  bf,  (8) 

and 

Sr/5  (9) 


which  with 

Th  +  fytcf,  (2") 

Wybcf+lcf,  (3") 

form  the  entire  conclusion.     Collecting  the  subjects  of 
c  and  c}  we  have 

(Th  +  F)  lf+  (T+  W)  lf+  Stye  (a) 

Tb  +  Wbfy  c  (b) 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  61 

where  the  last  proposition  is  already  independent  of  c, 
and  where  c  cannot  be  eliminated  between  (#)  and  (6). 
The  conclusion  may  be  expressed  in  words  in  this  way : 
(a),  if  on  Thursday  or  Friday  b  and  /  are  both  at 
home,  or  if  on  Tuesday  or  Wednesday  /  goes  out  with 
out  5,  or  if  b  stays  at  home  on  Saturday,  then  c  must 
go  out;  (/3),  if  b  goes  out  on  Tuesday,  or  if  b  goes  out 
without  /  on  Wednesday,  then  c  must  stay  at  home  ; 
(7),  whether  c  goes  out  or  stays  in,  b  does  not  go  out 
without /on  Saturday. 

OX  THE   CONSTITUTION"  OF  THE   UNIVERSE. 

The  number  of  combinations  in  the  complete  develop 
ment  of  n  terms  is  2n.  In  any  actual  universe  of  things, 
any  one  of  these  combinations  may  be  either  present  or 
absent ;  hence  the  number  of  different  ways  in  which  a 
universe  may  be  made  up  out  of  n  things  is  22W.  The 
following  Table  gives  the  sixteen  possible  constitutions 
of  the  universe  with  respect  to  two  terms.  The  sign  1 
indicates  the  presence  of  the  combination  at  the  head 
of  which  it  stands,  0  its  absence.  With  the  aid  of 
the  dual  notation,  applied  to  logical  algebra  by  Mr. 
Franklin,1  each  case  may  be  defined  by  a  number ;  it  is 
only  necessary  to  attribute  powers  of  two  as  weights  to 
the  different  combinations,  and  to  describe  each  arrange 
ment  by  the  sum  of  the  weights  of  the  combinations 
which  are  present  in  it.  If  we  take  the,  combinations  of 
a  and  b  in  the  order  a&,  db,  al,dl,  then  4,  or  0100,  de 
notes  that  the  combination  aB  is  present,  and  nothing 
else ;  9,  or  1001,  that  dl  and  ab  are  present  and  al  and 
db  are  absent,  etc. 

1  Johns  Hopkins  University  Circular,  April,  1881. 


62 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


al 
8 

aH 
4 

ab 
2 

ab 

1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

1 

1 

0 

0 

1 

0 

2 

0 

0 

1 

1 

3 

0 

1 

0 

0 

4 

0 

1 

0 

1 

5 

0 

1 

1 

0 

6 

0 

1 

1 

1 

7 

1 

0 

0 

0 

8 

1 

0 

0 

1 

9 

1 

0 

1 

0 

10 

1 

0 

1 

1 

11 

1 

1 

0 

0 

12 

1 

1 

0 

1 

13 

1 

1 

1 

0 

14 

1 

1 

1 

1 

15 

If  a  is  animal  and  b  is  black,  then  the  5th  case  is  that 
of  a  universe  made  up  of  black  animals  and  animals 
which  are  not  black ;  in  the  12th  case  the  things  which 
are  wanting  are  black  animals  and  black  things  which 
are  not  animals,  —  that  is,  there  are  no  black  things  in 
this  universe  ;  the  15th  case  is  the  actual  universe  with 
respect  to  the  terms  animal  and  black ;  the  0-case  is  a 
universe  in  which  nothing  exists.  If  the  material  uni- 


ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.        63 

verse  is  the  subject  of  discourse,  and  if  a  means  matter 
and  I  means  indestructible,  then  the  existing  state  of 
things  is  described  by  4 ;  indestructible  matter  exists, 
and  what  is  not  indestructible  matter  docs  not  exist. 
This  Table  is  given  by  Jevons  (XIII.,  p.  135)  ;  but  he 
does  not  take  account  of  non-existent  terms,  and  hence 
all  but  seven  of  the  sixteen  cases  (all  but  6,  7,  9,  11, 
13,  14, 15)  are  considered  by  him  to  be  logical  absurdi 
ties.  If  a  and  b  are  propositions,  then  case  9  is  a 
universe  in  which  they  are  true  together  and  false  to 
gether,  and  in  which  the  time  during  which  a  is  true 
is  identical  with  the  time  during  which  b  is  true,  either 
logically  or  extra-logically.  The  0-case  is  a  universe  in 
which  no  proposition  is  true.  Two  cases  the  sum  of 
whose  characteristic  numbers  is  15,  —  as  5  and  10,  or 
0101  and  1010,  — have  been  called  by  Prof.  Clifford 
complementary  cases :  what  exists  in  one  is  what  does 
not  exist  in  the  other. 

To  exactly  define  the  constitution  of  any  universe,  it 
is  necessary  to  state,  in  regard  to  each  combination,  that 
it  is  present  or  that  it  is  absent.  The  simple  laws  which 
every  two  terms  obey  are  therefore  four  in  number, 
being  partly  universal  propositions  and  partly  particu 
lar  ;  except  in  the  0-case,  where  all  the  universal  propo 
sitions  are  true,  and  in  case  15,  where  all  the  particular 
propositions  are  true.  The  perfectly  symmetrical  uni 
verses  are  thus  the  universe  in  which  there  is  nothing 
and  that  in  which  there  is  some  of  everything.  For 
case  8,  we  have 

(a  \/b)(a\fb)(ayP)(ay  £), 
and  for  case  13 

(a  y  b)  (a  v  b)  (a  y  5)  (u  V  I). 
When  two  simple  or  compound  statements  cannot  be 


64 


THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


converted  into  each  other  by  any  interchange  between 
the  terms  which  enter  them  (including  negatives  of 
terms),  they  are  said  to  belong  to  different  types.  The 
universal  propositions  in  two  terms  are  of  six  different 
types.  None,  one,  two,  three,  or  four  of  them  may  be 
true,  and  it  is  only  in  the  case  where  two  are  true  that  a 
difference  of  type  is  produced  by  the  way  in  which  the 
propositions  are  selected.  Those  two  may  be  taken  so 
that  one  letter  has  the  same  sign  in  both  or  not.  Thus 
we  may  have  either, 

ab  +  ab  y, 
that  is, 


or 
that  is, 


ab  +  ab  \/, 


a  —    . 


The  following  Table  gives  the  six  types,  the  proposi 
tions  which  define  them,  and  the  universes  which  belong 
to  each  type  :  — 


Type. 

Universal. 

Particular. 

Cases. 

I. 

(a  V  £)  (a  V  b)  (a  V  5)  (a  V  5) 

15 

II. 

a\/b 

(a  V  V)  (a  V  I)  (a  V  I) 

8,  4,  2,  1 

III. 

a  v 

(a  Vb)(aV  I) 

12,  3,  10,  5 

IV. 

a  =  b 

(a  Vb)(aV  I) 

6,  9 

V. 

a-\-b\/ 

a\fl 

7,11,13,14 

VI. 

$,_{_<2_L-£»-L-7J\7 

1 

I.  and  VI.  are  complementary  types ;  and  so  are  II.  and 
V.    The  universes  complementary  to  III.  and  IV.  are 


ON  THE  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.         65 

of  types  III.  and  IV.  respectively.  Six  is  the  number 
of  types  of  a  universe  in  two  terms,  when  all  the  par 
ticular  propositions  which  the  universal  propositions  do 
not  deny  are  known  to  be  true.  If  one  takes  account  of 
combinations  of  alternations  and  alternations  of  com 
binations  of  both  particular  and  universal  propositions, 
the  number  of  types  is  largely  increased. 

A  race  of  beings  which  always  completely  defined  its 
universe  would  have  the  above  four-fold  statements  for 
its  forms  of  expression.  The  eight  propositions  which 
are  used  by  the  race  which  exists  are  not  complete 
definitions  of  a  universe,  but  they  are  symmetrical; 
each  has  an  eight-fold  degree  of  ambiguity.  "No  a  is  5" 
denies  the  existence  of  the  combination  a5,  but  it  leaves 
it  doubtful  whether,  of  the  remaining  combinations,  none, 
any  one,  any  two,  or  all  three  exist.  "  Some  a  is  5," 
which  affirms  the  existence  of  the  combination  ab,  re 
stricts  the  universe  to  some  one  of  the  eight  cases,  —  1, 
3,  5,  7,  9,  11,  13,  15.  If,  however,  propositions  are 
taken  in  the  other  sense,  —  if  positive  (affirmative) 
propositions  are  taken  as  implying  the  existence  of  the 
subject  and  negative  not, —  then  they  do  not  include  all 
possible  states  of  things  with  symmetry.  The  negative 
universal  and  the  positive  particular  propositions  cover 
eight  cases  each,  as  before ;  but  of  the  positive  universal 
a  v  I  takes  in  the  four  cases  1,  3,  9,  11,  and  a  \j  b  the 
six  cases  1,  4,  5,  9, 12,  13  only,  and  their  contradictories, 
the  negative  particular,  have  respectively  a  twelve-fold 
and  a  ten-fold  degree  of  ambiguity. 

On  the  other  hand,  a  race  of  beings  which  had  the 
greatest  possible  variety  of  expression  would  be  able  to 
speak  with  any  degree  of  ambiguity  at  pleasure.  It 
would  have  a  distinct  propositional  form  for  restricting 
the  universe  to  any  one,  one  of  any  two,  one  of  any 


66  ON   THE   ALGEBEA   OF   LOGIC. 

three,  etc.,  of  the  possible  cases ;  or  its  entire  number 
of  propositions  in  two  terms  would  be  216  or  216  — 1, 
according  as  one  counts  or  does  not  count  the  case  in 
which  nothing  is  said.  All  the  65,536  or  65,535  things 
which  can  be  said  without  using  any  other  terms  than 
theologians  and  scientists,  for  instance,  the  existing 
race  is  able  to  say,  without  very  much  difficulty,  by 
combinations  and  alternations  of  its  Aristotelian  and 
Morganic  propositions.  To  say  that  either  no  scientists 
are  theologians  (0,  2,  4,  6,  8,  10, 12, 14),  or  some  theo 
logians  are  not  scientists  (3,  7, 11, 15),  or  some  of  those 
who  are  not  theologians  are  scientists  and  some  are  not 
scientists  (13),  or  else  everybody  is  a  theologian  (1),  is 
to  make  a  statement  of  fourteen-fold  ambiguity,  —  to 
limit  the  constitution  of  the  universe  under  considera 
tion  to  some  case  exclusive  of  5  and  9.  The  contradic 
tory  of  a  statement  of  the  form 

(a  v  6)  +  (a  v  &)  +  (»  V  5)  («  V^H  @  v) 
is,  by  (13), 

(a  V  b)  (a  v  b)  (a  v  5  +  a  y  5)  (5  V) ; 

and  to  affirm  that  there  are  some  theologians  who  are 
scientists,  and  that  there  are  no  theologians  who  are 
not  scientists,  and  that  either  all  scientists  or  else  all 
non-scientists  are  theologians,  and  that  not  everybody 
is  a  theologian,  is  to  affirm  that  either  5  or  9  furnishes 
the  complete  description  of  the  universe  with  respect  to 
the  terms  scientist  and  theologian. 

In  three  terms  the  number  of  combinations  is  23,  the 
number  of  possible  universes  is  223,  =  256,  and  the  num 
ber  of  possible  propositions  with  all  degrees  of  ambiguity 
is  2256.  The  types  of  universal  propositions  have  been 
given  by  Mr.  Jevons  (XIII.,  p.  140),  but  the  number  is 
increased  when  single  terms  as  well  as  combinations 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


67 


are  permitted  to  be  non-existent.  Prof.  Clifford's 
method  for  obtaining  types  ("  Essays  and  Lectures.  — 
On  the  Types  of  Compound  Statement  involving  Four 
Classes")  is  not  difficult  when  applied  to  these  terms. 
It  takes  account  of  terms  which  do  not  exist,  and  the 
number  of  types  which  he  gives  for  four  terms,  396, 
would  be  different  on  any  other  hypothesis.  The  prob 
lem  would  certainly  be  extremely  difficult  if  such  state 
ments  as  Mr.  Jevons  calls  contradictory  were  excluded. 
Prof.  Clifford's  solution  takes  account  of  combinations 
only  of  universal  propositions.  The  number  of  types 
of  alternations  only,  and  of  alternations  and  combina 
tions  of  particular  propositions  only,  is  also  396,  and 
the  entire  number  is  in  this  way  raised  to  4,396 ;  but 
the  determination  of  the  number  for  mixed  universal 
and  particular  propositions  and  for  mixed  alternations 
and  combinations  of  them  is  still  in  the  region  of  un 
solved  problems. 

In  three  terms,  the  number  of  types  of  combinations 
of  universal  propositions  is  twenty-six, —  six  four-fold, 
eight  less  than  four-fold,  and  eight  more  than  four-fold. 
The  types  of  more  than  four-fold  statement  may  be 
obtained  by  taking  those  combinations  which  are  not 
excluded  by  the  types  of  less  than  four-fold  statement. 

LESS  THAN  FOUR-FOLD. 


I. 
II. 

III. 

IV. 
V. 

VI. 

VII. 

VIII. 


0 

abc 

abc  +  abc 

abc  +  abc 

abc  +  abc 

abc  +  alJc  +  abc 

abc  +  abc  +  aBc 

abc  +  abc  +  abc 


68 


ON  THE  ALGEBBA  OF  LOGIC. 
FOUR-FOLD. 


IX. 

X. 

XI. 

XII. 

XIII. 

XIY. 


abc  +  abc  +  abc  +  abc 
abc  +  abc  +  abc  +  abc 
abc  +  abc  +  abc  +  abc 
abc  +  abc  +  aBc  +  abc 
abc  +  «5c  +  abc  +  «5c 
o&c  +  abc  +  a&c  +  a5c 


When  condensed,  these  exclusions  appear  in  the  fol 
lowing  form.  The  Arabic  numbers  give  the  correspond 
ing  types  in  Mr.  Jevons's  Table. 


I. 

.    . 

0 

XXII. 

m 

1 

II. 

8 

abc 

XXI. 

.    . 

a  +  b  +  c 

III. 

2 

ab 

XX. 

.    . 

a  +  b 

IV. 

12 

(ab  +  al)  c 

XIX. 

.   . 

ab  +  ab  +  c 

V. 

11 

abc  +  abc 

XVIII. 

3 

ab  +  be  +  ca 

VI. 

7 

(a  +  b)c 

XVII. 

.    . 

ab  +  c 

VII. 

9 

ab  +  abc 

XVI. 

4 

ab  +  ab  +  abc 

VIII. 

13 

abc  +  (ab  +  ab)c 

XV. 

15 

(a  +  b)c+(al  +  ab)c 

IX. 

10 

ab  +  be  +  ca 

X. 

.    . 

a 

XI. 

5 

ac-\-  be 

XII. 

1 

Obb  +  ab 

XIII. 
XIV. 

14 
6 

a  (be  +  Ic)  +a  (lc  +  be) 
abc  +  (a  +  5)  c 

The  exclusions 

IV.,       XVIII.,         XI.,        XII.,         XIII., 
are  equivalent  respectively  to  the  identities 


XIV. 


ab  =  c. 


ON   THE   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  69 

In  these  Tables,  the  letters  may  represent  propositions 
as  well  as  terms ;  of  the  256  ways  in  which  three  propo 
sitions  may  be  put  together  they  give  the  22  which  are 
of  distinct  type.  Case  V.,  for  instance,  is  the  case  in 
which  three  propositions,  pl9  p^  p^  are  affirmed  to  be  not 
all  at  the  same  time  true  and  not  all  at  the  same  time 
false ;  or,  in  other  words,  it  is  known  that  some  one  of 
them  is  true  and  some  one  of  them  is  false.  In  case 
XVIL,  pl  and  p2  are  not  true  together,  and  pz  is  not 
true  at  all.  When  the  universe  under  discussion  is  the 
logical  universe,  the  Tables  serve  to  enumerate  the  22 
possible  types  of  argument  between  three  propositions. 
In  case  IX.,  ply  p^  ps  are  propositions  so  related  that 
from  the  truth  of  any  one  the  falsity  of  the  other  two 
can  be  inferred ;  in  case  XI.,  they  are  such  that  if  two 
of  them  are  both  false  or  both  true,  the  third  is  there 
fore  false ;  and,  conversely,  if  that  is  false,  the  others 
are  therefore  either  botli  true  or  both  false.  The  syllo- 
gism  pip2pz  v>  ig  °^  tne  tyPe  H-  The  argument  "if 
either  some  animals  covered  with  fur  are  black  or  some 
black  things  not  covered  with  fur  are  animals,  then 
some  animals  are  black,"  —  that  is, 

(abx  V)  +  (abx  v)  \/(ab  y), 

which  is  of  the  form  (j?i +^2)p3  v>  —  belongs  to  type 
VI. ;  and  the  identity, 

(a  \7  b)  (c  V  d)  —  (ab  +ca>  \7)> 

belongs  to  type  XIV.  In  order  to  find  actual  arguments 
of  all  the  22  types,  it  would  probably  be  necessary  to  go 
into  some  hyper-universe  where  the  laws  of  thought  are 
different  from  those  under  which  we  reason. 


70  OX  THE   ALGEBRA  OF   LOGIC. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

I.  George  Boole  :  The  Mathematical  Analysis  of  Logic,  being  an 
essay  towards  the  Calculus  of  Deductive  Reasoning.     1847. 

II.  Boole  :  The  Calculus  of  Logic.     Cambridge  and  Dublin  Math. 
Jour.,  Vol.  III.,  1848. 

III.  Boole  :  An  Investigation  of  the  Laws  of  Thought,  on  which 
are  founded  the  Mathematical  Theories  of  Logic  and  Probabilities. 
1854. 

IV.  Hermann  Grassmann :    Lehrbuch  der  Arithmetik.     Berlin, 
1861. 

V.  "W.  S.  Jevons  :  Pure  Logic,  or  the  Logic  of  Quality  apart  from 
Quantity.     London  and  New  York,  1864. 

VI.  C.  S.  Peirce  :  On  an   Improvement  in  Boole's   Calculus   of 
Logic.     Proc.  Am.  Acad.  of  Sciences,  Vol.  VI.,  1867. 

VII.  W.  S.  Jevons  :  The  Substitution  of  Similars,  the  true  Princi 
ple  of  Reasoning,  derived  from  a  modification  of  Aristotle's  dictum. 
London,  1869. 

VIII.  C.  S.  Peirce  :    Description  of  a  Notation  for  the  Logic  of 
Relatives.     Memoirs  of  the  Am.  Acad.  of  Sciences,  Vol.  IX.,  1870. 

IX.  Robert    Grassmann  :    Die    Formenlehre    oder    Mathematik. 
Zweites  Buch  :  Die  Begriffslehre  oder  Logik.     Stettin,  1872. 

X.  A.  J.  Ellis  :  On  the  Algebraical  Analogues  of  Logical   Rela 
tions.     Proc.  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London,  1872-73. 

XI.  Arthur  Cayley  :  Note  on  the  Calculus  of  Logic.    Quart.  Jour, 
of  Math.,  Vol.  XL 

XII.  Ernst  Schroder  :  Lehrbuch  der  Arithmetik  und  Algebra  fur 
Lehrer  und  Studirende.     I.  Bd.  :  Die  sieben  algebraischen  Opera- 
tionen.     Leipzig,  1873. 

XIII.  W.  S.  Jevons  :  Principles  of  Science.    London,  1874.   Third 
edition,  1879. 

XIV.  Ernst   Schroder :   Der   Operationskreis   des    Logikkalkuls. 
Leipzig,  1877. 

XV.  J.  Delboeuf :  Logique  Algorithmique.     Liege  et  Bruxelles, 
1877. 

XVI.  Hugh  McColl :  The  Calculus  of  Equivalent  Statements,  and 
Integration  Limits.     Proc.  London  Math.  Soc.,  Vol.  IX.,    1877-78. 
Vol.  X.,  1878,  Vol.  XL,  1880. 

XVII.  Gottlob  Frege :    Begriffsschrift,   eine  der  arithmetischen 
nachgebildete  Formelsprache  des  reinen  Denkens.    Halle,  1879.    Re- 


ON  THE  ALGEBKA  OF  LOGIC.         71 

viewed  by  Ernst  Schroder  in  Zeitschrift  fur  MathematiJc  und  Physik, 
1880. 

XVIII.  Wilhelm  Wundt :  Logik,  eine  Untersuchung  der  Princi- 
pien  der  Erkenntniss  und  der  Methoden  wissenschaftlicher  Forschung. 
I.  Bd. :  Erkenntnisslehre.     Stuttgart,  1880. 

XIX.  J.  Venn  :   On  the  Diagrammatic  and  Mechanical  Repre- 
sentation  of  Propositions  and  Reasoning.     Phil.  Mag.,  July,  1880. 

XX.  J.  Venn  :  Symbolic  Reasoning.     Mind,  July,  1880. 

XXI.  C.  S.  Peirce  :  On  the  Algebra  of  Logic.  Am.  Jour,  of  Math., 
Vol.  III.,  September,  1880. 

XXII.  W.  S.  Jevons  :  Studies  in  Deductive  Logic.   London,  1880. 

XXIII.  John  Venn  :  Symbolic  Logic.     London,  1881. 

NOTE. — In  the  foregoing  article  "combination"  has  been  used  as 
synonymous  with  "multiplication."  In  the  following  article,  "combi 
nation  "  is  used  as  including  both  multiplication  and  addition. 


ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

BY  0.  H.  MITCHELL. 


THE  algebra  of  logic  which  I  wish  to  propose  may  be 
briefly  characterized  as  follows  :  All  propositions  —  cate 
gorical,  hypothetical,  or  disjunctive  —  are  expressed  as 
logical  polynomials,  and  the  rule  of  inference  from  a  set 
of  premises  is :  Take  the  logical  product  of  the  premises 
and  erase  the  terms  to  be  eliminated.  No  set  of  terms 
can  be  eliminated  whose  erasure  would  destroy  an  ag- 
gregant  term.  So  far  as  the  ordinary  universal  prem 
ises  are  concerned,  the  method  will  be  seen  to  be  simply 
the  negative  of  Boole's  method  as  modified  by  Schroder. 
The  reason  is,  that  the  terms  which  the  propositions 
involve  are  virtually  all  on  the  right-hand  side  of  the 
copula,  instead  of  all  on  the  left-hand  side,  as  in  Boole's 
method. 

Attention  is  especially  called  to  the  treatment  here 
given  of  particular  propositions  (of  which  there  is  intro 
duced  a  variety  of  new  kinds)  which  is  homogeneous 
with  that  of  universals,  the  process  of  elimination  being 
precisely  the  same  in  each  case.  For  the  sake  of  clear 
ness  it  may  be  well  to  state  at  the  outset  that  I  use 
addition  in  the  modified  Boolian  sense,  —  that  is,  x  +  y 
=  all  that  is  either  x  or  y. 


ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.       73 

§  1.  Logic  has  principally  to  do  with  the  relations  of 
objects  of  thought.  A  proposition  is  a  statement  of  such 
a  relation.  The  objects  of  thought,  among  which  rela 
tions  may  be  conceived  to  exist,  include  not  only  class 
terms  but  also  propositions.  The  statement  of  a  rela 
tion  among  propositions  is  a  proposition  about  proposi 
tions,  which  Boole  called  a  secondary  proposition.  But 
every  proposition  in  its  ultimate  analysis  expresses  a 
relation  among  class  terms.  The  universe  of  class  terms, 
implied  by  every  proposition  or  set  of  propositions,  may 
be  limited  or  unlimited.  Two  class  terms,  a,  £,  are 
defined  as  the  negatives  of  each  other  by  the  equations 

a  +  b  =  U, 
ab  =  0, 

where  U  is  the  symbol  for  the  universe  'of  class  terms. 
Two  prepositional  terms,  a,  /3,  are  defined  as  the  nega 
tives  or  contradictories  of  each  other  by  the  equations 

a.  +  $  =  GO, 

«p=o, 

where  oo  is  the  symbol  for  the  universe  of  relation,  or 
for  "the  possible  state  of  things."  Mr.  Peirce  uses  oo 
indifferently  as  a  symbol  for  the  universe  of  class  terms, 
or  for  the  universe  of  relation,  but  in  the  method  of  this 
paper  it  seems  most  convenient  to  have  separate  sym 
bols.  We  can  speak  of  "  all  of  "  or  "  some  of  "  £7,  but 
hardly,  it  seems  to  me,  of  "  all  of "  or  "  some  of "  the 
universe  of  relation ;  that  is,  the  state  of  things.  For 
this  reason  oo  seems  an  especially  appropriate  symbol 
for  the  universe  of  relation. 

The  relation  implied  by  a  proposition  may  be  con 
ceived  as  concerning  "  all  of "  or  "  some  of "  the  uni 
verse  of  class  terms.  In  the  first  case  the  proposition 


74  ON   A   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

is  called  universal  ;  in  the  second,  particular.  The  rela 
tion  may  be  conceived  as  permanent  or  as  temporary  ; 
that  is,  as  lasting  during  the  whole  of  a  given  quantity  of 
time,  limited  or  unlimited,  —  the  Universe  of  Time,  —  or 
as  lasting  for  only  a  (definite  or  indefinite)  portion  of  it. 
A  proposition  may  then  be  said  to  be  universal  or  par 
ticular  in  time.  The  universe  of  relation  is  thus  two- 
dimensional,  so  to  speak  ;  that  is,  a  relation  exists  among 
the  objects  in  the  universe  of  class  terms  during  the 
universe  of  time. 

The  ordinary  propositions  neglect  the  element  of  time  ; 
and  these  will  first  occupy  our  attention. 

Let  F  be  any  logical  polynomial  involving  class 
terms  and  their  negatives,  that  is,  any  sum  of  products 
(aggregants)  of  such  terms.  Then  the  following  are 
respectively  the  forms  of  the  universal  and  the  particular 
propositions  :  — 

All     Vis  Fj  here  denoted  by  F19 
Some  CT  is.*;     «  «          Fu. 

These  two  forms  are  so  related  that 


=  oo 


that  is,  Fl  and  Fu  are  negatives  of  each  other  ;  that  is, 
\)  =  Fu.     The  two  propositions  Fl  and  J\  satisfy  the 


one  equation 


and  are  "  contraries  "  of  each  other.  Whence,  by  taking 
the  negative  of  both  sides,  we  get 

FU  +  FU=  oo; 

that  is,  Fu  and  Fu  are  "  sub-contraries  "  of  each  other. 
The  line  over  the  F  in  the  above  does  not  indicate  the 
negative  of  the  proposition,  only  the  negative  of  the 


ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.       75 

predicate,  F.  The  negative  of  the  proposition  Fl  is  not 
jFi,  but  (^),  which,  according  to  the  above,  =  Fu. 

The  Aristotelian  propositions  are  represented  in  this 
notation  as  follows  :  — 

(a  +  5)x  =  All     of  U  is  «  +  5  =  No      a  is  5,    .  .  .  .  .#. 

(a#)M       =  Some  of  U  is  ab       =  Some  a  is  b,    ....  /. 

(a  +  b\  =  All     of  £7  is  a  +  £  =  All      a  is  5,    ....  A. 

(ab)u       =  Some  of  Z7  is  a5        =  Some  a  is  not  ft,   .  .  0. 

By  substituting  a,  I  for  a,  5  throughout  we  get  the  four 
complementary  propositions  of  De  Morgan.  If  these 
two  forms  be  applied  to  the  sixteen  possible  sums  of  ab, 
aS,  db,  aS,  there  results  the  following 

TABLE  OF  PROPOSITIONS. 


(ab  +  al  +  ab  +  ab)^    ..........     (0) 

(at  +  ab  +  «5)1  ............   (ab) 

(ab  +  al  +  ab),  ............  (a5) 

(ab  +  ab  +  ab)1  ............  (ab) 

(ab  +  al  +  ab\  ............  (al) 

(ab  +  afyi  ............  («5  +  ab) 

(ab  +  ab^  ............  (a5  +  al) 

(ab  +  al\  ............  yn  +  afy 

(aB  +  ab\  ............  (al  +  a^) 

(a5  +  al\  ............   (ab  +  ab) 


............    (ab  +  ab  +  a^)u 

(al\  ............    (ab  +  ab  +  aJ). 

............  (a5  +  ab  +  05). 

............   (ab  +  a5  +  ab)u 


76 


ON   A   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


Opposite   propositions   are   negatives   of    each   other. 
The  Table  reduced  to  its  simplest  form  becomes 

REDUCED  TABLE. 


1 

(U), 

(0)« 

2 

(a  +  5V 

(aft 

3 

(a  +  b], 

.  lab) 

4 

(a  +  5s), 

.  (ab}u 

5 

(a  +  b), 

.  (ab)u 

6 

(a), 

(a\ 

7 

(b} 

(b) 

8 

.  .  .  (aB  +  ab) 

9 

(ob  +  db)l  .  .  . 

.  .  .  (ab  +  ab\ 

10 

(M 

(b) 

11 

(a\ 

(a} 

12 

(ab}, 

.(a  +  %) 

13 

(06} 

(a  +  b) 

14 

(ab\ 

.  (a  4.  J) 

15 

(«5)i  - 

.  (a  +  b), 

16 

(0)i 

•  (U}u 

If  three  terms  be  treated  in  a  similar  way  we  get 
2.223,=  512,  different  propositions.  With  n  terms  the 
total  number  is  2.22". 

The  propositions  (0)i  and  (0)tt  assert  that  there  is  no 
universe  of  discourse,  and  are  false  in  every  argument, 
since  a  universe  of  class  terms  greater  than  zero  is  to  be 
pre-supposed.  Their  negatives  (£7)M,  (^)i  are  there 
fore  true  in  every  argument.  The  eight  propositions  of 
De  Morgan  occur  in  lines  2,  3,  4,  5  of  the  Table. 


ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.       77 

Since  the  universe  of  class  terms  is  supposed  greater 
than  zero,  the  dictum  de  omni  gives 

-*i-<^; 
that  is,  "  all  Z7is  J7"  implies  "  some  U  is  I7." 

To  say  "  no  UisF  "  is  evidently  the  same  as  to  say  "  all 

U  is  F;"  that  is,  F0  =  F19  and  since  a  proposition  whose 
suffix  is  0  is  thus  expressible  in  a  form  with  the  suffix 
equal  to  1,  each  suffix  used  will  be  supposed  greater  than 
zero.  The  suffix  u  in  Fu  is  taken  to  be  a  fraction  or  part 
of  U  less  than  the  whole  ;  that  is,  "  some  of  "  U.  In  the 
proposition  "some  U  is  jP"  it  is  not  denied  that  all 

U  may  be  J7,  but  the  assertion  is  made  of  only  a  part 
of  U.  Thus  u  is  taken  as  greater  than  zero  and  less 
than  1,  or  U.  When  u  is  written  as  a  suffix  of  different 
propositions  in  the  same  argument,  it  is  not  meant  that 
the  same  part  of  U  is  concerned  in  each  case.  F±  is  writ 
ten  for  convenience  instead  of  Fv.  Sometimes  Fe  will 
be  written  as  a  form  inclusive  of  both  the  forms  F:  and 
Fu ;  that  is,  e  will  be  considered  as  having  either  of  the 
two  values  1  or  u. 

For  inference  ~by  combination  of  such  propositions  we 
have  the  following  simple  rules  :  — 


The  conclusion  from  the 
product  of  two  premises  is  the 
product  of  the  predicates  of 
the  premises  affected  by  a  suf 
fix  equal  to  the  product  (in 
extension)  of  the  suffices  of 
the  premises.  Thus 


The  conclusion  from  the 
sum  of  two  premises  is  the 
sum  of  the  predicates  of  the 
premises  affected  by  a  suffix 
equal  to  the  sum  (in  intension) 
of  the  suffices  of  the  premi 
ses.  Thus 


*  This  is  Mr.  Peirce's  sign  for  the  copula  of  inclusion,  being  an  abbrevia 
tion  of  ^.  It  is  read  "is,"  "is  included  under,"  or  "implies."  The 
following  formulae  are  sometimes  made  use  of  in  this  paper :  (a  -<  b) 
=  (2>  -<  a)  =  (06  =  0)  =  ( oo  =  a  -\-  b),  where  a>  =  the  universe  of  dis 
course.  Also,  (a  -<  b)  (x  -<  y)  -<  (ax  -<  by). 


78  ON  A   NEW  ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

When  both  premises  are  (  umver^al  1  the  relation  be- 

l  particular  3 

tween   the  j  Product  1  and  the  conclusion  is  equality ; 

I  sum 
otherwise,  the  relation  is  -<,  an  implication.     Thus 


(1)  F&  =  (FG) 

(2)  F,Gu-< 

(3)  FUGU  -<  oo. 


FU+GU=  (F+G)U,  (10 
Fu+G,-<  (F+G)U,  (20 
F1+G1-<(F+G\.(3') 


These  formula?  are  so  evident  as  hardly  to  need  explana 
tion.     (1)  means 

(U=F)  (U=G)  =  (V-= 


and  it  follows  from  the  definition  of  logical  multiplica 
tion.  By  taking  the  negative  of  both  sides,  and  chang 
ing  F,  &  to  F,  G-,  we  get  (!')•  The  law  of  the  suffices 
in  (!')  is  u  4-  u  =  u,  or  some  +  some  =  some.  (2)  means 


(U=F)  (u=G)  =  (u  = 

and  follows  also  from  multiplication.  The  law  of  suf 
fices  is  1  u  =  u ;  that  is,  Uu  =  u.  Since  G-1  -<  (7«,  (20 
follows  from  (!').  The  law  of  the  suffices  is  u  +  1  =  w ; 
that  is,  "  all  of  "  or  "  some  of  "  =  "  some  of,"  which  is  ad 
dition  in  an  intensive  sense.  In  formula  (3)  there  can 
be  no  inference  when  nothing  is  known  about  the  rela 
tion  of  the  two  suffices ;  that  is,  Fu  Gu  —<^  oo.  If  it  be 
known  that  u  and  u'  have  any  common  part,  then  for 
this  common  part  FUG-U>  -<  (FG)UU,.  Thus  if  u  =  f  Z7, 
and  u'=%U,  then  Fu G-u, -<  (FQ-\,, ,  where  u"  =  uu'=^U. 
Since  we  evidently  have  (FG-)U^^  FUGU,  we  get  by 
contraposition  the  formula  (3'),  which  means  in  words 
" '  either  all  U=  F,  or  all  U=Gr'  implies  '  all  U—  either 

Having  regard  to  (1)  and  (I'),  it  will  be  seen  that 


ON   A   NEW  ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  79 

the  most  general  proposition  under  the  given  conditions 
is  of  the  form 


or 


where  F  and  G  are   any  logical  polynomials  of  class 
terms,  II  denotes  a  product,  and  S  denotes  a  sum. 

If  F  and  G  be  any  of  the  sixteen  polynomials  involv 
ing  two  class  terms  a,  5,  it  is  interesting  to  notice  that 
any  proposition,  Z^IIG-J,  can  be  reduced  to  the  sum 
of  products  of  the  eight  propositions  of  De  Morgan. 
Thus,  referring  to  the  Table  on  page  76,  any  proposition 
Fl  in  the  first  column  is  equivalent  (1)  to  the  product 
of  one  or  more  of  the  propositions  2,3,  4,  5,  —  that  is,  E, 
A,  E\  A'  (the  two  universal  propositions  added  by  De 
Morgan  to  the  classic  two  being  represented  by  Efy  A')  ; 
and  any  proposition  Gu  of  the  second  column  is  equiva 
lent  (I/)  to  the  sum  of  one  or  more  of  the  propositions 
7,  (9,  J',  0',  the  two  accented  letters  representing  the 
particular  propositions  added  by  De  Morgan.  Thus 
Fl  =  U«,  and  II  Gu  =  112  '/3  =  2U/3,  where  a  is  one  of 
the  four  universals  of  De  Morgan,  and  /3  is  one  of  the 
four  particulars.  Thus 


Thus,  for  example,  the  proposition 

(a  +  b\  (ab  +  a5)j  -f-  («5)1  +  (&)u  (#  +  ^)i> 
when  reduced,  becomes 

{(«&)«  +  («5)M  +  («&)„}  (a  +  &)1  (a  +  5)T 

4-  («  +  5)!  (a  +  5)1(a  +  &)1+  {(«£)„+  (a5)u}(a 

In  like  manner  it  may  be  shown  that  if  F,  G,  etc.  be 
logical  functions  of  any  number  of  class  terms,  a,  5,  c, 
etc.,  the  general  proposition 


80       ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

may  be  reduced  to  a  function  of  the  eight  propositions 
of  De  Morgan  of  the  form 


where  p,  etc.  are  the  eight  propositions. 

Propositions  united  by  +  form  disjunctive  propo 
sitions.  A  hypothetical  proposition,  "  if  a,  then  /3,"  or 
a  -<  £,  where  a  and  j3  are  themselves  propositions,  is 
evidently  equivalent  to  the  purely  disjunctive  propo 
sition  a  +  ft.  Thus  "  if  a  is  be,  then  cd  is  e "  means 

(a  +  &<Oi-<  0  +  5  +  e)j; 
which  is  the  same  as 

(aB  +  ae)u  +  (e+S  +  e)19 

which  may  be  put  into  words  in  one  way  as  follows: 
"  some  a  is  either  non-6  or  non-c,  or  all  d  which  is  non-c 
is  e."  The  preceding  formulas  are  examples  of  inference, 
by  combination  of  propositions  ;  that  is,  of  inference  from 
a  product  or  from  a  sum  of  propositions. 

Inference  by  elimination  will  now  be  considered.  It 
will  only  be  necessary  to  consider  the  fundamental  form 
jPe,  where  e  may  be  either  1  or  u.  If  I7  be  a  polynomial 
of  the  class  terms,  a,b,c,...  x,  y,  z,  then  x,  y,  z  may  be 
eliminated  from  Fe  by  erasure,  provided  no  aggregant 
term  is  thereby  destroyed.  That  is, 

Ft  -<  F,', 

where  F1  is  what  remains  of  F  after  the  erasure.     Thus 
(ax  +  bcxy  +  dcz  +  db)e  -<  (a  +  be  +  dc  +  db)e . 

The  reason  is  obvious.  To  say  that  "  (all  or  some)  U 
is  dx,  or  bcxy,  or  etc.,"  is  saying  by  an  obvious  implica 
tion  that  "  (all  or  some)  U  is  a,  or  be,  or  etc."  Fe 
means  (all  or  some)  U  -<  F,  and  the  erasure  of  a  fac 
tor  of  a  monomial  term  of  F  simply  increases  the  extent 


ON   A   NEW   ALGEBRA    OF   LOGIC.  81 

of  the  term ;  therefore  the  predicate  F  is  not  diminished, 
and  (all  or  some)  U  -<^  F',  —  that  is,  FJ  is  a  valid  in 
ference.  F1  is  really  the  sum  of  the  coefficients  of  x,  y, 
z  in  F,  and  is  obviously  a  factor  of  F.  The  other  factor 
of  F  is  F  +  P ;  for  F'  (F  +  F')  =  F,  and  F  +  F'  is  seen 
to  contain  no  factor  independent  of  x,  #,  2,  since  on 
erasing  x,  ?/,  2,  the  result  is  .F'  +  F',  =  U.  If  one  of  the 
aggregant  terms  of  F  contain  no  letters  except  those  to 
be  eliminated,  then  its  coefficient  is  U,  and  Ft'  will  in 
this  case  be  a  nugatory  result.  Thus  from  (a  +  led), 
b,  c,  d,  be,  Id,  or  cd  can  be  eliminated,  but  not  a,  ab,  ac, 
ad,  ale,  aid,  aed,  or  led.  As  already  stated,  this  alge 
bra  is  the  negative  of  Boole's  as  modified  by  Schroder, 
so  far  as  universal  premises  are  concerned.  Thus  Boole 
multiplied  propositions  by  addition,  and  eliminated  by 
multiplying  coefficients.  The  method  here  employed 
multiplies  propositions  by  multiplication,  and  eliminates 
by  adding  coefficients.  When  many  eliminations  are 
demanded  in  a  problem,  the  advantage  in  point  of 
brevity  of  this  method  over  Boole's  is  of  course  greatly 
increased. 

Before  considering  some  illustrative  examples,  another 
kind  of  inference  is  to  be  noticed ;  namely,  inference  by 
predication ;  that  is,  the  finding  what  a  given  proposition 
says  about  a  given  term,  simple  or  complex.  The  rule 
is  :  Multiply  F  by  the  given  term,  m,  or  add  m  to  F.  The 
resulting  coefficient  of  m  in  mF,  or  the  residue  of  F  after 
adding  iii  and  reducing,  will  be  the  predicate  of  m.  Thus 

Fe  -<  (m  =  mF)., 
or     Fe~<  (m  +  F)t. 

The  first  means,  "if  U=F  for  all  or  some  U,  then 
m  =  mF  for  all  or  some  U"  and  the  result  is  obviously 
obtained  by  multiplying  both  sides  of  U=  Fby  m.  The 


82  Otf   A   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

second  relation  means,  "if  U  =  F  for  all  or  some  U, 
then  U =  m  +  F  for  all  or  some  Z7,"  and  the  result  is 
obtained  by  adding  m  to  both  sides,  remembering  that 
U  +  m  =  U.  We  have,  of  course, 

(m  +  F)e  =  (m  +  mF)e  =  (m  =  mF)e. 

I  now  give  the  solution  of  the  well-known  problem  of 
Boole,  "  Laws  of  Thought,"  p.  146.  The  premises  are, 
remembering  that  («  =  &)  =  («  +  b^  (a  +  5)^ 

(x  +  z  -f  vyw  +  vwy)lf 

(v  +  x  +  w  +  yz  +  yz)19 

(x  +  vy  +  w£  +  wz\(xy  +  va;  +  w«  +  wz)^ 

Multiplying  the  premises  together,  and  dropping  v  from 

the  result,  we  get 

(wxz  +  wxz  -f-  wfl32  +  iZ?xy  +  wxyz)19  =  say  J^. 
The  four  results  asked  for  by  the  problem  are 

(1)  (x  +  wz  +  ws  + 

(2)  (wS  +  wz  +  ^  +  w;y  + 

(3)  (y  +  ^^^  +  wxz  +  wxz 

(4)  (wa?  +  i/5S  +  xz  +  i 

The  first  gives  the  predicate  of  x  in  terms  of  #,  ^,  w, 
being  the  same  as  x  -<  wi  +  w^  +  wjy,  and  is  obtained  by 
adding  x  to  ^  and  reducing.  The  second  is  the  relation 
among  y,  25,  w,  and  is  obtained  by  dropping  x  from  F 
and  reducing.  The  result  (U\  shows  that  no  relation 
is  implied  among  ^,  2,  «0  alone.  The  third  gives  the 
predicate  of  y  in  terms  of  #,  2,  w,  and  is  obtained  by 
adding  #  to  .F  and  reducing.  The  fourth  is  the  relation 
implied  among  x,  z,  w,  and  is  obtained  by  dropping  y 
from  F  and  reducing.  The  relation  (3)  is  not  in  its 
simplest  form,  since  the  implied  relation  (4)  among  #,  2,  w 


ON   A   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  83 

has  not  yet  been  taken  into  account.  Since  (p.  81) 
we  have  F  =  F'  (F  +  F1)  ,  where  F]  is  what  remains 
of  F  after  erasing  ?/,  and  F  +  F'  is  that  factor  of  F 
which  contains  no  factor  independent  of  ?/,  we  get 
Fl  =  F^F-i-  F'\.  The  first  factor  FJ  is  (4),  and  from 
the  second  factor  we  get  (y  +  F+F'\  as  the  simplest 
form  of  (3),  that  is, 

\  U     i          ^\     c      '       *  / 1 

Ordinary  syllogism  appears  in  this  method  as  follows  : 
The  mood  Barbara  becomes 


b  being  eliminated  by  dropping  it.  The  moods  Darii, 
Datisi,  Disamis,  and  Dimaris  are  all 

(ab)u  (5+  c)x  -<  (abc)u-<  (ac\. 
The  premises  of  the  mood  Darapti  are 

(m  +p\(m  +  s)lf  =  (m  +  sp\\ 

but  there  is  no  conclusion  independent  of  the  middle 
term  m,  since  m  cannot  be  eliminated.  In  inferring  the 
conclusion  I  from  these  two  premises  logicians  have 
virtually  included  a  third  premise  (w)tt,  that  is,  "  some 
of  U  is  m,"  or  "  there  is  some  ;«."  This  with  the  pro 
duct  of  the  other  two  gives  "  some  8  is  p  ; "  that  is, 

(m  +  sp)l(m)u  -<  (spm)u  -<  (sp)u. 

In  the  same  way,  the  premises  of  Felapton  and  Fesapo 
are 

(m  +p)1(m  +  5)x  =  (m  +  sp)i> 

and  m  cannot  be  eliminated  here.  With  the  additional 
premise  (m)u  we  get  "  some  *  is  not  p  ; "  that  is, 

(m  +  sp\(m)u  -<  (spm)u  -<  (sp)H. 
The  premises  of  Bramantip  are 

(p  +  m)^  +  s)1  =  (sp  +  sm  +  mp\  -<  (s  +  p\\ 


84       ON  A  NEW  ALGEBKA  OF  LOGIC. 

that  is,  the  conclusion  is  not  "  some  s  is  p"  but  "  all  p  is 
«,"  or  "  all  5  is  p"  the  proposition  A1.  Here,  again,  the 
conclusion  "  some  s  is  p  "  has  been  reached  only  by  the 
virtual  inclusion  of  a  third  premise,  "  there  is  some  p" 
that  is,  (p)u.  Then  we  have 

(sp  +  sm  +  mp)i(p)u  ~<  (smp)u  ~<  (sp)u> 

This  is  the  same  thing  as  to  say  that  a  particular  con- 
elusion  cannot  be  drawn  from  universal  premises,  since 
a  particular  proposition  implies  the  existence  of  its  sub 
ject,  while  a  universal  does  not.1 

As  another  illustration  of  the  method,  I  solve  the 
problem  in  Boole's  "Laws  of  thought,"  p.  207.  The 
premises  are 

(w  +  xyz  +  xyz  +  xyz\, 


Their  product  is 

[f{wy  +  w  (p~jr  +  pqr  +  pqr)  +  xyz  +  zyz  +  xyz  (pTjr  +pqr 
+  wx  {pqyz  +  pqys  +  pqryz}\,  say  F1  , 


which  contains  everything  implied  in  the  premises.     The 
results  asked  for  are 

1.  (r  +  t  +  z)l9  whence          t  -<  r  +  z 

2.  (r+t  +  y)19  "  t-<r  +  y 

3.  (U\9 

1  Mr.  Peirce  and  others. 


ON   A   NEW  ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


85 


(t  +  x)19 
(p  +  <i  + 


6.         (t  +  yz  +  yzr)} 


7.         (t  -J-  yz  +  y%)\  > 


whence 
tt 


whence 


whence 


t  -<  x 

y-<p  +  2 

rt  -<  yz 
tz  -<  yr 
ry  -<  t 

t-<  U 
,z  +  yz-<  t. 


The  relations  in  the  first  column  are  each  obtained  by 
dropping  from  Fl  the  letters  not  concerned  in  the  qurasi- 
tum.  Each  predicate  in  the  second  column  is  obtained 
by  multiplying  its  opposite  X"  by  its  subject.  The  re 
sult  4  disagrees  with  that  obtained  by  Boole. 

The  two  examples  taken  from  Boole  have  dealt  ex 
clusively  with  universal  propositions.  The  following  is 
of  a  different  kind  :  — 

What  may  be  inferred  independent  of  x  and  j  from 
the  two  premises,  "  either  some  a  that  is  x  is  not  y,  or  all 
d  is  both  x  and  y;  "  and  "either  some  y  is  both  b  and  x, 
or  all  x  is  either  not  y  or  c  and  not  b  "  ? 

The  premises  are 

(axy)u  +  (d,  +  xy\, 
(bxy)u+  (x  +  y  +  le\. 
By  multiplication  we  get 

(axy)u  (bxy\  +  (bxy\  +  (axy)u  +  (fix  +  ay  +  Icoi  +  lcxy)l  . 
Whence,  dropping  x,  y  and  reducing,  we  get 


which  may  be  interpreted  in  words,  "  there  is  some  5,  or 
a,  or  else  all  d  is  c  and  not  6." 


86  ON   A  NEW  ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

From  this  result  we  may  further  eliminate  c.  Elimi 
nating  c,  we  get 

(b  +  a)u+  (3  +  l)19 

which  means  "  either  b  or  a  exists,  or  no  d  is  5." 

The  analogy  bettveen  class  and  propositioned  terms.  — 
Hitherto  in  the  consideration  of  Fl  and  Fu  the  polynomial 
F  has  been  regarded  as  a  function  of  class  terms  a,  £, 
etc.  Suppose  a,  b,  etc.  to  be  prepositional  terms  like 
Fl  and  Fu,  and  call  the  resulting  polynomial  no  longer  F, 
but  $.  Then  the  suffices  of  ^  and  £M  cannot  be  in 
terpreted  any  longer  as  referring  to  the  universe  of  class 
terms,  since  the  prepositional  terms  F19  7^,  etc.,  of  which 
$  is  a  function,  are  supposed  to  have  already  suffices 
with  this  meaning.  The  suffices  of  $x  and  $M  can  only 
be  interpreted  then  as  referring  to  the  universe  of  the 
time  during  which  the  complex  or  secondary  proposition 
#  is  supposed  to  be  true.  Then,  if  F  denote  the  uni 
verse  of  time, 

<£>!  means     "  $,  during  all       F,"     or     "  all       V  -<  <£," 
$v      "         "$,      "       some  F,"     or     "some  F-<  <3>." 
In  otlier  words 

^  means     "  $  is  always  true," 
<£»      "          "  ^  is  sometimes  true," 
where  "  always  "  refers  to  the  universe  of  time,  V, 

Owing  to  the  similarity  between  class  terms  and  prepo 
sitional  terms  with  respect  to  the  operations  of  multipli 
cation  and  addition,  it  follows  that  all  that  has  been 
said  in  regard  to  inference  from  propositions  like  F^  Fu 
holds  equally  with  ^  and  $v  .  Thus 


i  » 


ON  A  NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  87 

So  in  regard  to  elimination,  any  set  of  terms  can  be 
eliminated  by  neglect,  provided  no  aggregant  term  is 
thereby  destroyed. 

§  2.   Propositions  of  Two  Dimensions. 

Let  U  stand  for  the  universe  of  class  terms,  as  before, 
and  let  V  represent  the  universe  of  time.  Let  I7  be  a 
polynomial  function  of  class  terms,  a,  6,  etc.  Then  let 
us  consider  the  following  system  of  six  propositions : 

Fuv,  meaning  "some  part  of  U,  during  some  part  of  V,  is  F" 
Ful)  "  "  some  part  of  U,  during  every  part  of  V,  is  F" 
Flv,  "  "every  part  of  U,  during  some  part  of  V,  is  F? 
Fufl,  "  "  the  same  part  of  U,  during  every  part  of  F,  is  F" 
Fiv't  "  "every  part  of  U,  during  the  same  part  of  V,  is  F" 
Fn,  "  "every  part  of  U,  during  every  part  of  F,  is  F." 

By  thus  introducing  the  element  of  time,  three  varieties 
of  the  proposition  Fu  are  distinguished,  —  Fuv,  Ful,  FU>1. 
Thus  in  speaking  of  the  people  of  a  certain  village  during 
a  certain  summer  (Z7=  village,  V=  summer),  "some 
of  the  Browns  were  at  the  sea-shore  during  the  sum 
mer"  may  mean  either  that  some  of  them  were  there 
during  a  part  of  the  summer,  or  that  some  of  them  were 
there  during  every  part  of  the  summer,  —  not  necessarily 
the  same  persons,  —  or  that  the  same  persons  werepthere 
during  the  whole  summer.  These  three  meanings  are 
here  denoted  respectively  by  (&«)«»?  (£«)«i>  (&s)«i-  Three 
varieties  of  F1  are  also  distinguished, —  Fn,  Flv,  Flv,. 
Thus  "  all  the  Browns  were  ill  during  the  year "  may 
mean  either  that  every  one  was  ill  during  every  part  of 
the  year,  or  that  every  one  was  ill  during  some  part  of 
the  year,  —  not  necessarily  the  same  part,  —  or  that  every 


ON   A   NEW   ALGEBKA    OF   LOGIC. 

one  was  ill  during  the  same  part  of  the  year.     These 
three   meanings   are   denoted   respectively  by   (I  +  i] 
P  +  ^P  +  fV 

The   dictum    de   omni   gives    the   following  relations 
among  these  six  propositions  :  — 


ul,FlvFulFuv)  and  F^  + 
and  since  same  is  included  under  some,  we  have 

Flv,-<  Fln  and  F^  -<  Ful. 
The  following  pairs  of  propositions, 

Fuv  and  Fu  ,Ful  and  F*  ,  FU>1  and  Fl9, 
satisfy  the  two  equations 


and  the  members  of  each  pair  are  therefore  the  negatives 
or  contradictories  of  each  other.  Thus  if  F=  I  +\  it  is 
seen  that  (U\v  and  (5  +  i)u  are  contradictories  ;  that  is, 
"  either  some  of  the  Browns  were  not  ill  during  some 
part  of  the  year,  or  they  were  all  ill  during  every  part 
of  the  year,"  and  both  cannot  be  true.  An  example 
of  the  second  pair  is  (li)ul  and  (5  +  ?)ll/;  that  is,  "  either 
some  of  the  Browns  were  ill  during  every  part  of  the 
year  (not  necessarily  the  same  persons  during  the  whole 
year)  or  at  some  particular  time  none  of  them  were 
ill,"  a*nd  both  cannot  be  true.  An  example  of  the  third 
pair  is  (fo')ttl  and  (b  +  i)lv,  "  either  the  same  Browns 
were  ill  during  the  whole  year,  or  it  was  true  for  each 

*  The  natural  first  thought  is  that  FU,  Fui,  FIV,  Fuv  form  a  system  of 
propositions  by  themselves,  but  it  is  seen  that  FW  and  Fu>i  must  be  added 
to  the  system,  in  order  to  contradict  Fu}  and  Flv.  Mr.  Peirce  pointed  out 
to  me  that  these  propositions  are  really  triple  relatives,  and  are  therefore 
six  in  number.  Fn,  for  instance,  means  "F  is  a  description  of  U  during 
V"  See  the  Johns  Hopkins  University  Circular,  August,  1882,  p.  204. 


ON   A  NEW   ALGEBRA    OF    LOGIC.  89 

part  of  the  village  during  some  part  of  the  year  that  none 
of  the  Browns  were  ill,"  and  both  cannot  be  true. 

Since  from  A  -<  B  we  get  A  +  B  =  GO  and  AB  =  0, 
so  from  Fn  -<^  Fw 


we  get  Fvv  +  Fuv  =  GO, 

and  ^ii^ii  =  0; 

hence  Fn  and  "Fn  are  "  contraries  "  of  each  other,  and 
Fuv  ,  Fuv  are  "  sub-contraries."   In  the  same  way  F&  -<  Flv 

gives  Fvl  +  Flv  =  GO, 

and  Flv,Fv>!  =  0  ; 

that  is,  Fw  and  F^  are  contraries,  and  Fvl,  Flv  are  sub- 
contraries.     The   line   over   F  affects   only  F,  not  the 
suffices.     Thus   the   negative   of  Fn   would   be   written 
(3y,  not  Fn. 

To  say  "  no  U  is  ^,  during  F"  is  evidently  the  same 
as  to  say  "  all  Uis  F,  during  F;  "  that  is, 


so  F10  —  Fu  , 


Since  every  proposition  with  zero  as  one  or  both  of  the 
suffices  is  thus  expressible  in  a  form  with  no  suffix  equal 
to  zero,  each  suffix  used  will  be  supposed  greater  than 
zero.  The  suffices  u,  v  are  also  supposed  less  than  U,  F", 
just  as  u  was  supposed  less  than  U  in  the  preceding 
section.  Faji  will  sometimes  be  used  to  include  all  six 
of  the  fundamental  propositions  :  that  is,  a  will  be  con 
sidered  as  having  any  one  of  the  values  1,  w,  or  u'  ;  ft  as 
having  any  one  of  the  values  1,  v,  or  v'. 


90 


ON   A   NEW   ALGEBKA    OF    LOGIC. 


For  inference  ly  combination  of  such  propositions  we 
have  tup  following  simple  rules,  which  are  seen  to  be  the 
same  as  in  §  1 :  — 


The  conclusion  from  the 
product  of  two  premises  is  the 
product  of  their  predicates 
affected  by  suffices  which  are 
the  products  (in  extension)  of 
the  suffices  of  the  premises. 
Thus 


When  all  the  suffices  are  1. 
the  relation  between  the  pro 
duct  of  the  premises  and  the 
conclusion  is  equality  ;  other 
wise  it  is  -<,  —  that  is,  impli 
cation.  Thus 


FulGn-<(FG)ulJ 
etc. 


The  conclusion  from  the 
sum  of  two  premises  is  the 
sum  of  their  predicates  affected 
by  suffices  which  are  the  sums 
(in  intension)  of  the  suffices 
of  the  premises.  Thus 


When  none  of  the  suffices  are 
1,  the  relation  between  the 
sum  of  the  premises  and  the 
conclusion  is  equality ;  other 
wise  it  is  -<,  —  that  is,  impli 
cation.  Thus 

Fuv  +  GUV=(F  +  G)m, 

Flv+  Guv-<  (F+  G)uv, 

etc. 


But,  by  an  exception  to  the 

rule,  do  not  have  FulGlv-<  (FG\V  since  Glv  is  not  of  the 

form  (Gj)v. 

These  formulas  really  follow  at  once  from  those  in  §  1. 
Thus  Fn  may  be  written  (^1)1 ;  hence  by  §  1  we  have 


G) 


and 

(Fu)v  +  (Gu)v  =  (Fu  +  Gu)v  =((F+ 
So  in  general  we  have 


and 


(Fa+ 


O1S:    A   NEW   ALGEBRA    OF   LOGIC.  91 

the  addition  of  the  suffices  being  taken  in  the  same  sense 
as  in  §  1  ;  that  is, 

1  +  1  =  1,  l  +  u'  =  u', 

1  +  U  —  U,  U  +  U1  =  Uj 

u  +  u  —  u,  u'  +  u'  —  u'j 

with  like  equations  for  v,  v'.     The  second  set  of  equa 

tions  means 

All  of  +  same  part  of  =  same  part  of, 

Some          of  +  same  part  of  =  some  part  of, 
Same  part  of  -f-  same  part  of  —  same  part  of, 

and  a  -little  consideration  will  show  that  the  formulae 
hold  as  well  for  the  accented  suffices  as  for  the  unac 
cented. 

The  following  formula  is  evident  :  — 

(FG)afi  ~<    Fo.fi  Ga.fi  ' 

For  inference  by  elimination  we  have  only  to  consider 
the  general  form  Fa^  and  the  rule  is  precisely  the  same 
as  the  rule  for  elimination  given  in  §  1,  viz.  :  Any  set  of 
terms  may  be  eliminated  by  erasure  provided  no  aggregant 
term  is  thereby  destroyed.  Thus 

(a  +  bx  +  cdxy  +  ey)afi  -<  (a  +  b  +  cd  +  e)afi, 

and  the  reason  of  the  rule  need  not  be  repeated. 

The  rule  for  inference  by  predication  is  also  evidently 
the  same  as  that  previously  given.  Thus 

(a  +  b  +  cd  +  e)ap  -<  (c  -<  a  +  b  + 
and,  in  general, 


If,  after  the  multiplication  has  been  performed,  mF=  mP, 

then  we  have 

Fa   -<(m-<  P)a/3. 


92       ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC. 

Since  propositions  of  the  form  Fn  can  be  multiplied 
without  loss  of  content,  and  propositions  of  the  form  Fuv 
can  be  added  without  loss  of  content,  the  most  general 
proposition  involving  the  six  fundamental  elements  is  of 
the  form 


or       H  (S^u  +  3Gul  +  SJGT^  +  2Klv  +  2Llv  +  Muv), 

where  F,  6r,  etc.  are  logical  polynomials  of  class  terms. 
But  to  the  six  elements  just  considered  we  may  add  as 
elements  the  forms  $x,  <2>r  considered  at  the  close  of  §  1, 
where  $  is  of  the  form  Pu  +  2  Q^  or  PJIQU  (see  page 
79)  ;  so  that  $1?  <&v  will  be  of  the  forms 

(Pu+2Qi)i,  WI  ft,).. 

It  is  clear  that  (PM  +  SQ^V  =  Puv  +  5Qlv,  and  that 
(^PinQu)l  =  PnnQul;  but  for  the  two  forms  of  $M  <PV 
just  given,  no  such  reduction  can  be  made.  The  suffices 
within  the  parentheses  of  ^1  ,  $v  refer  to  the  universe  of 
class  terms,  those  outside  to  the  universe  of  time.  If 
the  relative  meaning  of  these  suffices  be  reversed,  so  that 
the  suffices  inside  the  parentheses  refer  to  the  universe 
of  class  terms  and  those  outside  to  the  universe  of  time, 
we  have  two  other  prepositional  elements.  Thus  in 
order  to  distinguish  the  meaning  of  the  suffices  clearly, 
it  will  be  necessary  to  use  the  capital  letters  Z7,  F",  and 
write  the  four  forms  just  considered  as 


or,  in  full, 

(Pu  +  2Qv)r,  (P^nft,),,  (pv 


The  negative  of  <fry  is  $r,  which  is  of  the  form  ¥*„.  So  the 
negative  of  Xv  is  Xu,  which  is  of  the  form  flu.  As  ex 
amples  of  £r,  X^,  suppose  the  universe  of  class  terms 
to  be  plane  figures  a,  6,  etc.,  on  a  blackboard,  and  the 


ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.       93 

universe   of  time    to  be   an    hour.     Let  P  =  cib,   and 
Q  =  c  +  d ;  then 


means  "  during  every  part  of  the  hour,  either  some  a 
is  b,  or  no  c  is  d"  while 


means  "  for  every  part  of  the  blackboard,  it  is  true  that 
it  is  either  sometimes  both  a  and  b,  or  never  both  c 
and  d"  So,  as  examples  of  ¥"„  and  flu  we  have,  re 
spectively, 

\(ab)oQ  +  &)„}„ 

which  means  "  at  some  time  during  the  hour,  all  the 
blackboard  is  a&,  and  some  of  it  is  c  +  d"  and 


which  means  "  some  part  of  the  blackboard  is  always 
ab  and  sometimes  c  +  c?." 

Adding  the  four  prepositional  elements  just  described 
to  the  six  described  previously,  we  see  that  the  most 
general  proposition  is  of  the  form 


To  illustrate  the  method  of  inference  from  propositions 
like  the  foregoing,  consider  the  solution  of  the  following 
problem  :  — 

Six  plane  figures,  a,  b,  c,  d,  e,  f,  on  a  blackboard  are 
constantly  changing  their  size,  shape,  and  position  during 
an  hour  under  the  following  restrictions  :  — 

I.  The  area  of  c  and  d  together  is  always  included  in 
the  area  of  a  and  b  together,  or  else,  during  a  certain 
portion  of  the  hour,  e  is  equal  to  the  part  common  to  d 
and  f. 


94       ON  A  NEW  ALGEBKA  OF  LOGIC. 

II.  The  part  of  a  which  is  not  e  is  always  included 
under  the  part  common  to  d  and  f  which  is  not  b,  or  else, 
during  the  whole   hour,  it  is  true  for  some  part  of  the 
board  that  all  b  is  both  c  and  e. 

III.  Either  a  and  d  are   non-existent  and  e  always 
covers  the  board,  or  else  it  is  always  covered  either  by  b 
or  by  c. 

What  may  be  inferred  (1)  about  the  relation  among 
a,  c,  e  and  f,  independent  of  b  and  d;  (2)  about  the  re 
lation  among  a,  c,  e,  independent  of  b,  d,  f  ? 

The  premises  are 

I.  (a  +  b  +  cd)n  +  (def  +  de  +  ef\v, 

II.  (d  +  e  +  ldf)n  +  (5  +  ce)ul 

III.  ade 


From  the  product  of  the  first  two  we  infer 

(ab  +  acd  +  ae  +  be  +  cde  +  a5df)n  +  (def  +  ade  +  aej) 
+  (al  +  led  +  ace  +  bce)ul  +  (tdef+  Me  + 


and  multiplying  this  proposition   by  the  third   premise 
according  to  the  preceding  rules,  we  get  as  an  inference 

(Me  +  acae)n  +  (abode  -\-  dbcde)ul  +  (bdef  +  abcle  +  abef)w 
+  (cdef+  acde  +  acef)lv,  +  (ale  +  ace  +  bce)ul  +  (cdef+  Me 
+  lcej)uv  +  {(ab  +  be)u+  (abc  +  ace  +  bee  +  alcdf)L}y, 

three  of  the  complex  elements  reducing  to  simple  ones 
according  to  the  formulae, 


G)uv. 
Dropping  b  and  d  from  the  above  proposition,  we  get 

(ae)n  +  (ae)ul  +  (ae  +  ef)w  +  (ace  +  cef)lv,  +  (ac  +  ce)ul 
+  (ce  +  cf)w  +  {(a  +  e)v  +  (ac  +  ce  +  cf)^}^ 


ON  A  NEW  ALGEBRA  OF  LOGIC.        95 

But  in  a  sum,  any  term  may  be  dropped  which  implies, 
or  is  included  under,  another  term. 

O)n  -<  («e)Bl     and     (ace  +  cef)lv,  -<  (ae  +  ef)w; 
therefore  the  above  reduces  to 

(ae)ul  +  (ae  +  ef)lv,  +  (ac  +  ce)ul  +  (ce  +  cf)m  +  {(a  +  e)L 
+  (ac  +  ce  +  cf)v}r, 

which  is  the  first  quaesitnm,  and  may  be  read  in  words 
"  either  it  is  always  true  that  some  e  is  not  a  ;  or  at  a 
particular  part  of  the  hour  all  a  is  e,  and  all  e  is  /;  or 
during  each  part  of  the  hour  some  c  is  either  a  or  e  ; 
or  at  some  part  of  the  hour  some  c  is  either/  or  not  e; 
or  during  each  part  of  the  hour  either  all  a  is  e,  or  the 
whole  blackboard  is  c  and  all  a  is  either  e  or/." 
Dropping  /  from  this  result,  we  get 

(a«)«i  +  («  +  e)lv,  +  (ac  +  ce)ul+(c)uv  +  {(a  +  e)n+  (c)L}y. 

But  (ac  +  ce)ul  -<  (c\v  and  {(a  +  e)n  +  (c>)^-<  (a  +  e)w 
(<?)„„,  therefore  we  get  as  the  second  qua3situm, 


+ 


which  means  "  either  it  is  always  true  that  some  e  is  not 
a  ;  or  during  some  particular  part  of  the  hour  all  a  is  e  ; 
or  there  is  sometimes  some  c."  In  like  manner  any 
other  set  of  terms  can  be  eliminated  by  dropping  them 
from  the  product  of  the  premises. 

Propositions  of  more  than  two  dimensions.  If  the 
universe  of  relation  be  supposed  to  consist  of  three  di 
mensions,  £7",  V9  W,  proceeding  just  as  before  we  should 
find  that  the  number  of  fundamental  propositions  with 
three  suffices, 

•^in  >  ^uio  F«a.>  Fuvw,  etc., 
is  twenty-six.   The  logic  of  such  propositions  is  a  "  hyper  " 


96  ON"  A   NEW   ALGEBRA    OF   LOGIC. 

logic,  somewhat  analogous  to  the  geometry  of  "hyper" 
space.  In  the  same  way  the  logic  of  a  universe  of  rela 
tion  of  four  or  more  dimensions  could  be  considered. 
The  rules  of  inference  would  be  exactly  similar  to  those 
already  given. 

Allusion  has  already  been  made  to  the  fact  that  the 
propositions  considered  in  this  and  the  preceding  section 
may  be  regarded  as  relative  terms.  In  the  first  section, 
the  two  fundamental  propositions,  Fl  and  Fu,  are  dual 
relatives.  Ft  means  "F  is  a  description  of  every  part  of 
U-,  "  and  Fu  means  "F  is  a  description  of  some  part 
of  £7."  Thus  Fl  and  Fu  correspond  to  the  two  funda 
mental  dual  relatives.  So  in  §  2,  Fn  is  a  triple  relative 
term,  meaning  11F  is  a  description  of  every  part  of  U 
during  every  part  of  V"  Thus  the  six  fundamental 
propositions  of  two  dimensions  correspond  exactly  to  the 
six  fundamental  varieties  of  triple  relatives,  and  so  on. 

§  3.    On   Certain   Other  Methods. 

The  propositions  A  and  0  in  Mr.  Peirce's  notation 
are,  respectively, 


Y, 
X^<  Y. 

Mr.  McColl  expresses  them  in  a  similar  way,  using  a 
different  symbol  for  the  copula.  Both  Mr.  McColl  and 
Mr.  Peirce  have  given  algebraic  methods  in  logic,  in 
which  the  terms  of  these  propositions  are  allowed  to 
remain  on  both  sides  of  the  copula. 

In  the  method  of  §  1  (of  which  §  2  is  an  extension), 
the  propositions  A  and  0  are  expressed  as  follows  :  — 

(X+  Y)19     equivalent  to     oo  -<  X  +  Y, 


ON    A.   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  97 

that  is,  all  the  terms  of  the  universal  proposition  are 
transposed  to  the  right  hand  side  of  the  copula,  while 
those  of  the  particular  proposition  are  transposed  to  the 
left-hand  side. 

If  these  propositions  be  expressed  in  the  reverse  way, 
namely,  — 


the  rules  of  inference  become  the  exact  logical  negatives 
of  those  in  §  1,  addition  taking  the  place  of  multiplica 
tion,  arid  vice  versa.  XY-<^  0  is  equivalent  to  (XY)0, 
meaning  "none  of  U  is  XY"  as  has  already  been  ex 
plained.  GO  ^<;  X  +  .Fmay  be  represented  by  (X+  Y)q, 
meaning  "  some  of  U  is  not  X  +  Y"  or  "  there  is  some 
thing  besides  X+  Y."  Thus  jP0  and  Fq  are  the  two 
fundamental  forms  of  proposition  in  this  method,  arid 
the  rules  of  inference  by  combination  are 


F0G0=(F+G\ 
F,Gq-<(F+G)< 


F+  G  = 


Fq+  GQ-<  (FG)q 
F0  +  G0  -<  (FG\. 


Elimination  is   performed  by  multiplying   together  the 
co-efficients  of  the  quantities  to  be  eliminated. 

Boole's  method,  as  simplified  by  Schroder,  lias  been 
extended  by  Miss  Ladd,  in  the  foregoing  paper,  so  as  to 
express  particular  propositions  without  the  use  of  Boole's 
objectionable  "  arbitrary "  class  symbol.  She  has  ex 
pressed  A  and  0  as  follows  :  — 

XY  V,     equivalent  to     XY  -<  0, 

XY\[,  "          "     XY^Q. 

Thus  F0  and  Fu  are  the  two  fundamental  forms  of  propo- 


98       ON  A  NEW  ALGEBKA  OF  LOGIC. 

sition   in  her  method,   and  the   rules   of   inference   ly 
combination  are 


FQGU-<(FG)U 

FuGu-<  oo. 

Elimination  from  F0   is  performed  by  multiplying  co 
efficients  ;  from  jPM,  by  adding  them. 

One  more  method  remains  to  be  noticed, —  the  negative 
of  Miss  Ladd's  method,  in  which  A  and  0  are  expressed 

as 

o>-<  X+  Y, 


and  where  F1  and  Fq  are  thus  the  two  fundamental  forms 
of  proposition.     The  rules  of  inference  ly  combination  are 

Fq+Qq=(FGT)q 

(F+G)q  FQ+G,-<(FG\ 


oo 


and  elimination  from  Fl  is  performed  by  addition  of  co 
efficients  ;  from  Fq,  by  multiplication  of  coefficients. 

§  4.  On  a  special  notation  for  De  Morgan's  Eight  Propo 
sitions,  with  an  extension  of  the  same  to  similar  propo 
sitions  of  three  or  more  terms. 

It  is  proposed  in  this  section  so  to  change  the  notation 
previously  given  for  De  Morgan's  eight  propositions  that 
the  elimination  of  the  middle  term  will  be  performed  by 
an  algebraic  multiplication  of  the  premises.  Denote  by 
J',  E',  0',  A  what  J,  E,  0,  A  become  when  each  term 
is  replaced  by  its  negative.  The  propositions  J,  E,  0,  A, 
and  their  complementaries  I',  E',  0',  A  have  already 
been  represented  (see  page  76)  respectively  by 


OK  A   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  99 


and  also,  since  Fl  —  FQ,  by 

(ab)u,  («5)o,  (a5)«,  (a&)0, 
Let  these  be  now  chaned  to 


where  the  negative  of  a  term  is  now  denoted  by  affecting 
it  with  the  exponent—  1,  and  the  negative  of  a  propo 
sition  is  denoted  in  the  same  way.  Thus 

(ab~l)  means  "  some  a  is  not  b" 
(ab-1)-1  "       "all  a  is  6,"  etc. 
With  this  notation  there  is  the  following  simple 

RULE  OP  INFERENCE.  Excluding  products  of  two  par 
ticulars,  the  conclusion  from  a  set  of  premises  is  their 
algebraic  product,  with  the  convention  that  the  appearance 
of  a  middle  term  in  the  result  indicates  that  there  is  no 
conclusion. 

Thus,  Barbara  is 

-1)-1  x  (sm-1)-1  -<  (sp-l)~\ 


and  Darii  is 

(mp~l)-lx  (sm)-<  (sp)-, 

but  from  A  and  0  as  premises  we  get 

(rap-1)"1  X  (sra-1)  -<  oo, 

the  middle  term  not  disappearing  from  the  product. 

From  the  nature  of  this  notation,  just  as  with  that  of 
§  1,  the  order  in  which  the  two  terms  of  a  proposition  are 
written  is  indifferent,  and  consequently  the  figure  of  a 
syllogism  -is  indifferent.  Thus,  (mp)  is  the  same  as 
(pm).  Thus  Celarent  and  Cesar  e  are 

(mp)~l  x  (sm-1)-1  -<  (sp)~\ 
Darii  and  Datisi  are 

(mp-l)~l  X  (sm)  -<  (sp). 


100 


ON   A   NEW   ALGEBRA    OF    LOGIC. 


Ferio,  Festino,  Ferison,  and  Fresison  are 
(mp)-1  X  (sm)  -<  (sp-1). 
Camestres  and  Camenes  are 
-1  X 


Baroko  is 


(pm~l)-}  X 


1  -<  (sp)-\ 
-<  (sp-1. 


Bokardo  is 


Disamis  and  Dimaris  are 

X  (ras"1)"1  -<  (sp). 

X  (ms-1)-1  -<  (sp-1). 

This  rule  of  inference  is  seen  to  accord  with  the  now- 
recognized  invalidity  of  the  moods  Darapti,  Felapton,  and 
Fesapo.  Thus  the  premises  of  Darapti  are 


(mp~l)~l  x 

from  the  product  of  which  m  does  not  disappear,  and 
there  is  therefore,  according  to  the  rule,  no  inference. 
The  same  is  true  for  Felapton  and  Fesapo.  The  premi 
ses  of  Bramantip  are 

(pm~1)-1  X  (ms~l)~l,  which  -<  (s"1^)"1. 

The  following  Table  gives  all  the  valid  moods  from 
De  Morgan's  eight  propositions  :  — 

-lm^)  (prn) 


(sm)'1 
(sm-1) 
(s-%) 


(sm) 


(sp) 


(9) 


to) 


ON   A   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  101 

There  are  twenty-four  valid  moods,  but  if  no  distinction 
be  made  between  s  and  p,  these  reduce  to  the  twelve  in 
either  half  of  the  Table,  the  Table  dividing  itself  sym 
metrically  along  the  diagonal  from  left  down  to  right. 
The  unsymmetry  of  the  Aristotelian  system  is  seen  from 
the  fact  that  the  fifteen  valid  moods  of  the  Aristotelian 
system  comprise  only  eight  out  of  the  twenty-four  of  the 
Table,  and  these  eight  select  themselves  very  unsym- 
metrically,  being  those  underscored  by  dotted  lines. 
From  the  three  formulae 


~l  -<  (sp)-\ 
(sm)  X  (pm)-1  -<  (sp~l), 
(sm)~l  X  (pm)  -<  (s-», 

the  whole  twenty-four  syllogisms  of  the  Table  may  be 
obtained  by  substituting  for  m,  s,  and  p  their  negatives 
in  all  possible  ways,  each  formula  yielding  eight. 

Mr.  Hugh  McColl,  in  his  papers  on  logic  in  the  "  Pro 
ceedings  of  the  London  Mathematical  Society  "  (Vol.  IX, 
et.  seq.),  has  been  using  a  notation  for  the  copula  identi 
cal  in  meaning  with  that  of  Mr.  Peirce.  He  uses  a  colon 
to  denote  implication,  instead  of  -<.  Mr.  Peirce  has 
recently  told  me  that  Mr.  McColl  justifies  his  use  of  the 
colon  by  its  mathematical  meaning  as  a  sign  of  division. 
Thus  Barbara  and  Celarent  are 

m  :  p  m  :  p 

s    :  m  s    :  m 

.'.  s    :p  /.  s   :p, 

and  the  analogy  to  division  is  obvious.    But  this  analogy 


102  ON   A   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 

exists  only  in  the  two  universal  moods  of  the  first  figure. 
Thus  Cesare  and  Festino  are 

p  :  m  p  :  m 

s:m  s  -7-  m 

.-.  s  :p  s+p, 

where  -f-  is  the  negative  copula,  and  the  analogy  to 
division  is  wanting.  In  the  notation  of  this  section  the 
analogy  of  the  premises  to  ratios,  and  of  the  conclusion 
to  their  product  is  more  nearly  complete. 

Extension  of  the  preceding. 

Let     (abc)  denote  "  a,  b,  c  have  something  in  common," 

and     (abc)~l    "         a,  b,  c     "     nothing       "         " 

By  substituting  for  a,  5,  c  their  negatives  in  all  possible 
ways,  we  get  sixteen  propositions  concerning  three  terms, 
thus  seen  to  be  analogous  to  De  Morgan's  eight  concern 
ing  two  terms.  In  the  same  way  we  may  get  thirty-two 
propositions  concerning  four  terms,  and  2.2n  propositions 
concerning  n  terms.  The  formulas  of  inference  from 
propositions  like  the  above  are 

(ab...ffh...t)  (h...lm...q)~l-<  (ab...g)  (m...q)~\ 
(ab Id)  (l-lm q)~l-<  (ab km...q)~l. 

In  the  first,  where  one  premise  is  particular,  inference 
can  take  place  independently  of  any  number  of  middle 
terms,  provided  each  term  is  positive  in  both  premises, 
or  negative  in  both.  In  the  second  formula,  when  both 
premises  are  universal,  inference  can  take  place  inde 
pendently  of  only  one  middle  term,  and  this  must  be  of 
different  quality  in  the  two  premises.  By  an  obvious  sub 
stitution  these  two  formulae  are  reduced  to  the  formulae 


ON   A   NEW  ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  103 

previously  given  involving  only  two  terms  in  each  pre 
mise.     Thus 


(r1*)-1  -<  (a*)-1. 

That  is,  the  premises  of  the  first  mean  "  that  which  is 
common  (x)  to  a,  5,  ...#,  has  something  in  common 
with  the  common  part  (#)  of  A, . . .  Z ;  "  and  "  the  common 
part  (j/)  of  h, . . .  I  has  nothing  in  common  with  m, . . .  q" 
Whence  the  inference  is  (xy~l),  or  (ab  . .  .g)  (m. . .  q)~l. 
The  premises  of  the  second  mean  "  whatever  may  be 
common  (x)  to  «,  b, ...  Jc,  has  nothing  in  common  with 
Z;  "  and  "  whatever  may  be  common  (z)  to  m, . . .  q,  has 
nothing  in  common  with  non-Z."  Whence  the  inference 
is  (xz)~l,  or  (ab  . . .  km  . . .  q)~\ 

(abc)  means  (ab)  (ac)  (be), 
/.   (abc)'1    "       (ab)-1  +  (ac)-1  +  (bc)~\ 

Thus  any  one  of  these  propositions  is  reducible  to  a 
function  of  De  Morgan's  eight. 

§  5.   Note  on  De  Morgan's  Twenty  Propositions.1 

It  is  proposed  in  this  section  to  consider  a  simple 
method  of  deriving  and  writing  De  Morgan's  Twenty 
Propositions.  Let  A  =  all  of  A,  a  —  part  of  A,  A  =  all 
of  non-J.,  and  d  =  part  of  non-J.,  where  part  of  is  under 
stood  to  mean  less  than  the  whole  of.  Let  a  second  term 
B  be  modified  in  the  same  way.  Then,  by  affirming 
and  denying  identity  between  each  modification  of  the 
first  term  and  each  modification  of  the  second,  we  get 
thirty-two  propositions,  of  which,  however,  twelve  are 
duplicates.  That  is,  the  process  yields  twenty  distinct 

1  See  his  "Syllabus  of  Logic,"  §§  24-62. 


104 


ON  A   NEW  ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC. 


propositions,  and  they  are  easily  seen  to  be  the  twenty 
of  De  Morgan.  Let  the  affirmation  of  identity  between 
two  terms  be  denoted  by  their  juxtaposition,  and  let  the 
denial  of  the  same  be  denoted  by  a  line  extending  over 
both  terms.  Then  we  have  the  following 

TABLE  OF  DE  MORGAN'S  TWENTY  PROPOSITIONS. 


AB,  or  AB 

AB,  or  AB 

AB,  or  AB 

AB,  or  AB 

Ab,     "   aB 

Ab,     «   aB 

~Ab,     "   ^§ 

Ab,     "    aB 

aB,    "    Jb 

aB,    "   AB 

aB,    "   Tb 

~OB,    "  A5 

ab 

ab 

ab 

~ab 

al 

al 

db 

a5 

Thus,  AB  means  "  the  whole  of  A  is  identical  with  the 
whole  of  j£."  It  is  obvious  that  AB  is  equivalent  in 
meaning  to  AB.  The  second  proposition,  Ab,  means 
"  the  whole  of  A  is  identical  with  a  part  of  B"  (that  is, 
all_  A  is  B,  and  some  B  is  not  A).  It  is  clear  that 
aB,  or  "  a  part  of  non-A  is  identical  with  the  whole  of 
non-,5,"  is  the  same  as  Ab.  To  take  an  example  from 
the  other  side  of  the  Table,  AB  means  "  it  is  not  true 
that  the  whole  of  A  is  identical  with  the  whole  of  B." 
This  is  simply  the  denial  of  the  proposition  AB.  Ab 
means  "  it  is  riot  true  that  the  whole  of  A  is  identical 
with  a  part  of  5,"  a  simple  denial  of  Al. 

The  propositions  below  the  horizontal  line  of  division, 
which  are  differentiated  from  those  above  the  line  by 
containing  only  small  letters  in  their  symbols,  are  De 
Morgan's  eight  "  simple  "  propositions. 


ON   A   NEW   ALGEBRA   OF   LOGIC.  105 

(A  part  of  A  is  a  part  of  B  }  £ 

~  (Some  A  is  B  > 

—       (  It  is  not  true  that  a  part  of  A  is  a  part  of  B  \  ™ 

~~  I  ~vr      A  '      7?  i 

-  _  (  A  part  of  A  is  a  part  of  non-B  )  Q 

\  Some  A  is  not  B  ) 

-Y       (  It  is  not  true  that  a  part  of  A  is  a  part  of  non-B  )       , 
=  lAll.iis2?  >' 

The  remaining  four  of  these  eight  are  derived  from  these 
four  by  the  negation  of  their  terms.  This  notation  for 
the  eight  propositions  differs  only  slightly  from  that 
employed  in  previous  sections. 

De  Morgan  derived  his  eight  "  simple "  propositions 
by  applying  the  Aristotelian  forms  A,E,I,  0  to  the  four 
pairs  of  terms  X,  Y\  X,Y\  X,Y;  X,  Y.  This  process 
gives  sixteen  propositions,  of  which  eight  are  duplicates. 
The  other  twelve  of  the  twenty  he  called  "complex," 
because  they  are  compounded  of  the  eight  simple  propo 
sitions,  as  follows :  — 


~al)Xtib  AB  =  al  +  ab 

Ab   —  aft  X  ab  Ab   —  ab  +  ab 

aB  =  aL  X  ab  a,B  =  aB  +  ab 

~AB  —  d6  X  ab  AB  =  at  +  ab 

~Ab   —  ~ab  X  ab  Ab  =  ab  +  ab 

aB  =  ab  X  ab  ~aH  =  at  +  ab 

The  following  Table  gives  the  conclusions  from  one 
hundred  out  of  the  possible  four  hundred  combinations 
of  two  premises  from  this  system  of  twenty  propositions : 


106  ON  A  NEW   ALGEBEA   OF   LOGIC. 

PM  Pm   pM  pm  pm  PM  Pm   pM  pm  pm 


SM 

Sm 
sM 
sm 
sm 
SM 
S^ 
^M 
sm 
sm 

SP 

sP 

Sp 

sp 

sp 

SP 

sP 

Sp 

sp 

sp 

Sp 

sp 

Sp 

0 

sp 

0 

0 

0 

Sp 

sp 

sP 

sP 

sp 

sp 

0 

0 

0 

0 

sp 

sP 

sp 

0 

sp 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

sp 

0 

sp 

sp 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

sp 

SP 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

o 

Sp 
7P 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

o 

o 

0 

0 

o 

0 

o 

0 

0 

0 

o 

0 

0 

sp 

sP 

sp 

sp 

0 

0 

o 

o 

0 

sp 

w 

sp 

Sp 

0 

sp 

0 

0 

0 

sp 

0 

By  applying  the  sign  of  negation  first  to  the  S,  then  to 
the  P,  then  to  both  the  S  and  the  P,  the  remaining  three 
hundred  are  obtained.  According  to  De  Morgan,  who 
postulates  that  every  term  and  its  negative  is  greater 
than  zero,  there  are  two  conclusions  not  given  in  the 
Table,  namely :  — 

sm  X  pin  -<  sp, 

sm  X  pm  -<  sp, 

and  from  these  are  obtained  six  others  by  applying  the 
sign  of  negation  to  s  and  p.  But  according  to  the 
definitions  of  Mr.  Peirce  and  others,  already  alluded  to, 
these  are  invalid  conclusions ;  since,  being  particular, 
they  imply  the  existence  of  their  subjects,  while  the 
universal  premises  do  not. 


OPERATIONS  IN  RELATIVE  NUMBER  WITH 
APPLICATIONS  TO  THE  THEORY  OF  PROBA 
BILITIES. 


BY  B.  I.  OILMAN. 


THE  purpose  of  this  Paper  is  to  deduce  the  formulae 
for  the  addition  and  multiplication  of  Relative  Number, 
and  to  apply  them  in  demonstrating  the  well-known 
fundamental  theorems  of  Probabilities,  according  to  Mr. 
Peirce's  method  of  dealing  with  the  subject. 

If  a  relation  be  that  which  we  perceive  when  a  group 
of  objects  are  viewed  together,  but  which  we  do  not 
perceive  when  we  regard  each  separately,  then  any  act 
of  comparison  will  bring  to  view  a  relation.  If  the 
objects  compared  are  two  in  number,  the  relation  may 
be  called  a  dual  one. 

Such  a  dual  relation  may  be  viewed  in  two  lights,  or 
we  may  say  it  splits  into  two  elementary  forms,  accord 
ing  as  one  or  the  other  object  is  our  starting-point  in 
comparing  the  couple.  The  two  are  called  the  direct 
relation  and  its  converse.  Thus,  what  is  ordinarily 
termed  a  relation  may  be  said  to  have  ends,  being  based 
on  a  comparison  having  a  direction.  One  of  these  ends 
is  called  the  relate,  the  other  the  correlate. 

A  relative  number  is  a  number  obtained  in  either  of 
the  two  following  ways :  first,  by  dividing  the  number 


108  OPERATIONS   IN  EELATIYE  NUMBER. 

of  instances  in  which  a  given  relation  has  a  relate  in  a 
certain  class  of  objects  by  the  number  of  objects  in  the 
class ;  or,  second,  by  dividing  the  number  of  instances 
in  which  a  given  relation  has  a  correlate  in  the  given 
class  by  the  number  of  objects  in  the  class.  Hence,  for 
a  given  relation  p'  we  have  two  such  relative  or  aver 
age  numbers,  —  one,  the  number  of  instances  in  which 
p'  has  a  relate  of  the  class  ?/,  divided  by  the  number 
of  ?/'s  ;  and  the  other,  the  average  number  per  y  of  p' 
whose  correlates  are  ?/'s.  The  former  might  be  called 
the  relate-number  of  p',  the  latter  its  correlate-number. 
But  if  we  extend  the  class  y  to  include  all  the  objects 
in  the  universe,  since  the  number  of  instances  in  which 
the  relation  p'  occurs  having  a  relate  which  is  an  object 
in  the  universe,  is  equal  to  the  total  number  of  times 
p'  occurs  at  all,  and  the  same  thing  is  true  of  the  number 
of  occurrences  in  which  it  has  a  correlate  which  is  in  the 
universe :  it  follows  that  for  both  relate  and  correlate 
numbers  we  get  the  average  number  of  relations  p'  per 
object  in  the  universe.  That  is,  any  relation  p'  has  but 
one  (what  we  shall  call)  general  relative  number. 

Denoting  each  object  in  the  universe  by  a  certain 
letter,  each  possible  different  couple  of  objects  (con 
sidering  those  couples  as  different  in  which  the  same 
elements  occur  in  a  different  order)  will  be  symbolized 
once,  and  only  once,  in  Mr.  Peirce's  scheme  of  pairs, 
as  follows:  — 

A:A  A:B  A:C  A:D  ... 

B:A  B:B  B:C  B:D  ... 

C:A  C:B  C:C  C:D  ... 

D:A  D:B  D:C  D:D 


OPERATIONS    IN   RELATIVE    NUMBER,  109 

Now  if  in  this  scheme  of  pairs  we  assume  the  relation- 
direction  to  be  constant,  say  from  left  to  right,  —  that 
is,  that  the  right-hand  members  of  the  pairs  are  the  cor 
relates, —  it  will  follow  that  any  single  instance  of  any 
relation  must  subsist  between  some  one,  and  only  one, 
of  the  pairs.  Marking  in  any  way,  as  by  a  circum 
scribed  circle,  those  pairs  between  the  components  of 
which  subsists  the  relation  p' ;  and  marking  by  a  circum 
scribed  square  instances  of  the  relation  p", —  we  shall 
have  in  general  some  pairs  surrounded  by  circles,  some 
by  squares,  and  some  by  both. 

Whence  if  p'  and  p"  denote  respectively  the  number 
of  individual  relations  comprised  in  the  general  relations 
p'  and  p",  we  shall  have 

p'  -f  p"  =  number  of  pairs  surrounded  by  circle  alone  +  num 
ber  of  pairs  surrounded  by  square  alone  +  twice 
the  number  of  pairs  surrounded  by  both  circle  and 
square  =  p',p"  +  P",p'  + 2  p',  P" 

in  which  p',  p"  denotes  the  number  of  pairs  concerning 
each  of  which  it  can  be  said  that  it  is  in  both  the  rela 
tions  p'  and  p"  ;  and  p',  p"  denotes  the  number  of  pairs 
which  arc  .  at  once  in  the  relation  p1  and  not  in  the 
relation  p".  Again, 

p'  -f  p"  =  number  of  pairs  in  circle,  or  square,  or  both  +  num 
ber  in  both  =  (p1  -I-  p")  +  p1,  p", 

in  which— according  to  Mr.  Jevons's  notation — (p1  -|-p") 
denotes  that  class  of  pairs  concerning  each  member  of 
which  it  can  be  said  that  it  is  either  an  instance  of  p'  or 
of  p"  or  of  both.  Now,  since  a  general  relative  number 
is  the  total  number  of  individual  instances  of  a  relation, 
divided  by  the  number  of  objects  in  the  universe,  if  we 
indicate  the  number  of  objects  in  the  universe  by  oo, 
-^  will  indicate  the  general  relative  number  of  the  rela- 


110  OPERATIONS    IN  RELATIVE   NUMBER. 


tion  pr.     Symbolizing  this  quotient  by  [y  ]  ,  and  dividing 
both  sides  of  the  above  equations  by  oo,  we  have 


[p'  ]  +  [P"]  =  IP',  P"-]  +  [A  p']  +  2  |y,  p"]  =  [y  .,.  p'/]  +  [y,  p"]. 

We  thus  have  reached  two  formulae  for  the  addition 
of  two  relative  numbers.  Similarly,  we  have  for  the 
addition  of  three  relative  numbers 


0']  +  [P"]  +  [>'"]  -  CP',  ?',  P'"]  +  [P",  P',  P'"]  +  [P'",  P',P"] 
+  2  [P',  p",  p"']  +  2  |y  ,  p'",  p//]  +  2  [p'/,  p'",  p/] 


or 

-  [p'  •!•  P"  -i-  P/;/]  +  CP',  P",  P'"]  +  iy,  p"f,  P"] 

+  [p^P//',P/]  +  2[P',p^^/], 

Similar  formulae  may  be  deduced  for  the  addition  of  n 
relative  numbers,  as  follows  :  — 


Pn-2]) 
Pre-3]) 


or 

=  [p'-|-p"-|Y"     -  ...      .j.p»] 

+  LP>p">p"'  •••?"]+...+  [p""1^*??  •   •   •  p'l~2] 


This  latter  formula  gives,  when  the  relations  are 
mutually  incompatible,  —  that  is,  when  no  two  of  them 
can  subsist  between  the  same  pair,  —  a  much  simpler 
result  :  — 


CP;]  +  [P"]  +  .  .  .  +  [p"]  =  [p'  .|.p".|.p'"  .  . 
all  the  other  terms  reducing  to  zero. 


OPERATIONS   IN   RELATIVE   NUMBER.  Ill 

To  obtain  a  formula  for  the  multiplication  of  relative, 
numbers  we  notice  that 


Let  x,  which  may  be  any  number,  signify  the  number 
of  different  existing  groups  of  three  objects,  such  that 
the  first  is  to  the  second  in  the  relation  p'  and  the  second 
to  the  third  in  the  relation  p".  Such  a  group  may  be 
called  a  relative  sequence,  and  may  be  denoted  by  prp" 
without  the  comma.  Then 


If  now 

the  formula  becomes 


In  this  case,  therefore,  the  product  of  the  relative 
numbers  of  the  two  given  relations  equals  the  relative 
number  of  the  sequence  formed  from  them. 

Multiplying  numerator  and  denominator  of  —  by  the 

00         * 

number  of  objects   in  the  universe,  it  becomes  p  X2°°. 

The  numerator  of  this  fraction  is  a  number  equal  to  the 
number  of  different  triplets  obtained  by  combining  each 
p'  with  every  object  in  the  universe.  Between  the  second 
and  third  members  of  these  triplets  either  the  relation 
p'  or  p1  must  hold ;  and  no  relative  sequence  of  the  form 
p'p"  or  p'pn  can  exist  which  does  not  appear  among  them. 
Hence  the  number  p'  x  oo  equals  the  sum  of  the  num 
bers  of  p'p"  and  p'p".  The  denominator  being  the  square 
of  the  number  of  objects  in  the  universe  is  equal  to  the 


112  OPERATIONS    IN   RELATIVE    NUMBER. 

number  of  possible  pairs,  and  each   of  these  is  either 
pn  or  p 


00 
and 


or 

I 

P" 


P'P"  _  P'P" 


That  is,  the  average  number  of  sequences  pfpn  per 
each  p"  is  the  same  as  the  average  number  of  sequences 
p'pn  per  each  p'f.  Hence,  whether  the  relations  in  which 
any  given  individual  stands  to  the  others  in  the  uni 
verse  are  all  p",  or  one  or  more  p"  and  the  rest  pn,  will 
make  no  difference  on  the  average  in  the  number  of 
relative  sequences  whose  first  member  is  p'  of  which  it 
is  the  intermediary.  The  number  of  such  sequences  in 
the  case  of  any  individual  being  the  number  of  the  ob 
jects  standing  to  it  in  the  relation  p'  multiplied  by  the 
number  of  objects  in  the  universe,  it  follows  that  the 
number  of  objects  standing  to  any  given  individual  in 
the  relation  p'  is  not  affected  by  the  circumstance  of  its 
being  p"  to  one  or  more  objects. 

P'P"       P'  j.  P'P"      P"      i 

Similarly,  from  ^-  =  —  we  may  get  *--~-  =  — ,  whence 

eZ  =  p'p"  +  pp'  or  ^  =  ££  ;  that  is,  whether  an  object 
P  p+p  P          p' 

is  correlate  in  any  relations  p'  or  not,  will  make  no 
difference  on  the  average  in  the  number  of  p"s  of  which 
it  is  the  relate. 

For  instance,  letting  p'  indicate  the  relation  borrower 
from,  and  p"  the  relation  trustee  of,  this  condition  ex 
presses,  first,  the  fact  that  a  man's  being  a  trustee  makes 
no  difference  on  the  average  in  the  number  of  borrowers 


OPERATIONS    IN"   RELATIVE    NUMBER.  113 

from  him  ;  and,  second,  that  a  man's  being  a  lender  or 
not  makes  no  difference  on  the  average  in  the  number 
of  funds  which  he  controls  as  trustee.  Such  relations, 
from  one  of  which  nothing  can  be  inferred  regarding 
the  presence  of  the  other,  are  called  independent  re 
lations.  Hence  for  independent  relations, 

!>']  x 


The  expression  p'p"  here  denoting  the  number  of 
relative  sequences  of  that  form,  if  we  define  a  compound 
relation  to  be  a  combination  of  such  relative  sequences 
as  have  the  same  individual  object  as  relate,  ',  and  also 
the  same  individual  object  as  correlate,  f/,  we  shall  have 
each  compound  relation  consisting  of  as  many  sequences 
as  it  has  intermediary  objects.  Hence,  in  order  to  ex 
press  the  number  of  p'p'f$  in  terms  of  compound  relations 
of  that  form,  to  the  total  number  of  compound  rela 
tions  we  shall  have  to  add  the  number  of  those  which 
have  two  intermediaries,  since  they  each  contribute  an 
extra  sequence  ;  and  to  this  sum  we  must  further  add 
twice  the  number  of  compound  relations  having  three  in 
termediaries,  three  times  those  having  four,  etc.  Hence 
we  have  for  the  number  of  relative  sequences  expressed 
in  terms  of  compound  relations, 


2 


=  P'P"  +  P'P"  +  2  P'P"  +  ...(n-l)  P'P 


o^ 

wherein  P'P"  denotes  the  total  number  of  compound 
relations  of  the  form  p'p'1  having  whatever  number  of 
intermediaries;  P'P"  denotes  the  number  of  such  com 
pound  relations  having  two  intermediaries,  etc.  Whence, 
dividing  through  by  oo,  we  have 

...  (n  - 


114  OPERATIONS    IN   RELATIVE   NUMBER. 

and  the  following  formula  results  for  the  multiplication 
of  independent  relative  numbers  :  — 

-  2  3 

CP']  [P"]  =  [^P"j  +  \_PiP"-]  +  2  [P'P//]  .  . .  (n  -  1)  [PP"]. 
By  a  somewhat  different  and  a  longer  process  of  proof, 
it  can  be  shown  that  for  independent  relations  the  follow 
ing  formula  holds  for  the  multiplication  of  n  relative 
numbers  :  — 


3 

2[P'  .  .  . 


Here  it  is  to  be  noted  that  the  superscribed  numbers  do 
not  refer  to  the  number  of  intermediaries,  but  to  the  de 
gree  of  connection,  the  number  of  ways  in  which  relate  ' 
and  correlate  n  are  connected  by  chains  of  relation. 

The  continued  product  of  the  numbers  indicating  the 
simultaneous  intermediaries  at  the  successive  steps,  it 
is  easily  seen,  cannot  be  less  than  r  nor  greater  than 
r(n~l\  when  the  connection  in  the  given  relation  is  an 
r-fold  one.  Since  permuting  the  multipliers  does  not 
change  the  left-hand  member,  the  right-hand  member 
remains  constant  in  whatever  order  the  elementary  rela 
tives  are  compounded. 

Through  the  addition  formula  we  have  reached  what 
we  may  call  polynomial  relative  numbers,  of  the  form 
[p!  -I-  p"  -I  .....  |.  pM]  which  expresses  the  relative  number 
of  that  class  of  pairs,  each  one  of  which  is  an  instance 
of  some  one  or  more  of  the  relations  p'.  .  .  pn.  In  the 
case  of  incompatible  relations  we  have  the  equation 

[p'-lV'-l  .....  |-PB] 


Whence  the  multiplication  of  polynomial  relative  num 
bers  reduces  in  the  case  of  incompatible  relations  to  that 
of  monomials. 


OPERATIONS   IN   RELATIVE    NUMBER.  115 

The  involution  of  a  monomial  relative  number  gives 
the  ordinary  result  of  multiplication,  except  that  all  the 
elements  of  the  resulting  compound  relation  are  the 
same.  If  we  involve  an  incompatible  polynomial,  we 
shall  get  a  result  according  to  the  multinomial  theorem, 
consisting  of  monomial  powers  and  products. 

In  order  to  apply  these  results  to  the  theory  of  proba 
bilities,  we  shall  require  to  make  a  supposition  in  regard 
to  the  character  of  the  relations  we  are  to  consider.  If 
a  relation  is  perceived  whenever  we  compare  objects,  it 
follows  that  a  relation  will  be  noticed  when  we  think 
of  an  object  as  existing  at  successive  times;  for  this 
involves  a  comparison  between  its  aspect  at  one  time 
and  at  another. 

This  relation  between  objects  which  differ,  so  far  as 
we  see,  only  in  existing  at  different  times,  we  call  iden 
tity.  The  pairs  in  the  principal  diagonal  of  the  relative 
scheme  exist  in  this  relation  only,  since  what  we  call  the 
same  or  an  identical  object  is  both  correlate  and  relate. 

The  relative  number  of  the  relation  of  identity  is  evi 
dently  unity,  since  it  occurs  once,  and  no  more,  for  every 
individual  in  the  universe.  Now  we  can,  if  we  please, 
agree  to  bring  the  various  individual  relations,  —  that  is, 
relations  subsisting  between  individual  objects,  —  which 
together  make  up  the  total  extension  of  the  general  re 
lation  identity,  into  various  classes  according  to  the 
character  of  the  objects  they  identify.  This  will  create 
as  many  kinds  of  relation  of  identity  as  there  are  classes 
of  objects  in  the  universe,  and  their  relative  numbers  will 
vary  from  -  up  to  unity,  and  will  express  the  propor 
tion  of  objects  of  the  different  kinds  in  the  universe. 

Further,  we  may  agree  to  take  for  the  divisor  of  our 
relative  number,  for  our  y,  instead  of  all  the  objects  in 
the  universe,  some  limited  portion  of  them,  say  the  class 


116  OPERATIONS   IN    RELATIVE    NUMBER. 

b.  This  will  be  a  return  to  the  special  relative  number 
mentioned  at  the  beginning  of  the  paper ;  but  it  is  evi 
dent  that  since  the  relation  whose  relative  number  we 
seek  is  a  relation  of  identity,  every  instance  of  it  which 
has  its  relate  in  the  class  b  will  also  have  its  correlate 
in  that  class,  and  vice  versa;  so  that  the  relate  and  cor 
relate  number  of  the  relation  will  be  the  same,  and  may 
be  called  simply  its  relative  number.  Such  a  relative 
number  will  mean  the  number  of  identity  relations  of 
the  form  a  to  be  found  among  the  relations  pertaining 
to  the  individuals  of  the  class  b  divided  by  the  number 
of  those  individuals;  that. is,  the  number  of  a's  among 
the  6's,  divided  by  the  number  of  &'s,  or,  in  other  words, 
the  proportion  of  the  genus  b  that  is  of  the  species  a. 
If  we  regard  events  as  the  objects  between  which  the 
relations  we  are  considering  subsist,  an  identical  relative 
number  will  express  the  proportion  in  which  a  certain 
species  of  event  exists  in  a  genus.  With  this  ratio  will 
vary  the  expectation  with  which  we  shall  look  to  see  a 
case  of  the  genus  a  case  also  of  the  species ;  it  may  be 
said  to  measure  the  value  of  the  genus  as  a  proof  of  the 
species,  —  to  measure,  that  is,  the  prove-ability,  or  proba 
bility,  of  the  species  from  the  standpoint  of  the  genus. 

On  this  view  of  probability  it  has  to  do,  not  with 
individual  events,  but  with  classes  of  events ;  and  not 
with  one  class,  but  with  a  pair  of  classes,  —  the  one 
containing,  the  other  contained.  The  latter  being  the 
one  with  which  we  are  principally  concerned,  we  speak, 
by  an  ellipsis,  of  its  probability  without  mentioning  the 
containing  class;  but  in  reality  probability  is  a  ratio, 
and  to  define  it  we  must  have  both  correlates  given. 

An  identical  relative  number,  then,  when  the  identities 
considered  are  events,  will  be  the  ratio  of  a  specific  to  a 
generic  occurrence ;  and  this  ratio  is  called  the  proba- 


OPERATIONS   IN  RELATIVE   NUMBER.  117 

bility  of  the  species  with  respect  to  the  genus.  The 
mathematical  combination  of  probabilities  will  therefore 
take  place  in  accordance  with  the  formula  for  relative 
number  already  reached,  with  such  modifications  as  re 
sult  from  their  application  to  relations  of  identity. 

In  establishing  by  these  formula  the  fundamental  the 
orems  of  probabilities,  let  the  individuals  in  the  uni 
verse  we  are  considering  be  events ;  and  let  a  denote  a 
certain  kind  of  relation  of  identity  between  them,  —  that 
is,  a  certain  class  of  events,  —  and  a  the  remaining  rela 
tions  of  identity,  that  is,  all  the  rest  of  the  events  in  the 
universe.  The  general  relative  numbers  of  a  and  a  — 
that  is,  the  general  probabilities  of  a  and  a  in  the  uni 
verse  —  will  be  denoted  by  [a]  and  [#]. 

From  the  addition  formula  we  have 

[>]  +  [«]  =  [a.j.a]  +  [>,«]• 

The  first  term  of  the  right-hand  member  is  the  relative 
number  of  that  class  of  pairs,  each  of  which  exhibits 
either  or  both  of  the  relations  a  and  a  ;  and  the  second 
term  of  the  right-hand  member  is  the  relative  number 
of  that  class  of  pairs,  each  of  which  exhibits  both  the 
relations  a  and  a.  But  since  by  definition  a  is  a  part 
and  a  the  rest  of  the  existing  relations  of  identity,  no 
event  exhibits  them  both,  and  [a  ,a]  —  0  ;  while  the  num 
ber  of  relations  a  .|.  a  equals  oo,  and  hence  [a  .\.  a]  =  1. 
Thus  we  have 

M +  [«]=! 

[5]  =!-[>]  (1) 

or,  the  probability  of  the  negative  of  an  event  equals 
unity  minus  the  probability  of  the  event. 

The  relations  a  and  a  are  incompatible  relations  ;  that 
is,  they  cannot  subsist  at  once  between  the  same  pair. 

Incompatibility  means,  therefore,  in  the  case  of  rela- 


118  OPERATIONS   IN  RELATIVE   NUMBER. 

tions  of  identity  between  events,  that  no  one  event  can 
be  of  both  species  ;  the  species  are  mutually  exclusive, 
-  the  events,  as  we  say,  cannot  happen  together.  Such 
events  may  be  called  exclusives,  and  we  may  denote 
by  the  term  alternatives  specific  events  which  together 
make  up  a  genus;  that  is,  exclusives  one  or  other  of 
which  must  happen  if  the  generic  event  happen  at  all. 
The  generic  event  consisting  of  the  occurrence  of  any 
one  of  a  number  of  exclusives  may  be  called  an  alter 
nating  event. 

The  abridged  form  of  the  addition  formula,  when  the 
relations  are  incompatible,  gives  the  following  as  the 
probability  of  an  alternating  event :  — 

[> -I-  *  -I-  <H I- "]  =  M  +  p]  +  [c]  +  .  . .  +  W    (2) 

That  is,  the  probability  of  an  alternating  event  is  equal 
to  the  sum  of  the  probabilities  of  the  exclusives  of  which 
it  is  composed. 

The  expression  a , b  ,c , cl . . .  n  denotes  an  event  which  is 
at  once  a, 5,0,  note?...  and  not  n\  and  [a,b,c,d. .  .n~\ 
denotes  the  probability  of  such  a  compound  event.  If  we 
have  certain  events  of  known  probability,  a,b,c  .  .  .  n 
which  are  not  exclusives,  and  wish  to  obtain  the  proba 
bility  of  the  occurrence  of  some  one,  and  only  one,  of 
them,  the  desired  expression  reduces  to  a  sum  of  such 
compound  probabilities.  For  the  event  in  question  will 
be  either  (a, 5,  .  .  .  w,w),  or  (a, 6  .  .  .  m,w),  etc., 
or  (a, 5  .  .  .  m,ri)  ;  and  these  compounds  being  mutu 
ally  exclusive,  the  event  is  an  alternating  one,  and  its 
probability  is  expressed  as  follows  :  — 

[a,5  .  .  .  n.\.a,b  .  .  .  n.\.  .  ..\.a  .  .  .  m,n~\  = 

[a,l  .  .  .  n]  +  \_a,b  .  .  .  ri]  +  .  .  .  +  [a  .  .  .  m,w] 

This  result  being  in  terms  of  the  probability  of  compound 


OPERATIONS   IN   RELATIVE   NUMBER.  119 

events,  to  make  it  available  we  must  have  means  of  cal 
culating  compound  probabilities  from  simple  ones. 

The  formula  obtained  above  for  multiplying  relative 
numbers  expresses  the  result  of  such  a  multiplication  in 
terms  of  the  relative  numbers  of  compound  relations. 
In  the  case  of  identical  relations,  these  would  be  com 
pound  relations  of  identity.  But  since  no  object  or 
event  is  in  the  relation  of  identity  to  more  than  one  ob 
ject  or  event,  —  that  is,  itself,  —  each  compound  relation 
of  identity  must  consist  of  a  single  relative  sequence; 
accordingly  all  the  terms  after  the  first  in  the  right-hand 
member  of  the  multiplication  formula  disappear,  the  re 
maining  term  being  the  relative  number  of  a  relation 
of  identity  compounded  of  all  the  multiplied  factors. 
But  since  all  the  objects  concerned  in  this  compound 
relation  from  relate  '  to  correlate  n  are  one  and  the  same, 
it  is  no  longer  a  sequence  of  relations,  but  a  coexistence 
of  special  identities,  —  a  coexistence  of  characters ;  and 
its  relative  number  is  the  relative  number  of  such  co 
existences, —  of  objects  or  events  in  which  coexist  all 
the  given  special  identities  that  belong  at  once  to  all  the 
given  species.  The  condition  that  the  relations  should 
be  independent,  that  is,  that  between  any  two  of  them, 

a,  b       a,T) 

T      T 

for  relations  of  identity  becomes  the  condition  that  the 
proportion  of  5's  that  are  also  a's  should  equal  the  pro 
portion  of  5's  that  are  also  o's ;  in  other  words,  that  an 
event  is  b  should  make  it  neither  more  nor  less  likely 
that  it  is  also  a  case  of  a,  and  vice  versa. 

We  thus  see  that  the  multiplication  of  identical  rela 
tive  numbers,  when  the  relations  are  independent,  will 
give  the  relative  number  of  the  events  in  which  all  the 
multiplied  identities  coexist.  The  probability  of  a  com- 


120  OPERATIONS    IN   RELATIVE   NUMBER. 

pound  event,  therefore,  when  the  components  are  inde 
pendent,  may  be  found  by  multiplying  together  the  prob 
abilities  of  all  the  components.  Applying  this  principle 
to  the  case  of  the  compound  events 

[a,  I  ...  u]  +  \_a,b,  ...  n\  ...  +  [«...  m,n\, 
we  have  for  the  probability  of  the  occurrence  of  one,  and 
only  one,  of  n  independent  non-exclusive  events, 
[a,  I  .  .  .n.\.a,b,c  .  .  .  n.\  .....  \.a  .  .  .  m,ri] 
=  M  P]  [>]•••[>]  +  [a]  [6]...[w]...+  [«]...[m]  [>].     (3) 
For  the  probability  of  the  occurrence  of  some  one  or 
more  of  n  independent  non-exclusive  events,  we  obtain 
by  transposition  from  the  second  form  of  the  general 
addition  formula,  — 

&  -I-  *  '!•  c  -I  .....  |-  n]  =  [a]  +  [£]  +  .  .  .  .  +  [>] 
-  H  M  P]  .  .  [n\  -...-[«]...  [m]  [n] 
-2[a]J?][c][<Z]...[n]-.  .  .-2[«]...[q  [m]  [w] 

-(»-!)  M[ft][c].  .  .  M  (4) 

Since  the  probability  of  a  compound  event  is  the  pro 
duct  of  the  probabilities  of  the  components  (when  inde 
pendent),  we  have  the  following  equation  :  — 

[a,M...n]==  M  [&]  [c]  .  .  .  M  (5) 

which  gives  us 


or 


that  is,  the  probability  of  any  event  is  equal  to  the 
probability  of  any  compound  event  into  which  it  enters, 
divided  by  the  probability  of  the  compound  event  made 
up  of  the  remaining  components. 


OPERATIONS    IN   RELATIVE   NUMBER.  121 

"We  may  obtain  an  expression  for  the  probability  of 
a  compound  event  when  the  components  are  not  inde 
pendent,  by  noticing  that  in  establishing  the  formula 
for  multiplication  the  independence  of  the  relations  ena 
bled  us  to  substitute  in  the  left-hand  member  of  the 

equation,  -^  for  ^—-.  If  the  relations  are  not  independ 
ent,  this  is  not  permissible  ;  whence  indicating  ^~-  by 
\_p'p"]P"  the  equation  reads 


ov  '>[>"] 

or  for  identical  relations 

[»,»]»  [»]  =  [«,»], 

in  which  [&,6]&  denotes  the  proportion  of  a,  6'  s  among 
5's,  the  probability  that  an  event  of  the  genus  b  will  also 
be  of  the  species  a.  An  extension  of  these  considera 
tions  gives  the  general  formula 

[>,&..  .w]6...B  [&,c.ra]c...»  [c,d..ri]dtttn...\m9n]n  [ri]  = 

O,a...rc];     (6) 

that  is,  the  probability  of  a  compound  event,  when  the 
components  are  not  independent,  is  equal  to  the  general 
probability  of  any  one  of  the  components  multiplied  by 
the  probability  that  one  of  the  other  components  will 
happen  when  the  first  happens,  and  so  on  until  all  the 
components  are  exhausted. 

Let  us  suppose  that  the  compound  event,  instead  of 
being  composed  of  n  different  events,  is  composed  of 
n  like  events,  a.  If  these  different  occurrences  of  a  are 
independent,  —  that  is,  if  the  fact  that  a  has  occurred 
once,  makes  it  neither  more  nor  less  likely  that  it  will 
occur  again,  —  we  have 

M  =  W  (7) 


122          OPERATIONS   IN   RELATIVE   NUMBER. 

While  the  mere  fact  that  a  has  occurred  will  not, 
contrary  to  the  popular  notion,  make  it  any  more  or  less 
likely  to  recur,  it  is  evident  that  in  many  instances  at 
tendant  circumstances,  as  in  the  case  of  habit,  may  de 
stroy  the  independence  of  successive  occurrences. 

If  a  is  a  compound  of  independent  relations  of  identity, 
as  &, 6, c,  ...  m,  the  formula  becomes 

[(a,ft,c.  ••  m)M]  =  KM-  •  -mT 

=  (M  P]  M  -  -  -  W)- 

=  M»P]»[c]»...[m]»;  (8) 

that  is,  the  probability  of  the  repetition  of  a  compound 
event  n  times  is  equal  to  the  product  of  the  nih  powers  of 
the  probabilities  of  its  components. 

We  have  seen  that  a  polynomial  relative  number  ex 
presses  the  probability  of  the  occurrence  of  some  one 
or  more  of  the  separate  events  symbolized  therein.  If 
the  events  are  exclusives,  it  expresses  the  probability  of 
the  occurrence  of  some  one  of  them. 

Considering  two  exclusives,  a  and  5,  in  order  to  ob 
tain  the  probability  that  one  or  other  of  them  should 
occur  n  times,  it  is  to  be  noticed  first  that  this  event 
itself  is  not  a  single  compound  event,  but  a  compound 
alternating  event,  consisting  of  as  many  compound  alter 
natives  as  there  are  different  arrangements  of  a  and  I  in 
n  occurrences.  Since  the  probability  of  an  alternating 
event  is  the  sum  of  the  probabilities  of  the  alternatives, 
the  probability  we  seek  will  be  the  sum  of  the  probabili 
ties  of  all  the  compound  alternatives  ;  that  is,  the  sum 
of  all  the  products  obtained  by  forming  all  possible 
arrangements  of  n  simple  probabilities,  each  of  which 
must  be  either  [a]  or  [b~\.  In  other  words,  the  opera 
tion  of  finding  the  probability  of  the  occurrence  of  one  dr 
other  of  two  exclusives  n  times,  is  the  same  as  that  of 


OPERATIONS  IN   RELATIVE  NUMBER.  123 

raising  the  binomial  [a]  +  [5]  to  the  nth  power.     This 
is  otherwise  seen  thus  :   Since  a  and  b  are  exclusives,  — 


but 


Similarly,  for  more  than  two  exclusives,  the  probability 
of  one  or  other  happening  p  times  is  equal  to  the  sum 
of  the  probabilities  of  the  exclusives  raised  to  the  p^ 
power,  or 

[(<H-H<H  .....  I-")*]  =  (M  +  P]  +  W  •  •  •  +  M)p.  (9) 
It  may  be  observed  in  relation  to  the  probabilities  of 
the  compound  alternatives  of  which  these  sums  are  made 
up,  that  any  one  will  be  equal  to  all  the  others  in  which 
the  elementary  exclusives  enter  in  the  same  proportions, 
although  in  different  orders.  The  case  of  highest  proba 
bility  will  evidently  be  that  consisting  entirely  of  that 
one  of  the  elementary  exclusives  which  has  the  highest 
probability,  and  the  case  of  lowest  probability  will  be 
that  in  which  the  elementary  exclusive  having  the  lowest 
probability  alone  appears.  On  the  contrary,  other  con 
siderations  show  that  the  most  probable  proportions  in 
which  different  alternatives  will  enter  into  a  series  of 
trials  will  be  the  ratios  of  their  probabilities,  while  the 
most  improbable  proportions  will  be  those  exhibited  by 
series  consisting  entirely  of  some  one  of  the  alternatives. 
The  same  thing  is  true  of  exclusives  ;  the  most  probable 
proportion  in  which  they  will  be  found  in  a  series  of 
trials  being  the  ratios  of  their  probabilities.  But  while 
with  alternatives  the  sum  of  the  probabilities  of  all 
possible  orders  will  continue  to  be  unity,  however  the 
number  of  trials  is  increased,  with  exclusives  the  sum 
of  these  probabilities  will  decrease  in  geometrical  pro 
gression  as  the  trials  are  repeated. 


124  OPERATIONS    IN   RELATIVE   NUMBER. 

The  results  thus  far  reached,  readily  lead  to  other  com 
binations  of  probabilities,  as  in  the  following  examples  : 
The  probability  of  the  occurrence  of  at  least  one  of  two 
events  with  a  third  is  given  by  the  equation 


(10) 

in  which,  as  in  general  in  probabilities,  the  events  are 
supposed  to  be  independent. 

When  a  and  b  are  exclusives,  the  same  probability  is 
equal  to 

([a]  +  [J])  [«]. 

For  any  number  of   exclusives,  and  any  number  of 
other  events,  the  equation  becomes 

[OH-0-1  .....  1-"),  a,  ft,  .  .  •  n\  = 


For  the  probability  of  the  occurrence  of  one,  and  only 
one,  of  any  number  of  non-exclusive  events  with  any 
number  of  others,  we  have 

[(a,/3  .  .  .  v  .|.  .  .|.  ...  .|.a,  .  .  .  p.,v)a,b.  .  .  n]  = 

[a]  [J]  .  .  .  W(  [a]  [ft...  [v]+  .  .  .  +  [a]  .  .  .  [£][>])      (12) 

The  probability  that  a  will  occur  m  times  to  n  occur 
rences  of  5,  —  that  is,  that  m  a's  will  happen  while  n  6's 
are  happening,  —  will  be  the  probability  of  the  compound 
event  consisting  of  m  a's  and  n  6's.  The  probability 
that  m  a's  will  be  succeeded  by  n  6's  is  [a]m[£]n,  and  the 
number  of  different  arrangements  of  m  +  n  objects,  m 

of  one  kind  and  n  of  another,  is  '  ,'    ,     ;  whence  the  total 

\m  [n 

probability  is 


If  a  and  b  were  alternating  events,  this   expression 
would  give  the  probability  of  the  occurrence  of  some  one 


OPERATIONS   IN   RELATIVE   NUMBER.  125 

or  other  of  TT  exclusives  m  times,  while  some  one  or 
other  of  p  exclusives  is  happening  n  times.  Substituting 
the  values  assumed  in  this  case  by  [a]m  and  [6Jn,we 
have  for  this  probability 


+[/?]+...+  wr  (M  +[»]••  •+  !>])"•  a*) 

In  this  investigation  of  some  modes  of  combining 
probabilities,  suggested  by  the  consideration  of  Relative 
Number,  we  have  used  the  Addition  formula  in  reaching 
(1)  the  probability  of  negative  events,  (2)  of  some  one 
of  n  exclusives,  (3)  of  some  one,  and  only  one,  of  n 
non-exclusives,  and  (4)  of  at  least  one  of  n  non-exclu- 
sives.  From  the  Multiplication  formula  we  have  ob 
tained  the  probability  of  a  compound  event  when  the 
components  are  either  (5)  independent,  or  (6)  depend 
ent  ;  and  by  a  reference  to  the  involution  of  Relative 
Number  have  established  formula  for  the  probability 
of  the  repetition  of  (7)  simple  (8)  compound  or  (9) 
alternating  events.  These  results  have  been  combined 
in  the  more  complicated  cases  (10  -  14)  last  considered. 


A  THEOEY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

BY  C.  S.  PEIRCE. 


I. 

THE  following  is  an  example  of  the  simplest  kind  of 
probable  inference  :  — 

About  two  per  cent  of  persons  wounded  in  the  liver  recover ; 
This  man  has  been  wounded  in  the  liver; 
Therefore,  there  are  two  chances  out  of  a  hundred  that  he 
will  recover. 

Compare  this  with  the  simplest  of  syllogisms,  say  the 
following  :  — 

Every  man  dies ; 

Enoch  was  a  man ; 

Hence,  Enoch  must  have  died. 

The  latter  argument  consists  in  the  application  of  a 
general  rule  to  a  particular  case.  The  former  applies  to 
a  particular  case  a  rule  not  absolutely  universal,  but  sub 
ject  to  a  known  proportion  of  exceptions.  Both  may 
alike  be  termed  deductions,  because  they  bring  informa 
tion  about  the  uniform  or  usual  course  of  things  to  bear 
upon  the  solution  of  special  questions ;  and  the  probable 
argument  may  approximate  indefinitely  to  demonstration 
as  the  ratio  named  in  the  first  premise  approaches  to 
unity  or  to  zero. 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    127 

Let  us  set  forth  the  general  formula  of  the  two  kinds 
of  inference  in  the  manner  of  formal  logic. 

FORM  I. 
Singular  Syllogism  in  Barbara,. 

Every  M  is  a  P; 
S  is  an  M ; 
Hence,  S  is  a  P. 

FORM  II. 
Simple  Probable  Deduction. 

The  proportion  p  of  the  M'a  are  P's  ; 

S  is  an  M ; 

It  follows,  with  probability  p,  that  S  is  a  P. 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  ratio  p  need  not  be  exactly 
specified.  We  may  reason  from  the  premise  that  not 
more  than  two  per  cent  of  persons  wounded  in  the  liver 
recover,  or  from  "  not  less  than  a  certain  proportion  of 
the  JTs  are  P's,"  or  from  "  no  very  large  nor  very 
small  proportion,  etc."  In  short,  p  is  subject  to  every 
kind  of  indeterminacy;  it  simply  excludes  some  ratios 
and  admits  the  possibility  of  the  rest. 

The  analogy  between  syllogism  and  what  is  here  called 
probable  deduction  is  certainly  genuine  and  important ; 
yet  how  wide  the  differences  between  the  two  modes  of 
inference  are,  will  appear  from  the  following  considera 
tions  :  — 

1.  The  logic  of  probability  is  related  to  ordinary  syllo 
gistic  as  the  quantitative  to  the  qualitative  branch  of  the 
same  science.  Necessary  syllogism  recognizes  only  the 
inclusion  or  non-inclusion  of  one  class  under  another; 
but  probable  inference  takes  account  of  the  proportion 


128   A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

of  one  class  which  is  contained  under  a  second.  It  is 
like  the  distinction  between  protective  geometry,  which 
asks  whether  points  coincide  or  not,  and  metric  geome 
try,  which  determines  their  distances. 

2.  For  the  existence  of  ordinary  syllogism,  all  that  is 
requisite  is  that  we  should  be  able  to  say,  in  some  sense, 
that  one  term  is  contained  in  another,  or  that  one  object 
stands  to  a  second  in  one  of  those  relations :  "  better 
than,"  "  equivalent  to,"  etc.,  which  are  termed  transitive 
because  if  A  is  in  any  such  relation  to  B,  and  B  is  in 
the  same  relation  to  (7,  then  A  is  in  that  relation  to  0. 
The  universe   might  be  all  so  fluid  and   variable  that 
nothing  should  preserve  its  individual  identity,  and  that 
no  measurement  should   be  conceivable  ;  and  still  one 
portion  might  remain   inclosed  within   a  second,  itself 
inclosed  within  a  third,  so  that  a  syllogism  would  be 
possible.     But  probable  inference  could  not  be  made  in 
such  a  universe,  because  no  signification  would  attach  to 
the  words  "  quantitative  ratio."     For  that  there  must  be 
counting ;  and  consequently  units  must  exist,  preserving 
their  identity  and  variously  grouped  together. 

3.  A  cardinal  distinction   between  the  two  kinds  of 
inference  is,  that  in  demonstrative  reasoning  the  con 
clusion  follows  from  the  existence  of  the  objective  facts 
laid  down  in  the  premises ;  while  in  probable  reasoning 
these  facts  in  themselves  do  not  even  render  the  con 
clusion  probable,  but  account  has  to  be  taken  of  various 
subjective  circumstances,  —  of  the  manner  in  which  the 
premises  have  been  obtained,  of  there  being  no  counter 
vailing  considerations,  etc. ;  in  short,  good  faith  and  hon 
esty  are  essential  to  good  logic  in  probable  reasoning. 

When  the  partial  rule  that  the  proposition  p  of  the 
M9s  are  P's  is  applied  to  show  with  probability  p  that 
8  is  a  P,  it  is  requisite,  not  merely  that  S  should  le  an 


A   THEORY    OF   PROBABLE   INFERENCE.        129 

Jlf,  but  also  that  it  should  be  an  instance  drawn  at  ran 
dom  from  among  the  M'a.  Thus,  there  being  four  aces 
in  a  picquet  pack  of  thirty-two  cards,  the  chance  is  one 
eighth  that  a  given  card  not  looked  at  is  an  ace ;  but 
this  is  only  on  the  supposition  that  the  card  has  been 
drawn  at  random  from  the  whole  pack.  If,  for  instance, 
it  had  been  drawn  from  the  cards  discarded  by  the 
players  at  piquet  or  euchre,  the  probability  would  be 
quite  different.  The  instance  must  be  drawn  at  ran 
dom.  Here  is  a  maxim  of  conduct.  The  volition  of 
the  reasoner  (using  what  machinery  it  may)  has  to 
choose  S  so  that  it  shall  be  an  M\  but  he  ought  to 
restrain  himself  from  all  further  preference,  and  not 
allow  his  will  to  act  in  any  way  that  might  tend  to 
settle  what  particular  M  is  taken,  but  should  leave  that 
to  the  operation  of  chance.  Willing  and  wishing,  like 
other  operations  of  the  mind,  are  general  and  imperfectly 
determinate.  I  wish  for  a  horse,  —  for  some  particular 
kind  of  horse  perhaps,  but  not  usually  for  any  individual 
one.  I  will  to  act  in  a  way  of  which  I  have  a  general 
conception ;  but  so  long  as  my  action  conforms  to  that 
general  description,  how  it  is  further  determined  I  do 
not  care.  Now  in  choosing  the  instance  8,  the  general 
intention  (including  the  whole  plan  of  action)  should 
be  to  select  an  M,  but  beyond  that  there  should  be  no 
preference ;  and  the  act  of  choice  should  be  such  that  if 
it  were  repeated  many  enough  times  with  the  same  in 
tention,  the  result  would  be  that  among  the  totality  of 
selections  the  different  sorts  of  M's  would  occur  with 
the  same  relative  frequencies  as  in  experiences  in  which 
volition  does  not  intermeddle  at  all.  In  cases  in  which 
it  is  found  difficult  thus  to  restrain  the  will  by  a  direct 
effort,  the  apparatus  of  games  of  chance,  —  a  lottery- 
wheel,  a  roulette,  cards,  or  dice,  —  may  be  called  to  our 


130    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

aid.  Usually,  however,  in  making  a  simple  probable 
deduction,  we  take  that  instance  in  which  we  happen  at 
the  time  to  be  interested.  In  such  a  case,  it  is  our 
interest  that  fulfils  the  function  of  an  apparatus  for 
random  selection ;  and  no  better  need  be  desired,  so 
long  as  we  have  reason  to  deem  the  premise  "  the  pro 
portion  p  of  the  M's  are  P's  "  to  be  equally  true  in 
regard  to  that  part  of  the  M's  which  are  alone  likely 
ever  to  excite  our  interest. 

Nor  is  it  a  matter  of  indifference  in  what  manner  the 
other  premise  has  been  obtained.  A  card  being  drawn 
at  random  from  a  picquet  pack,  the  chance  is  one-eighth 
that  it  is  an  ace,  if  we  have  no  other  knowledge  of  it. 
But  after  we  have  looked  at  the  card,  we  can  no  longer 
reason  in  that  way.  That  the  conclusion  must  be  drawn 
in  advance  of  any  other  knowledge  on  the  subject  is 
a  rule  that,  however  elementary,  will  be  found  in  the 
sequel  to  have  great  importance. 

4.  The  conclusions  of  the  two  modes  of  inference  like 
wise  differ.  One  is  necessary ;  the  other  only  probable. 
Locke,  in  the  "Essay  concerning  Human  Understanding," 
hints  at  the  correct  analysis  of  the  nature  of  probability. 
After  remarking  that  the  mathematician  positively  knows 
that  the  sum  of  the  three  angles  of  a  triangle  is  equal  to 
two  right  angles  because  he  apprehends  the  geometrical 
proof,  he  then  continues :  "  But  another  man  who  never 
took  the  pains  to  observe  the  demonstration,  hearing  a 
mathematician,  a  man  of  credit,  affirm  the  three  angles 
of  a  triangle  to  be  equal  to  two  right  ones,  assents  to  it ; 
that  is,  receives  it  for  true.  In  which  case,  the  founda 
tion  of  his  assent  is  the  probability  of  the  thing,  the  proof 
being  such  as,  for  the  most  part,  carries  truth  with  it ; 
the  man  on  whose  testimony  he  receives  it  not  being  wont 
to  affirm  anything  contrary  to  or  besides  his  knowledge, 


A  THEOEY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    131 

especially  in  matters  of  this  kind."  Those  who  know 
Locke  are  accustomed  to  look  for  more  meaning  in  his 
words  than  appears  at  first  glance.  There  is  an  allusion 
in  this  passage  to  the  fact  that  a  probable  argument  is 
always  regarded  as  belonging  to  a  genus  of  arguments. 
Tliis  is,  in  fact,  true  of  any  kind  of  argument.  For  the 
belief  expressed  by  the  conclusion  is  determined  or  caused 
by  the  belief  expressed  by  the  premises.  There  is,  there 
fore,  some  general  rule  according  to  which  the  one  suc 
ceeds  the  other.  But,  further,  the  reasoner  is  conscious 
of  there  being  such  a  rule,  for  otherwise  he  would  not 
know  he  was  reasoning,  and  could  exercise  no  attention 
or  control ;  and  to  such  an  involuntary  operation  the 
name  reasoning  is  very  properly  not  applied.  In  all 
cases,  then,  we  are  conscious  that  our  inference  belongs 
to  a  general  class  of  logical  forms,  although  we  are  not 
necessarily  able  to  describe  the  general  class.  The  dif 
ference  between  necessary  and  probable  reasoning  is  that 
in  the  one  case  we  conceive  that  such  facts  as  are  ex 
pressed  by  the  premises  are  never,  in  the  whole  range  of 
possibility,  true,  without  another  fact,  related  to  them  as 
our  conclusion  is  to  our  premises,  being  true  likewise  ; 
while  in  the  other  case  we  merely  conceive  that,  in  rea 
soning  as  we  do,  we  are  following  a  general  maxim  that 
will  usually  lead  us  to  the  truth. 

So  long  as  there  are  exceptions  to  the  rule  that  all 
men  wounded  in  the  liver  die,  it  docs  not  necessarily 
follow  that  because  a  given  man  is  wounded  in  the  liver 
he  cannot  recover.  Still,  we  know  that  if  we  were  to 
reason  in  that  way,  we  should  be  following  a  mode  of 
inference  which  would  only  lead  us  wrong,  in  the  long 
run,  once  in  fifty  times ;  and  this  is  what  we  mean  when 
we  say  that  the  probability  is  one  out  of  fifty  that  the 
man  will  recover.  To  say,  then,  that  a  proposition  has 


132    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

the  probability  p  means  that  to  infer  it  to  be  true  would 
be  to  follow  an  argument  such  as  would  carry  truth  with 
it  in  the  ratio  of  frequency  p. 

It  is  plainly  useful  that  we  should  have  a  stronger 
feeling  of  confidence  about  a  sort  of  inference  which  will 
oftener  lead  us  to  the  truth  than  about  an  inference  that 
will  less  often  prove  right,  —  and  such  a  sensation  we  do 
have.  The  celebrated  law  of  Fechner  is,  that  as  the 
force  acting  upon  an  organ  of  sense  increases  in  geo 
metrical  progression,  the  intensity  of  the  sensation  in 
creases  in  arithmetical  progression.  In  this  case  the 
odds  (that  is,  the  ratio  of  the  chances  in  favor  of  a 
conclusion  to  the  chances  against  it)  take  the  place  of 
the  exciting  cause,  while  the  sensation  itself  is  the  feel 
ing  of  confidence.  When  two  arguments  tend  to  the 
same  conclusion,  our  confidence  in  the  latter  is  equal  to 
the  sum  of  what  the  two  arguments  separately  would 
produce ;  the  odds  are  the  product  of  the  odds  in  favor 
of  the  two  arguments  separately.  When  the  value  of  the 
odds  reduces  to  unity,  our  confidence  is  null ;  when  the 
odds  are  less  than  unity,  we  have  more  or  less  confidence 
in  the  negative  of  the  conclusion. 

II. 

The  principle  of  probable  deduction  still  applies  when 
S,  instead  of  being  a  single  Jtf,  is  a  set  of  M' s,  —  n 
in  number.  The  reasoning  then  takes  the  following 
form :  — 

FORM  III. 
Complex  Probable  Deduction. 

Among  all  sets  of  n  M's,  the  proportion  q  consist  each  of 
m  P's  and  of  n  —  m  not-P's ; 


A  THEOEY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.   133 

S,  Sr,  Sff,  etc.  form  a  set  of  n  objects  drawn  at  random 
from  among  the  M*s : 

Hence,  the  probability  is  q  that  among  S,  S',  S",  etc.  there 
are  m  P's  and  n  —  m  not-P's. 

In  saying  that  S,  S',  S",  etc.  form  a  set  drawn  at  ran 
dom,  we  here  mean  that  not  only  are  the  different  in 
dividuals  drawn  at  random,  but  also  that  they  are  so 
drawn  that  the  qualities  which  may  belong  to  one  have 
no  influence  upon  the  selection  of  any  other.  In  other 
words,  the  individual  drawings  are  independent,  and  the 
set  as  a  whole  is  taken  at  random  from  among  all  possi 
ble  sets  of  n  M's.  In  strictness,  this  supposes  that  the 
same  individual  may  be  drawn  several  times  in  the  same 
set,  although  if  the  number  of  M's  is  large  compared 
with  n,  it  makes  no  appreciable  difference  whether  this 
is  the  case  or  not. 

The  following  formula  expresses  the  proportion,  among 
all  sets  of  n  M's,  of  those  which  consist  of  m  P's  and 
n  —  m  not-P's.  The  letter  r  denotes  the  proportion  of 
P's  among  the  M's,  and  the  sign  of  admiration  is  used 
to  express  the  continued  product  of  all  integer  numbers 
from  1  to  the  number  after  which  it  is  placed.  Thus, 
4  !  =  1  .  2  .  3  .  4  =  24,  etc.  The  formula  is 

r"»  (1  —  r)n-m 

q  =  nl  X  — :  X  — 

m  I          (n  —  m)  I 

As  an  example,  let  us  assume  the  proportion  r  =  f 
and  the  number  of  M's  in  a  set  n  =  15.  Then  the 
values  of  the  probability  q  for  different  numbers,  m,  of 
P's,  are  fractions  having  for  their  common  denominator 
14,348,907,  and  for  their  numerators  as  follows  :  — 


134    A  THE  GET  OF  PEOBABLE  INFERENCE. 


TO 

Numerator  of  q. 

0 

1 

1 

30 

2 

420 

3 

3640 

4 

21840 

5 

96096 

6 

320320 

7 

823680 

m 

1\  umerator  of  q. 

8 

1667360 

9 

2562560 

10 

3075072 

11 

2795520 

12 

1863680 

13 

860160 

14 

122880 

15 

32768 

A  very  little  mathematics  would  suffice  to  show  that, 
r  and  n  being  fixed,  q  always  reaches  its  maximum  value 
with  that  value  of  m  that  is  next  less  than  (n  +  1)?*,*  and 
that  q  is  very  small  unless  m  has  nearly  this  value. 

Upon  these  facts  is  based  another  form  of  inference  to 
which  I  give  the  name  of  statistical  deduction.  Its  gen 
eral  formula  is  as  follows  :  — 

FORM  IV. 

{Statistical  Deduction. 
The  proportion  r  of  the  M ?s  are  P?s ; 

Sf,  £;/,  S>",  etc.,  are  a  numerous  set,  taken  at  random 
from  among  the  Hf's  : 

Hence,  probably  and  approximately,  the  proportion  r  of 
the  S's  are  P's. 

As  an  example,  take  this  :  — 

A  little  more  than  half  of  all  human  births  are  males ; 
Hence,  probably  a  little  over  half  of  all  the  births  in  New 
York  during  any  one  year  are  males. 

We  have  now  no  longer  to  deal  with  a  mere  probable 
inference,  but  with  a  probable  approximate  inference. 

*  In  case  (n-f-  l)ris  a  whole  number,  q  has  equal  valut-s  for  m  = 
(TI  -|-  1)  r  and  for  m  —  (n  -f-  1)  r  —  1. 


A   THEORY    OF   PROBABLE   INFERENCE.         135 

This  conception  is  a  somewhat  complicated  one,  meaning 
that  the  probability  is  greater  according  as  the  limits  of 
approximation  are  wider,  conformably  to  the  mathemati 
cal  expression  for  the  values  of  q. 

This  conclusion  has  no  meaning  at  all  unless  there  be 
more  than  one  instance  ;  and  it  has  hardly  any  meaning 
unless  the  instances  are  somewhat  numerous.  When 
this  is  the  case,  there  is  a  more  convenient  way  of  ob 
taining  (not  exactly,  but  quite  near  enough  for  all  practi 
cal  purposes)  either  a  single  value  of  q  or  the  sum  of 
successive  values  from  m  =  m\  to  m  =  m2  inclusive.  The 
rule  is  first  to  calculate  two  quantities  which  may  con 
veniently  be  called  ^  and  t.2  according  to  these  form 
ula  :  — 


^  ffll  _  (n  _j_  1)  r 
tl  =  y2nr(l—  rj 


_ 


1  -f  m2  —  (n  +  1)  r 


where  w2  >  Wi-  Either  or  both  the  quantities  ^  and  ^ 
may  be  negative.  Next  with  each  of  these  quantities 
enter  the  table  below,  and  take  out  |  9^  and  |  9t2  and 
give  each  the  same  sign  as  the  t  from  which  it  is  derived 

Then 

2  q  =  l  ®t2  —  1  ©*r 


136   A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 


TaUeofSt  = 


—p 


dt. 


t 

0; 

0.0 

0.000 

0.1 

0.112 

0.2 

0.223 

0.3 

0.329 

0.4 

0.428 

0.5 

0.520 

0.6 

0.604 

0.7 

0.678 

0.8 

0.742 

0.9 

0.797 

1.0 

0.843 

t 

et 

1.0 

0.843 

1.1 

0.880 

1.2 

0.910 

1.3 

0.934 

1.4 

0.952 

1.5 

0.966 

1.6 

0.976 

1.7 

0.984 

1.8 

0.989 

1.9 

0.993 

2.0 

0.995 

t 

0* 

2.0 

0.99532 

2.1 

0.99702 

2.2 

0.99814 

2.3 

0.9988"6 

2.4 

0.99931 

2.5 

0.99959 

2.6 

0.99976 

2.7 

0.99987 

2.8 

0.99992 

2.9 

0.99996 

3.0 

0.99998 

t 

0 

4 

0.999999989 

5 

0.9999999999984 

6 

0.999999999999999982 

7 

0.999999999999999999999958 

In  rough  calculations  we  may  take  ©t  equal  to  t  for  t 
less  than  0.7,  and  as  equal  to  unity  for  any  value  above 
t  =  1.4. 

The  principle  of  statistical  deduction  is  that  these  two 
proportions,  —  namely,  that  of  the  P's  among  the  if's, 
and  that  of  the  P's  among  the  £'s,  —  are  probably  and 
approximately  equal.  If,  then,  this  principle  justifies  our 
inferring  the  value  of  the  second  proportion  from  the 
known  value  of  the  first,  it  equally  justifies  our  inferring 
the  value  of  the  first  from  that  of  the  second,  if  the  first 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    137 

is  unknown  but  the   second  has  been  observed.     We 
thus  obtain  the  following  form  of  inference  :  — 

FORM  V. 
Induction. 

S1,  Sfl,  S'",  etc.,  form  a  numerous  set  taken  at  random 
from  among  the  M's  ; 

S1,  S",  S'",  etc.,  are  found  to  be  —  the  proportion  p  of 
them  —  P's  : 

Hence,  probably  and  approximately  the  same  proportion,  p, 
of  the  M'a  are  P's. 

The  following  are  examples.  From  a  bag  of  coffee  a 
handful  is  taken  out,  and  found  to  have  nine  tenths  of 
the  beans  perfect ;  whence  it  is  inferred  that  about  nine- 
tenths  of  all  the  beans  in  the  bag  are  probably  perfect. 
The  United  States  Census  of  1870  shows  that  of  native 
white  children  under  one  year  old,  there  were  478,774 
males  to  463,320  females ;  while  of  colored  children  of 
the  same  age  there  were  75,985  males  to  76,637  females. 
We  infer  that  generally  there  is  a  larger  proportion  of 
female  births  among  negroes  than  among  whites. 

When  the  ratio  p  is  unity  or  zero,  the  inference  is  an 
ordinary  induction ;  and  1  ask  leave  to  extend  the  term 
induction  to  all  such  inference,  whatever  be  the  value  of 
p.  It  is,  in  fact,  inferring  from  a  sample  to  the  whole 
lot  sampled.  These  two  forms  of  inference,  statistical 
deduction  and  induction,  plainly  depend  upon  the  same 
principle  of  equality  of  ratios,  so  that  their  validity  is  the 
same.  Yet  the  nature  of  the  probability  in  the  two  cases 
is  very  different.  In  the  statistical  deduction,  we  know 
that  among  the  whole  body  of  M 's  the  proportion  of  P's 
is  p  ;  we  say,  then,  that  the  S9s  being  random  drawings 


138    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

of  Jf'sare  probably  P's  in  about  the  same  proportion, 
—  and  though  this  may  happen  not  to  be  so,  yet  at  any 
rate,  on  continuing  the  drawing  sufficiently,  our  pre 
diction  of  the  ratio  will  be  vindicated  at  last.  On  the 
other  hand,  in  induction  we  say  that  the  proportion  p  of 
the  sample  being  P's,  probably  there  is  about  the  same 
proportion  in  the  whole  lot ;  or  at  least,  if  this  happens 
not  to  be  so,  then  on  continuing  the  drawings  the  in 
ference  will  be,  not  vindicated  as  in  the  other  case,  but 
modified  so  as  to  become  true.  The  deduction,  then, 
is  probable  in  this  sense,  that  though  its  conclusion  may 
in  a  particular  case  be  falsified,  yet  similar  conclusions 
(with  the  same  ratio  p)  would  generally  prove  approxi 
mately  true;  while  the  induction  is  probable  in  this 
sense,  that  though  it  may  happen  to  give  a  false  con 
clusion,  yet  in  most  cases  in  which  the  same  precept  of 
inference  was  followed,  a  different  and  approximately 
true  inference  (with  the  right  value  of  p)  would  be 
drawn. 


IY. 

Before  going  any  further  with  the  study  of  Form  V., 
I  wish  to  join  to  it  another  extremely  analogous  form. 

We  often  speak  of  one  thing  being  very  much  like 
another,  and  thus  apply  a  vague  quantity  to  resemblance. 
Even  if  qualities  are  not  subject  to  exact  numeration, 
we  may  conceive  them  to  be  approximately  measurable. 
We  may  then  measure  resemblance  by  a  scale  of  num 
bers  from  zero  up  to  unity.  To  say  that  S  has  a 
1-likeness  to  a  P  will  mean  that  it  has  every  character 
of  a  P,  and  consequently  is  a  P.  To  say  that  it  has  a 
0-likeness  will  imply  total  dissimilarity.  We  shall  then 
be  able  to  reason  as  follows  :  — 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    139 

FORM  II.  (bis). 
Simple  probable  deduction  in  depth. 

Every  M  has  the  simple  mark  P ; 
The  >S"s  have  an  r-likeness  to  the  M's : 
Hence,  the  probability  is  r  that  every  S  is  P. 

It  would  be  difficult,  perhaps  impossible,  to  adduce  an 
example  of  such  kind  of  inference,  for  the  reason  that 
simple  marks  are  not  known  to  us.  We  may,  however, 
illustrate  the  complex  probable  deduction  in  depth  (the 
general  form  of  which  it  is  not  worth  while  to  set  down) 
as  follows  :  I  forget  whether,  in  the  ritualistic  churches, 
a  bell  is  tinkled  at  the  elevation  of  the  Host  or  not. 
Knowing,  however,  that  the  services  resemble  somewhat 
decidedly  those  of  the  Roman  Mass,  I  think  that  it  is  not 
unlikely  that  the  bell  is  used  in  the  ritualistic,  as  in  the 
Roman,  churches. 

We  shall  also  have  the  following :  — 

FORM  IV.   (bis). 
Statistical  deduction  in  depth. 

Every  M  has,  for  example,  the  numerous  marks  P7,  Prr, 
P",  etc. 

S  has  an  r-likeness  to  the  M's  : 

Hence,  probably  and  approximately,  S  has  the  proportion  r 
of  the  marks  P',  P",  P'",  etc. 

For  example,  we  know  that  the  French  and  Italians 
are  a  good  deal  alike  in  their  ideas,  characters,  tempera 
ments,  genius,  customs,  institutions,  etc.,  while  they  also 
differ  very  markedly  in  all  these  respects.  Suppose,  then, 
that  I  know  a  boy  who  is  going  to  make  a  short  trip 
through  France  and  Italy  ;  I  can  safely  predict  that 
among  the  really  numerous  though  relatively  few  res- 


140   A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

pects  in  which  he  will  be  able  to  compare  the  two  people, 
about  the  same  degree  of  resemblance  will  be  found. 

Both  these  modes  of  inference  are  clearly  deductive. 
When  r  =  1,  they  reduce  to  Barbara.1 

Corresponding  to  induction,  we  have  the  following 
mode  of  inference:  — 

FORM  V.  (bis). 
Hypothesis. 

M  has,  for  example,  the  numerous  marks  P',  P",  P/;/,  etc. 
S  has  the  proportion  r  of  the  marks  P',  P",  P"!,  etc. : 
Hence,  probably  and  approximately,  £has  an  r-likeness  to  M. 

Thus,  we  know,  that  the  ancient  Mound-builders  of 
North  America  present,  in  all  those  respects  in  which  we 
have  been  able  to  make  the  comparison,  a  limited  degree 
of  resemblance  with  the  Pueblo  Indians.  The  inference 
is,  then,  that  in  all  respects  there  is  about  the  same  de 
gree  of  resemblance  between  these  races. 

If  I  am  permitted  the  extended  sense  which  I  have 
given  to  the  word  "  induction,"  this  argument  is  simply 
an  induction  respecting  qualities  instead  of  respecting 

1  When  r  =  0,  the  last  form  becomes 

M  has  all  the  marks  P ; 

S  has  no  mark  of  M : 

Hence,  S  has  none  of  the  marks  P. 

"When  the  universe  of  marks  is  unlimited  (see  a  note  appended  to  this 
paper  for  an  explanation  of  this  expression),  the  only  way  in  which  two 
terms  can  fail  to  have  a  common  mark  is  by  their  together  filling  the  uni 
verse  of  things  ;  and  consequently  this  form  then  becomes, 

3/isP; 

Every  non-£  is  M: 

Hence,  every  non-S  is  P. 

This  is  one  of  De  Moi-gan's  syllogisms. 

In  putting  r  =  0  in  Form  II.  (bis)  it  must  be  noted  that,  since  P  is 
simple  in  depth,  to  say  that  S  is  not  P  is  to  say  that  it  has  no  mark  of  P. 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    141 

things.  In  point  of  fact  P',  P",  P"',  etc.  constitute  a 
random  sample  of  the  characters  of  M,  and  the  ratio  r 
of  them  being  found  to  belong  to  $  the  same  ratio  of  all 
the  characters  of  M  are  concluded  to  belong  to  S.  This 
kind  of  argument,  however,  as  it  actually  occurs,  differs 
very  much  from  induction,  owing  to  the  impossibility 
of  simply  counting  qualities  as  individual  things  are 
counted.  Characters  have  to  be  weighed  rather  than 
counted.  Thus,  antimony  is  bluish-gray :  that  is  a  char 
acter.  Bismuth  is  a  sort  of  rose-gray;  it  is  decidedly 
different  from  antimony  in  color,  and  yet  not  so  very 
different  as  gold,  silver,  copper,  and  tin  are. 

I  call  this  induction  of  characters  hypothetic  inference, 
or,  briefly,  hypothesis.  This  is  perhaps  not  a  very  happy 
designation,  yet  it  is  difficult  to  find  a  better.  The  term 
"hypothesis"  has  many  well  established  and  distinct 
meanings.  Among  these  is  that  of  a  proposition  believed 
in  because  its  consequences  agree  with  experience.  This 
is  the  sense  in  which  Newton  used  the  word  when  he 
said,  Hypotheses  non  jingo.  He  meant  that  he  was  merely 
giving  a  general  formula  for  the  motions  of  the  heavenly 
bodies,  but  was  not  undertaking  to  mount  to  the  causes 
of  the  acceleration  they  exhibit.  The  inferences  of 
Kepler,  on  the  other  hand,  were  hypotheses  in  this  sense; 
for  he  traced  out  the  miscellaneous  consequences  of  the 
supposition  that  Mars  moved  in  an  ellipse,  with  the  sun 
at  the  focus,  and  showed  that  both  the  longitudes  and  the 
latitudes  resulting  from  this  theory  were  such  as  agreed 
with  observation.  These  two  components  of  the  motion 
were  observed  ;  the  third,  that  of  approach  to  or  regression 
from  the  earth,  was  supposed.  Now,  if  in  Form  V.  (bis) 
we  put  r  =  1,  the  inference  is  the  drawing  of  a  hypothesis 
in  this  sense.  I  take  the  liberty  of  extending  the  use  of 
the  word  by  permitting  r  to  have  any  value  from  zero  to 


142   A  THEORY  OF  PKOBABLE  INFERENCE. 

unity.  The  term  is  certainly  not  all  that  could  be  de 
sired  ;  for  the  word  hypothesis,  as  ordinarily  used,  carries 
with  it  a  suggestion  of  uncertainty,  and  of  something  to 
be  superseded,  which  does  not  belong  at  all  to  my  use  of 
it.  But  we  must  use  existing  language  as  best  we  may, 
balancing  the  reasons  for  and  against  any  mode  of  ex 
pression,  for  none  is  perfect ;  at  least  the  term  is  not 
so  utterly  misleading  as  "  analogy  "  would  be,  and  with 
proper  explanation  it  will,  I  hope,  be  understood. 

y. 

The  following  examples  will  illustrate  the  distinction 
between  statistical  deduction,  induction,  and  hypothesis. 
If  I  wished  to  order  a  font  of  type  expressly  for  the 
printing  of  this  book,  knowing,  as  I  do,  that  in  all  Eng 
lish  writing  the  letter  e  occurs  oftener  than  any  other 
letter,  I  should  want  more  e's  in  my  font  than  other 
letters.  For  what  is  true  of  all  other  English  writing  is 
no  doubt  true  of  these  papers.  This  is  a  statistical  de 
duction.  But  then  the  words  used  in  logical  writings  are 
rather  peculiar,  and  a  good  deal  of  use  is  made  of  single 
letters.  I  might,  then,  count  the  number  of  occurrences 
of  the  different  letters  upon  a  dozen  or  so  pages  of  the 
manuscript,  and  thence  conclude  the  relative  amounts  of 
the  different  kinds  of  type  required  in  the  font.  That 
would  be  inductive  inference.  If  now  I  were  to  order 
the  font,  and  if,  after  some  days,  I  were  to  receive  a  box 
containing  a  large  number  of  little  paper  parcels  of  very 
different  sizes,  I  should  naturally  infer  that  this  was  the 
font  of  types  I  had  ordered  ;  and  this  would  be  hypothetic 
inference.  Again,  if  a  dispatch  in  cipher  is  captured,  and 
it  is  found  to  be  written  with  twenty-six  characters,  one 
of  which  occurs  much  more  frequently  than  any  of  the 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    143 

others,  we  are  at  once  led  to  suppose  that  each  charac 
ter  represents  a  letter,  and  that  the  one  occurring  so  fre 
quently  stands  fer  e.  This  is  also  hypothetic  inference. 

We  are  thus  led  to  divide  all  probable  reasoning  into 
deductive  and  ampliative,  and  further  to  divide  ampliative 
reasoning  into  induction  and  hypothesis.  In  deductive 
reasoning,  though  the  predicted  ratio  may  be  wrong  in  a 
limited  number  of  drawings,  yet  it  will  be  approximately 
verified  in  a  larger  number.  In  ampliative  reasoning  the 
ratio  may  be  wrong,  because  the  inference  is  based  on  but 
a  limited  number  of  instances  ;  but  on  enlarging  the 
sample  the  ratio  will  be  changed  till  it  becomes  approxi 
mately  correct.  In  induction,  the  instances  drawn  at 
random  are  numerable  things  ;  in  hypothesis  they  are 
characters,  which  are  not  capable  of  strict  enumeration, 
but  have  to  be  otherwise  estimated. 

This  classification  of  probable  inference  is  connected 
with  a  preference  for  the  copula  of  inclusion  over  those 
used  by  Miss  Ladd  and  by  Mr.  Mitchell.1  De  Morgan 
established  eight  forms  of  simple  propositions ;  and  from 
a  purely  formal  point  of  view  no  one  of  these  has  a  right 
to  be  considered  as  more  fundamental  than  any  other. 
But  formal  logic  must  not  be  too  purely  formal ;  it  must 
represent  a  fact  of  psychology,  or  else  it  is  in  danger  of 
degenerating  into  a  mathematical  recreation.  The  cate 
gorical  proposition,  "every  man  is  mortal,"  is  but  a  modifi 
cation  of  the  hypothetical  proposition,  "  if  humanity,  then 
mortality ;"  and  since  the  very  first  conception  from  which 
logic  springs  is  that  one  proposition  follows  from  another, 
I  hold  that  "if  A,  then  B"  should  be  taken  as  the  typical 
form  of  judgment.  Time  flows ;  and,  in  time,  from  one 
state  of  belief  (represented  by  the  premises  of  an  argu- 

1  I  do  not  here  speak  of  Mr.  Jeyons,  because  my  objection  to  the  copula 
of  identity  is  of  a  somewhat  different  kind. 


144   A  THEOKY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

ment)  another  (represented  by  its  conclusion)  is  de 
veloped.  Logic  arises  from  this  circumstance,  without 
which  we  could  not  learn  anything  nor  correct  any 
opinion.  To  say  that  an  inference  is  correct  is  to  say 
that  if  the  premises  are  true  the  conclusion  is  also  true ; 
or  that  every  possible  state  of  things  in  which  the  prem 
ises  should  be  true  would  be  included  among  the  possible 
states  of  things  in  which  the  conclusion  would  be  true. 
We  are  thus  led  to  the  copula  of  inclusion.  But  the 
main  characteristic  of  the  relation  of  inclusion  is  that  it 
is  transitive,  —  that  is,  that  what  is  included  in  some 
thing  included  in  anything  is  itself  included  in  that 
thing ;  or,  that  if  A  is  B  and  B  is  (7,  then  A  is  0.  We 
thus  get  Barbara  as  the  primitive  type  of  inference. 
Now  in  Barbara  we  have  a  Rule,  a  Case  under  the  Rule, 
and  the  inference  of  the  Result  of  that  rule  in  that  case. 
For  example :  — 

Rule.       All  men  are  mortal ; 
Case.       Enoch  was  a  man. 
Result.     Enoch  was  mortal. 

The  cognition  of  a  rule  is  not  necessarily  conscious, 
but  is  of  the  nature  of  a  habit,  acquired  or  congenital. 
The  cognition  of  a  case  is  of  the  general  nature  of  a 
sensation;  that  is  to  say,  it  is  something  which  comes 
up  into  present  consciousness.  The  cognition  of  a  result 
is  of  the  nature  of  a  decision  to  act  in  a  particular  way 
on  a  given  occasion.1  In  point  of  fact,  a  syllogism,  in 
Barbara  virtually  takes  place  when  we  irritate  the  foot 
of  a  decapitated  frog.  The  connection  between  the  af 
ferent  and  efferent  nerve,  whatever  it  may  be,  constitutes 
a  nervous  habit,  a  rule  of  action,  which  is  the  physio- 

1  See  my  paper  on  "  How  to  make  our  ideas  clear."  —  Popular  Science 
Monthly,  January,  1878. 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    145 

logical  analogue  of  the  major  premise.  The  disturbance 
of  the  ganglionic  equilibrium,  owing  to  the  irritation,  is 
the  physiological  form  of  that  which,  psychologically  con 
sidered,  is  a  sensation ;  and,  logically  considered,  is  the 
occurrence  of  a  case.  The  explosion  through  the  efferent 
nerve  is  the  physiological  form  of  that  which  psychologi 
cally  is  a  volition,  and  logically  the  inference  of  a  result. 
When  we  pass  from  the  lowest  to  the  highest  forms  of 
inervation,  the  physiological  equivalents  escape  our  ob 
servation  ;  but,  psychologically,  we  still  have,  first,  habit, 
—  which  in  its  highest  form  is  understanding,  and  which 
corresponds  to  the  major  premise  of  Barbara;  we  have, 
second,  feeling,  or  present  consciousness,  corresponding 
to  the  minor  premise  of  Barbara;  and  we  have,  third, 
volition,  corresponding  to  the  conclusion  of  the  same 
mode  of  syllogism.  Although  these  analogies,  like  all 
very  broad  generalizations,  may  seem  very  fanciful  at 
first  sight,  yet  the  more  the  reader  reflects  upon  them 
the  more  profoundly  true  I  am  confident  they  will  appear. 
They  give  a  significance  to  the  ancient  system  of  formal 
logic  which  no  other  can  at  all  share. 

Deduction  proceeds  from  Rule  and  Case  to  Result ;  it 
is  the  formula  of  Volition.  Induction  proceeds  from  Case 
and  Result  to  Rule  ;  it  is  the  formula  of  the  formation  of 
a  habit  or  general  conception,  —  a  process  which,  psycho 
logically  as  well  as  logically,  depends  on  the  repetition  of 
instances  or  sensations.  Hypothesis  proceeds  from  Rule 
and  Result  to  Case  ;  it  is  the  formula  of  the  acquirement 
of  secondary  sensation,  —  a  process  by  which  a  confused 
concatenation  of  predicates  is  brought  into  order  under 
a  synthetizing  predicate. 

We  usually  conceive  Nature  to  be  perpetually  making 
deductions  in  Barbara.  This  is  our  natural  and  anthro 
pomorphic  metaphysics.  We  conceive  that  there  are 


146    A  THEOKY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

Laws  of  Nature,  which  are  her  Rules  or  major  premises. 
We  conceive  that  Cases  arise  under  these  laws  ;  these 
cases  consist  in  the  predication,  or  occurrence,  of  causes, 
which  are  the  middle  terms  of  the  syllogisms.  And, 
finally,  we  conceive  that  the  occurrence  of  these  causes, 
by  virtue  of  the  laws  of  Nature,  result  in  effects  which 
are  the  conclusions  of  the  syllogisms.  Conceiving  of 
nature  in  this  way,  we  naturally  conceive  of  science  as 
having  three  tasks, —  (1)  the  discovery  of  Laws,  which 
is  accomplished  by  induction ;  (2)  the  discovery  of  Causes, 
which  is  accomplished  by  hypothetic  inference ;  and  (3) 
the  prediction  of  Effects,  which  is  accomplished  by  de 
duction.  It  appears  to  me  to  be  highly  useful  to  select 
a  system  of  logic  which  shall  preserve  all  these  natural 
conceptions. 

It  may  be  added  that,  generally  speaking,  the  conclu 
sions  of  Hypothetic  Inference  cannot  be  arrived  at  in 
ductively,  because  their  truth  is  not  susceptible  of  direct 
observation  in  single  cases.  Nor  can  the  conclusions  of 
Inductions,  on  account  of  their  generality,  be  reached  by 
hypothetic  inference.  For  instance,  any  historical  fact, 
as  that  Napoleon  Bonaparte  once  lived,  is  a  hypothesis ; 
we  believe  the  fact,  because  its  effects  —  I  mean  current 
tradition,  the  histories,  the  monuments,  etc.  —  are  ob 
served.  But  no  mere  generalization  of  observed  facts 
could  ever  teach  us  that  Napoleon  lived.  So  we  induc 
tively  infer  that  every  particle  of  matter  gravitates  toward 
every  other.  Hypothesis  might  lead  to  this  result  for 
any  given  pair  of  particles,  but  it  never  could  show  that 
the  law  was  universal. 

VI. 

We  now  come  to  the  consideration  of  the  Rules  which 
have  to  be  followed  in  order  to  make  valid  and  strong 


A  THEOKY  OF  PKOBABLE  INFERENCE.    147 

Inductions  and  Hypotheses.  These  rules  can  all  be  re 
duced  to  a  single  one  ;  namely,  that  the  statistical  deduc 
tion  of  which  the  Induction  or  Hypothesis  is  the  inversion, 
must  be  valid  and  strong. 

We  have  seen  that  Inductions  and  Hypotheses  are  in 
ferences  from  the  conclusion  and  one  premise  of  a  sta 
tistical  syllogism  to  the  other  premise.  In  the  case  of 
hypothesis,  this  syllogism  is  called  the  explanation.  Thus 
in  one  of  the  examples  used  above,  we  suppose  the  cryp 
tograph  to  be  an  English  cipher,  because,  as  we  say,  this 
explains  the  observed  phenomena  that  there  are  about 
two  dozen  characters,  that  one  occurs  more  frequently 
than  the  rest,  especially  at  the  ends  of  words,  etc.  The 
explanation  is,  — 

Simple  English  ciphers  have  certain  peculiarities  ; 

This  is  a  simple  English  cipher : 

Hence,  this  necessarily  has  these  peculiarities. 

This  explanation  is  present  to  the  mind  of  the  reasoner, 
too ;  so  much  so,  that  we  commonly  say  that  the  hypo 
thesis  is  adopted  for  the  sake  of  the  explanation.  Of 
induction  we  do  not,  in  ordinary  language,  say  that  it 
explains  phenomena;  still,  the  statistical  deduction,  of 
which  it  is  the  inversion,  plays,  in  a  general  way,  the 
same  part  as  the  explanation  in  hypothesis.  From  a 
barrel  of  apples,  that  I  am  thinking  of  buying,  I  draw 
out  three  or  four  as  a  sample.  If  I  find  the  sample  some 
what  decayed,  I  ask  myself,  in  ordinary  language,  not 
'  Why  is  this  ?  "  but  «  How  is  this  ?  »  And  I  answer 
that  it  probably  comes  from  nearly  all  the  apples  in  the 
barrel  being  in  bad  condition.  The  distinction  between 
the  «  Why"  of  hypothesis  and  the  "  How"  of  induction 
is  not  very  great ;  both  ask  for  a  statistical  syllogism,  of 
which  the  observed  fact  shall  be  the  conclusion,  the 


148    A  THEOEY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

known  conditions  of  the  observation  one  premise,  and 
the  inductive  or  hypothetic  inference  the  other.  This 
statistical  syllogism  may  be  conveniently  termed  the  ex 
planatory  syllogism. 

In  order  that  an  induction  or  hypothesis  should  have 
any  validity  at  all,  it  is  requisite  that  the  explanatory 
syllogism  should  be  a  valid  statistical  deduction.  Its 
conclusion  must  not  merely  follow  from  the  premises, 
but  follow  from  them  upon  the  principle  of  probability. 
The  inversion  of  ordinary  syllogism  does  not  give  rise 
to  an  induction  or  hypothesis.  The  statistical  syllogism 
of  Form  1Y.  is  invertlble,  because  it  proceeds  upon  the 
principle  of  an  approximate  equality  between  the  ratio 
of  P's  in  the  whole  class  and  the  ratio  in  a  well-drawn 
sample,  and  because  equality  is  a  convertible  relation. 
But  ordinary  syllogism  is  based  upon  the  property  of  the 
relation  of  containing  and  contained,  and  that  is  not  a 
convertible  relation.  There  is,  however,  a  way  in  which 
ordinary  syllogism  may  be  inverted ;  namely,  the  con 
clusion  and  either  of  the  premises  may  be  interchanged 
by  negativing  each  of  them.  This  is  the  way  in  which 
the  indirect,  or  apagogical,1  figures  of  syllogism  are  de 
rived  from  the  first,  and  in  which  the  modus  tollens  is 
derived  from  the  modus  ponens.  The  following  schemes 

show  this  :  — 

First  Figure. 

Rule.       AllJfisP; 
Case.        S  is  M : 
Result.     S  is  P. 


Second  Figure. 
Rule.  AllJfisP; 

Denial  of  Result.  S  is  not  P  : 
Denial  of  Case.      S  is  not  M. 


Third  Figure. 

Denial  of  Result.  S  is  not  P ; 
Case.  /Sis  M: 

Denial  of  Rule.     Some   M  is 


not  P. 

1  From  apagoge,  Aristotle's  name  for  the  rcductio  ad  alsurdum. 


A   THEORY    OF   PROBABLE   INFERENCE.        149 

Modus  Ponens. 

Rule.       If  A  is  true,  C  is  true ; 
Case.        In  a  certain  case  A  is  true : 
Result.     .'.  In  that  case  C  is  true. 


Modus  Tollens. 

Rule.      If   A  is   true,    C    is 

true; 
Denial  of  Result.   In  a  certain 

case  C  is  not  true  : 
Denial   of   Case.     .'.  In  that 

case  A  is  not  true. 


Modus  Innominatus. 

Case.   In  a  certain  case  A  is 

true; 
Denial  of  Result.  In  that  case 

C  is  not  true  : 
Denial  of  Rule.  .'.  If  A  is  true, 

C  is  not  necessarily  true. 


Now  suppose  we  ask  ourselves  what  would  be  the  re 
sult  of  thus  apagogically  inverting  a  statistical  deduction. 
Let  us  take,  for  example,  Form  IV  :  — 

The  $'s  are  a  numerous  random  sample  of  the  M 's ; 

The  proportion  r  of  the  M's  are  P's : 

Hence,  probably  about  the  proportion  r  of  the  S's  are  P's. 

The  ratio  r,  as  we  have  already  noticed,  is  not  neces 
sarily  perfectly  definite  ;  it  may  be  only  known  to  have 
a  certain  maximum  or  minimum  ;  in  fact,  it  may  have 
any  kind  of  indeterminacy.  Of  all  possible  values  be 
tween  0  and  1,  it  admits  of  some  and  excludes  others. 
The  logical  negative  of  the  ratio  r  is,  therefore,  itself  a 
ratio,  which  we  may  name  p  ;  it  admits  of  every  value 
which  r  excludes,  and  excludes  every  value  of  which  r 
admits.  Transposing,  then,  the  major  premise  and  con 
clusion  of  our  statistical  deduction,  and  at  the  same  time 
denying  both,  we  obtain  the  following  inverted  form  :  — 


150        A   THEORY   OF   PROBABLE   INFERENCE. 

The  S's  are  a  numerous  random  sample  of  the  M 'a  ; 

The  proportion  p  of  the  S's  are  .P's  : 

Hence,  probably  about  the  proportion  p  of  the  M 'a  are  P's.1 

But  this  coincides  with  the  formula  of  Induction. 
Again,  let  us  apagogically  invert  the  statistical  deduction 
of  Form  IV.  (fo's).  This  form  is,  — 

Every  M  has,  for  example,  the  numerous  marks  P;,  P", 
P"',  etc. 

S  has  an  r-likeness  to  the  M'a  : 

Hence,  probably  and  approximately,  S  has  the  proportion 
r  of  the  marks  Pf,  P",  P"1,  etc. 

Transposing  the  minor  premise  and  conclusion,  at  the 
same  time  denying  both,  we  get  the  inverted  form, — 

Every  M  has,  for  example,  the  numerous  marks  Pf,  Prf, 
P"',  etc. 

S  has  the  proportion  p  of  the  marks  P',  P",  Pf!f,  etc. : 
Hence,  probably  and  approximately,  S  has  a  p-likeness  to 

the  class  of  M ?s. 

This  coincides  with  the  formula  of  Hypothesis.  Thus 
we  see  that  Induction  and  Hypothesis  are  nothing  but 
the  apagogical  inversions  of  statistical  deductions.  Ac 
cordingly,  when  r  is  taken  as  1,  so  that  p  is  "less  than  1," 
or  when  r  is  taken  as  0,  so  that  p  is  "  more  than  0,"  the 
induction  degenerates  into  a  syllogism  of  the  third  figure 
and  the  hypothesis  into  a  syllogism  of  the  second  figure. 

1  The  conclusion  of  the  statistical  deduction  is  here  regarded  as  being 
"the  proportion  r  of  the  S's  are  P's,"  and  the  words  "probably  about" 
as  indicating  the  modality  with  which  this  conclusion  is  drawn  and  held 
for  true.  It  would  be  equally  true  to  consider  the  "probably  about"  as 
forming  part  of  the  contents  of  the  conclusion  ;  only  from  that  point  of 
view  the  inference  ceases  to  be  probable,  and  becomes  rigidly  necessary, 
and  its  apagogical  inversion  is  also  a  necessary  inference  presenting  no 
particular  interest. 


A  THEORY  OF  PEOBABLE  INFERENCE.    151 

In  these  special  cases,  there  is  no  very  essential  difference 
between  the  mode  of  reasoning  in  the  direct  and  in  the 
apagogical  form.  But,  in  general,  while  the  probability 
of  the  two  forms  is  precisely  the  same,  —  in  this  sense, 
that  for  any  fixed  proportion  of  _P's  among  the  M'a 
(or  of  marks  of  jS9s  among  the  marks  of  the  M's)  the 
probability  of  any  given  error  in  the  concluded  value  is 
precisely  the  same  in  the  indirect  as  it  is  in  the  direct 
form,  —  yet  there  is  this  striking  difference,  that  a  multi 
plication  of  instances  will  in  the  one  case  confirm,  and 
in  the  other  modify,  the  concluded  value  of  the  ratio. 

We  are  thus  led  to  another  form  for  our  rule  of  validity 
of  ampliative  inference ;  namely,  instead  of  saying  that 
the  explanatory  syllogism  must  be  a  good  probable  de 
duction,  we  may  say  that  the  syllogism  of  which  the 
induction  or  hypothesis  is  the  apagogical  modification 
(in  the  traditional  language  of  logic,  the  reduction)  must 
be  valid. 

Probable  inferences,  though  valid,  may  still  differ  in 
their  strength.  A  probable  deduction  has  ,a  greater  or 
less  probable  error  in  the  concluded  ratio.  When  r  is  a 
definite  number  the  probable  error  is  also  definite ;  but 
as  a  general  rule  we  can  only  assign  maximum  and  mini 
mum  values  of  the  probable  error.  The  probable  error 
is,  in  fact, — 


0.477  V^-^ 
n 

where  n  is  the  number  of  independent  instances.  The 
same  formula  gives  the  probable  error  of  an  induction  or 
hypothesis  ;  only  that  in  these  cases,  r  being  wholly  inde 
terminate,  the  minimum  value  is  zero,  and  the  maximum 
is  obtained  by  putting  r  =  J. 


152    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

VII. 

Although  the  rule  given  above  really  contains  all  the 
conditions  to  which  Inductions  and  Hypotheses  need  to 
conform,  yet  inasmuch  as  there  are  many  delicate  ques 
tions  in  regard  to  the  application  of  it,  and  particularly 
since  it  is  of  that  nature  that  a  violation  of  it,  if  not 
too  gross,  may  not  absolutely  destroy  the  virtue  of  the 
reasoning,  a  somewhat  detailed  study  of  its  requirements 
in  regard  to  each  of  the  premises  of  the  argument  is  still 
needed. 

The  first  premise  of  a  scientific  inference  is  that  certain 
things  (in  the  case  of  induction)  or  certain  characters 
(in  the  case  of  hypothesis)  constitute  a  fairly  chosen 
sample  of  the  class  of  things  or  the  run  of  characters 
from  which  they  have  been  drawn. 

The  rule  requires  that  the  sample  should  be  drawn  at 
random  and  independently  from  the  whole  lot  sampled. 
That  is  to  say,  the  sample  must  be  taken  according  to  a 
precept  or  method  which,  being  applied  over  and  over 
again  indefinitely,  would  in  the  long  run  result  in  the 
drawing  of  any  one  set  of  instances  as  often  as  any  other 
set  of  the  same  number. 

The  needfulness  of  this  rule  is  obvious  ;  the  difficulty 
is  to  know  how  we  are  to  carry  it  out.  The  usual  method 
is  mentally  to  run  over  the  lot  of  objects  or  characters  to 
be  sampled,  abstracting  our  attention  from  their  peculi 
arities,  and  arresting  ourselves  at  this  one  or  that  one 
from  motives  wholly  unconnected  with  those  peculiarities. 
But  this  abstention  from  a  further  determination  of  our 
choice  often  demands  an  effort  of  the  will  that  is  beyond 
our  strength ;  and  in  that  case  a  mechanical  contrivance 
may  be  called  to  our  aid.  We  may,  for  example,  number 
all  the  objects  of  the  lot,  and  then  draw  numbers  by 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    153 

means  of  a  roulette,  or  other  such  instrument.  We  may 
even  go  so  far  as  to  say  that  this  method  is  the  type  of 
all  random  drawing ;  for  when  we  abstract  our  attention 
from  the  peculiarities  of  objects,  the  psychologists  tell  us 
that  what  we  do  is  to  substitute  for  the  images  of  sense 
certain  mental  signs,  and  when  we  proceed  to  a  random 
and  arbitrary  choice  among  these  abstract  objects  we  are 
governed  by  fortuitous  determinations  of  the  nervous  sys 
tem,  which  in  this  case  serves  the  purpose  of  a  roulette. 

The  drawing  of  objects  at  random  is  an  act  in  which 
honesty  is  called  for  ;  and  it  is  often  hard  enough  to  be 
sure  that  we  have  dealt  honestly  with  ourselves  in  the 
matter,  and  still  more  hard  to  be  satisfied  of  the  honesty 
of  another.  Accordingly,  one  method  of  sampling  has 
come  to  be  preferred  in  argumentation  ;  namely,  to  take 
of  the  class  to  be  sampled  all  the  objects  of  which  we 
have  a  sufficient  knowledge.  Sampling  is,  however,  a 
real  art,  well  deserving  an  extended  study  by  itself :  to 
enlarge  upon  it  here  would  lead  us  aside  from  our  main 
purpose. 

Let  us  rather  ask  what  will  be  the  effect  upon  inductive 
inference  of  an  imperfection  in  the  strictly  random  char 
acter  of  the  sampling.  Suppose  that,  instead  of  using 
such  a  precept  of  selection  that  any  one  M  would  in  the 
long  run  be  chosen  as  often  as  any  other,  we  used  a 
precept  which  would  give  a  preference  to  a  certain  half 
of  the  J/'s,  so  that  they  would  be  drawn  twice  as  often 
as  the  rest.  If  we  were  to  draw  a  numerous  sample  by 
such  a  precept,  and  if  we  were  to  find  that  the  proportion 
p  of  the  sample  consisted  of  JP's,  the  inference  that  we 
should  be  regularly  entitled  to  make  would  be,  that  among 
all  the  M'a,  counting  the  preferred  half  for  two  each,  the 
proportion  p  would  be  P's.  But  this  regular  inductive 
inference  being  granted,  from  it  we  could  deduce  by 


154    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

arithmetic  the  further  conclusion  that,  counting  the  M's 
for  one  each,  the  proportion  of  P's  among  them  must 
(p  being  over  f  )  lie  between  |  p  +  \  and  f  p  —  J.  Hence, 
if  more  than  two  thirds  of  the  instances  drawn  by  the  use 
of  the  false  precept  were  found  to  be  P's,  we  should  be 
entitled  to  conclude  that  more  than  half  of  all  the  M's 
were  P's.  Thus,  without  allowing  ourselves  to  be  led 
away  into  a  mathematical  discussion,  we  can  easily  see 
that,  in  general,  an  imperfection  of  that  kind  in  the 
random  character  of  the  sampling  will  only  weaken  the 
inductive  conclusion,  and  render  the  concluded  ratio  less 
determinate,  but  will  not  necessarily  destroy  the  force 
of  the  argument  completely.  In  particular,  when  p  ap 
proximates  towards  1  or  0,  the  effect  of  the  imperfect 
sampling  will  be  but  slight. 

Nor  must  we  lose  sight  of  the  constant  tendency  of  the 
inductive  process  to  correct  itself.  This  is  of  its  essence. 
This  is  the  marvel  of  it.  The  probability  of  its  conclusion 
only  consists  in  the  fact  that  if  the  true  value  of  the  ratio 
sought  has  not  been  reached,  an  extension  of  the  induc 
tive  process  will  lead  to  a  closer  approximation.  Thus, 
even  though  doubts  may  be  entertained  whether  one  se 
lection  of  instances  is  a  random  one,  yet  a  different  se 
lection,  made  by  a  different  method,  will  be  likely  to  vary 
from  the  normal  in  a  different  way,  and  if  the  ratios 
derived  from  such  different  selections  are  nearly  equal, 
they  may  be  presumed  to  be  near  the  truth.  This  con 
sideration  makes  it  extremely  advantageous  in  all  ampli- 
ative  reasoning  to  fortify  one  method  of  investigation  by 
another.1  Still  we  must  not  allow  ourselves  to  trust  so 

1  This  I  conceive  to  be  all  the  truth  there  is  in  the  doctrine  of  Bacon 
and  Mill  regarding  different  Methods  of  Experimental  Inquiry.  The  main 
proposition  of  Bacon  and  Mill's  doctrine  is,  that  in  order  to  prove  that  all 
M 'a  are  P's,  we  should  not  only  take  random  instances  of  the  M' s  and 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    155 

much  to  this  virtue  of  induction  as  to  relax  our  efforts 
towards  making  our  drawings  of  instances  as  random 
and  independent  as  we  can.  For  if  we  infer  a  ratio  from 
a  number  of  different  inductions,  the  magnitude  of  its 
probable  error  will  depend  very  much  more  on  the  worst 
than  on  the  best  inductions  used. 

We  have,  thus  far,  supposed  that  although  the  selection 
of  instances  is  not  exactly  regular,  yet  the  precept  fol 
lowed  is  such  that  every  unit  of  the  lot  would  eventually 
get  drawn.  But  very  often  it  is  impracticable  so  to  draw 
our  instances,  for  the  reason  that  a  part  of  the  lot  to  be 
sampled  is  absolutely  inaccessible  to  our  powers  of  obser 
vation.  If  we  want  to  know  whether  it  will  be  profit 
able  to  open  a  mine,  we  sample  the  ore ;  but  in  advance 
of  our  mining  operations,  we  can  obtain  only  what  ore 
lies  near  the  surface.  Then,  simple  induction  becomes 
worthless,  and  another  method  must  be  resorted  to.  Sup 
pose  we  wish  to  make  an  induction  regarding  a  series 
of  events  extending  from  the  distant  past  to  the  distant 
future  ;  only  those  events  of  the  series  which  occur  within 
the  period  of  time  over  which  available  history  extends 
can  be  taken  as  instances.  Within  this  period  we  may 
find  that  the  events  of  the  class  in  question  present  some 
uniform  character ;  yet  how  do  we  know  but  this  uni 
formity  was  suddenly  established  a  little  while  before  the 
history  commenced,  or  will  suddenly  break  up  a  little 
while  after  it  terminates  ?  Now,  whether  the  uniformity 

examine  them  to  see  that  they  are  Ps,  but  we  should  also  take  instances 
of  not-P's  and  examine  them  to  see  that  they  are  not-J/'s.  This  is  an 
excellent  way  of  fortifying  one  induction  by  another,  when  it  is  applicable; 
but  it  is  entirely  inapplicable  when  r  has  any  other  value  than  1  or  0. 
For,  in  general,  there  is  no  connection  between  the  proportion  of  M' s  that 
are  Ps  and  the  proportion  of  non-P's  that  are  non-l/'s.  A  very  small 
proportion  of  calves  may  be  monstrosities,  and  yet  a  very  large  proportion 
of  monstrosities  may  be  calves. 


156   A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

observed  consists  (1)  in  a  mere  resemblance  between  all 
the  phenomena,  or  (2)  in  their  consisting  of  a  disorderly 
mixture  of  two  kinds  in  a  certain  constant  proportion,  or 
(3)  in  the  character  of  the  events  being  a  mathematical 
function  of  the  time  of  occurrence, — in  any  of  these  cases 
we  can  make  use  of  an  apagoge  from  the  following  proba 
ble  deduction :  — 

Within  the  period  of  time  M,  a  certain  event  P  occurs ; 
S  is  a  period  of  time  taken  at  random  from  M,  and  more 
than  half  as  long : 

Hence,  probably  the  event  P  will  occur  within  the  time  S. 

Inverting  this  deduction,  we  have  the  following  ampli- 
ative  inference :  — 

S  is  a  period  of  time  taken  at  random  from  M9  and  more 

than  half  as  long  ; 

The  event  P  does  not  happen  in  the  time  S : 

Hence,   probably   the    event   P  does   not   happen   in  the 

period  M. 

The  probability  of  the  conclusion  consists  in  this,  that 
we  here  follow  a  precept  of  inference,  which,  if  it  is  very 
often  applied,  will  more  than  half  the  time  lead  us  right. 
Analogous  reasoning  would  obviously  apply  to  any  por 
tion  of  an  unidimensional  continuum,  which  might  be 
similar  to  periods  of  time.  This  is  a  sort  of  logic  which 
is  often  applied  by  physicists  in  what  is  called  extrapola 
tion  of  an  empirical  law.  As  compared  with  a  typical 
induction,  it  is  obviously  an  excessively  weak  kind  of  in 
ference.  Although  indispensable  in  almost  every  branch 
of  science,  it  can  lead  to  no  solid  conclusions  in  regard  to 
what  is  remote  from  the  field  of  direct  perception,  unless 
it  be  bolstered  up  in  certain  ways  to  which  we  shall  have 
occasion  to  refer  further  on. 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    157 

Let  us  now  consider  another  class  of  difficulties  in 
regard  to  the  rule  that  the  samples  must  be  drawn  at 
random  and  independently.  In  the  first  place,  what  if 
the  lot  to  be  sampled  be  infinite  in  number  ?  In  what 
sense  could  a  random  sample  be  taken  from  a  lot  like 
that  ?  A  random  sample  is  one  taken  according  to  a 
method  that  would,  in  the  long  run,  draw  any  one  object 
as  often  as  any  other.  In  what  sense  can  such  drawing 
be  made  from  an  infinite  class  ?  The  answer  is  not  far 
to  seek.  Conceive  a  cardboard  disk  revolving  in  its  own 
plane  about  its  centre,  and  pretty  accurately  balanced, 
so  that  when  put  into  rotation  it  shall  be  about1  as  likely 
to  come  to  rest  in  any  one  position  as  in  any  other ;  and 
let  a  fixed  pointer  indicate  a  position  on  the  disk:  the 
number  of  points  on  the  circumference  is  infinite,  and  on 
rotating  the  disk  repeatedly  the  pointer  enables  us  to 
make  a  selection  from  this  infinite  number.  Tbis  means 
merely  that  although  the  points  are  innumerable,  yet 
there  is  a  certain  order  among  them  that  enables  us  to 
run  them  through  and  pick  from  them  as  from  a  very 
numerous  collection.  In  such  a  case,  and  in  no  other, 
can  an  infinite  lot  be  sampled.  But  it  would  be  equally 
true  to  say  that  a  finite  lot  can  be  sampled  only  on 
condition  that  it  can  be  regarded  as  equivalent  to  an 
infinite  lot.  For  the  random  sampling  of  a  finite  class 
supposes  the  possibility  of  drawing  out  an  object,  throw 
ing  it  back,  and  continuing  this  process  indefinitely ;  so 
that  what  is  really  sampled  is  not  the  finite  collection  of 
things,  but  the  unlimited  number  of  possible  drawings. 

But  though  there  is  thus  no  insuperable  difficulty  in 
sampling  an  infinite  lot,  yet  it  must  be  remembered  that 
the  conclusion  of  inductive  reasoning  only  consists  in  the 

1  I  say  about,  because  the  doctrine  of  probability  only  deals  with  ap 
proximate  evaluations. 


158    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

approximate  evaluation  of  a  ratio,  so  that  it  never  can 
authorize  us  to  conclude  that  in  an  infinite  lot  sampled 
there  exists  no  single  exception  to  a  rule.  Although  all 
the  planets  are  found  to  gravitate  toward  one  another, 
this  affords  not  the  slightest  direct  reason  for  denying 
that  among  the  innumerable  orbs  of  heaven  there  may 
be  some  \vhich  exert  no  such  force.  Although  at  no 
point  of  space  where  we  have  yet  been  have  we  found 
any  possibility  of  motion  in  a  fourth  dimension,  yet  this 
does  not  tend  to  show  (by  simple  induction,  at  least) 
that  space  has  absolutely  but  three  dimensions.  Although 
all  the  bodies  we  have  had  the  opportunity  of  examining 
appear  to  obey  the  law  of  inertia,  this  does  not  prove 
that  atoms  and  atomicules  are  subject  to  the  same  law. 
Such  conclusions  must  be  reached,  if  at  all,  in  some 
other  way  than  by  simple  induction.  This  latter  may 
show  that  it  is  unlikely  that,  in  my  lifetime  or  yours, 
things  so  extraordinary  should  be  found,  but  do  not  war 
rant  extending  the  prediction  into  the  indefinite  future. 
And  experience  shows  it  is  not  safe  to  predict  that  such 
and  such  a  fact  will  never  be  met  with. 

If  the  different  instances  of  the  lot  sampled  are  to 
be  drawn  independently,  as  the  rule  requires,  then  the 
fact  that  an  instance  has  been  drawn  once  must  not 
prevent  its  being  drawn  again.  It  is  true  that  if  the 
objects  remaining  unchosen  are  very  much  more  numer 
ous  than  those  selected,  it  makes  practically  no  difference 
whether  they  have  a  chance  of  being  drawn  again  or  not, 
since  that  chance  is  in  any  case  very  small.  Proba 
bility  is  wholly  an  affair  of  approximate,  not  at  all  of 
exact,  measurement ;  so  that  when  the  class  sampled  is 
very  large,  there  is  no  need  of  considering  whether  ob 
jects  can  be  drawn  more  than  once  or  not.  But  in  what 
is  known  as  "  reasoning  from  analogy,"  the  class  sam- 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    159 

pled  is  small,  and  no  instance  is  taken  twice.  For  ex 
ample  :  we  know  that  of  the  major  planets  the  Earth, 
Mars,  Jupiter,  and  Saturn  revolve  on  their  axes,  and 
we  conclude  that  the  remaining  four,  Mercury,  Venus, 
Uranus,  and  Neptune,  probably  do  the  like.  This  is 
essentially  different  from  an  inference  from  what  has 
been  found  in  drawings  made  hitherto,  to  what  will  be 
found  in  indefinitely  numerous  drawings  to  be  made 
hereafter.  Our  premises  here  are  that  the  Earth,  Mars, 
Jupiter,  and  Saturn  are  a  random  sample  of  a  natural 
class  of  major  planets,  —  a  class  which,  though  (so  far 
as  we  know)  it  is  very  small,  yet  may  be  very  extensive, 
comprising  whatever  there  may  be  that  revolves  in  a 
circular  orbit  around  a  great  sun,  is  nearly  spherical, 
shines  with  reflected  light,  is  very  large,  etc.  Now  the 
examples  of  major  planets  that  we  can  examine  all  ro 
tate  on  their  axes ;  whence  we  suppose  that  Mercury, 
Venus,  Uranus,  and  Neptune,  since  they  possess,  so  far 
as  we  know,  all  the  properties  common  to  the  natural 
class  to  which  the  Earth,  Mars,  Jupiter,  and  Saturn  be 
long,  possess  this  property  likewise.  The  points  to  be 
observed  are,  first,  that  any  small  class  of  things  may  be 
regarded  as  a  mere  sample  of  an  actual  or  possible  large 
class  having  the  same  properties  and  subject  to  the  same 
conditions;  second,  that  while  we  do  not  know  what  all 
these  properties  and  conditions  are,  we  do  know  some  of 
them,  which  some  may  be  considered  as  a  random  sam 
ple  of  all ;  third,  that  a  random  selection  without  re 
placement  from  a  small  class  may  be  regarded  as  a  true 
random  selection  from  that  infinite  class  of  which  the 
finite  class  is  a  random  selection.  The  formula  of  the 
analogical  inference  presents,  therefore,  three  premises, 
thus :  — 


160   A  THEOEY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

/S7,  S",  S"f  are  a  random  sample  of  some  undefined  class  X} 
of  whose  characters  Pf,  P",  P"1  are  samples. 
Q  is  P,  P",  P'". 
S',  S",  S">,  are  7?'s. 
Hence,  Q  is  an  R. 

"We  have  evidently  here  an  induction  and  an  hypothe 
sis  followed  by  a  deduction  ;  thus,  — 


Every  X  is,  for  example,  P', 
P",  P''7,  etc. 

Q  is  found  to  be  P',  P", 
P>",  etc. 

Hence,  hypothetically,  Q  is 


*Sf/,  £",  /S^',  etc.,  are  samples 


of  the 


S',  S",  S>»,  etc.,  are  found 
to  be  It's. 

Hence,  inductively,  every  X 


is  an  R. 
Hence,  deductively,  Q  is  an  R.*' 

An  argument  from  analogy  may  be  strengthened  by 
the  addition  of  instance  after  instance  to  the  premises, 
until  it  loses  its  ampliative  character  by  the  exhaustion 
of  the  class  and  becomes  a  mere  deduction  of  that  kind 
called  complete  induction,  in  which,  however,  some  shadow 

*  That  this  is  really  a  correct  analysis  of  the  reasoning  can  be  shown  by 
the  theory  of  probabilities.     For  the  expression 

(P  +  g)  !      (TT  +  P)  •      (P  +  ^)!  (?  +  P)! 

p  \  q  !  7T  !  p !        (p  -j-  TT  -{-  g  -f-  p) ! 

expresses  at  once  the  probability  of  two  events  ;  namely,  it  expresses 
first  the  probability  that  of  p  -f  <7  objects  drawn  without  replacement 
from  a  lot  consisting  of  p  -f  TT  objects  having  the  character  E  together 
with  q  -f-  p  not  having  this  character,  the  number  of  those  drawn  having 
this  character  will  bejo;  and  second,  the  same  expression  denotes  the 
probability  that  if  among  p  -f-  TT  -f-  q  -f-  p  objects  drawn  at  random  from 
an  infmita  class  (containing  no  matter  what  proportion  of  It's  to  nori-72's), 
it  happens  that  p  -f-  TT  have  the  character  72,  then  among  any  ^  -f-  g  of 
them,  designated  at  random,  p  will  have  the  same  character.  Thus  we 
see  that  the  chances  in  reference  to  drawing  without  replacement  from  a 
finite  class  are  precisely  the  same  as  those  in  reference  to  a  class  which 
has  been  drawn  at  random  from  an  infinite  class. 


A  THEOKY  OF  PROBABLE  INFEKENCE.   161 

of  the  inductive  character  remains,  as  this  name  im 
plies. 

VIII. 

Take  any  human  being,  at  random,  —  say  Queen  Eliz 
abeth.  Now  a  little  more  than  half  of  all  the  human 
beings  who  have  ever  existed  have  been  males ;  but  it 
does  not  follow  that  it  is  a  little  more  likely  than  not 
that  Queen  Elizabeth  was  a  male,  since  we  know  she  was 
a  woman.  Nor,  if  we  had  selected  Julius  Caesar,  would 
it  be  only  a  little  more  likely  than  not  that  he  was  a 
male.  It  is  true  that  if  we  were  to  go  on  drawing  at 
random  an  indefinite  number  of  instances  of  human  be 
ings,  a  slight  excess  over  one-half  would  be  males.  But 
that  which  constitutes  the  probability  of  an  inference  is 
the  proportion  of  true  conclusions  among  all  those  which 
could  be  derived  from  the  same  precept.  Now  a  precept 
of  inference,  being  a  rule  which  the  mind  is  to  follow, 
changes  its  character  and  becomes  different  when  the 
case  presented  to  the  mind  is  essentially  different.  When, 
knowing  that  the  proportion  r  of  all  M* s  are  P's,  I  draw 
an  instance,  S,  of  an  M,  without  any  other  knowledge  of 
whether  it  is  a  P  or  not,  and  infer  with  probability,  r, 
that  it  is  P,  the  case  presented  to  my  mind  is  very 
different  from  what  it  is  if  I  have  such  other  knowledge. 
In  short,  I  cannot  make  a  valid  probable  inference  with 
out  taking  into  account  whatever  knowledge  I  have  (or, 
at  least,  whatever  occurs  to  my  mind)  that  bears  upon 
the  question. 

The  same  principle  may  be  applied  to  the  statistical 
deduction  of  Form  IV.  If  the  major  premise,  that  the 
proportion  r  of  the  3/'s  are  P's,  be  laid  down  first, 
before  the  instances  of  Ms  are  drawn,  we  really  draw  our 
inference  concerning  those  instances  (that  the  proper- 


162    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

tion  r  of  them  will  be  P's)  in  advance  of  the  drawing, 
and  therefore  before  we  know  whether  they  are  P's  or 
not.  But  if  we  draw  the  instances  of  the  M'B  first,  and 
after  the  examination  of  them  decide  what  we  will  select 
for  the  predicate  of  our  major  premise,  the  inference 
will  generally  be  completely  fallacious.  In  short,  we 
have  the  rule  that  the  major  term  P  must  be  decided 
upon  in  advance  of  the  examination  of  the  sample ;  and 
in  like  manner  in  Form  IV.  (bis)  the  minor  term  S  must 
be  decided  upon  in  advance  of  the  drawing. 

The  same  rule  follows  us  into  the  logic  of  induction 
and  hypothesis.  If  in  sampling  any  class,  say  the  M's, 
we  first  decide  what  the  character  P  is  for  which  we 
propose  to  sample  that  class,  and  also  how  many  instan 
ces  we  propose  to  draw,  our  inference  is  really  made 
before  these  latter  are  drawn,  that  the  proportion  of  P's 
in  the  whole  class  is  probably  about  the  same  as  among 
the  instances  that  are  to  be  drawn,  and  the  only  thing 
we  have  to  do  is  to  draw  them  and  observe  the  ratio. 
But  suppose  we  were  to  draw  our  inferences  without 
the  predesignation  of  the  character  P;  then  we  might  in 
every  case  find  some  recondite  character  in  which  those 
instances  would  all  agree.  That,  by  the  exercise  of 
sufficient  ingenuity,  we  should  be  sure  to  be  able  to  do 
this,  even  if  not  a  single  other  object  of  the  class  M 
possessed  that  character,  is  a  matter  of  demonstration. 
For  in  geometry  a  curve  may  be  drawn  through  any 
given  series  of  points,  without  passing  through  any  one 
of  another  given  series  of  points,  and  this  irrespective  of 
the  number  of  dimensions.  Now,  all  the  qualities  of 
objects  may  be  conceived  to  result  from  variations  of  a 
number  of  continuous  variables ;  hence  any  lot  of  ob 
jects  possesses  some  character  in  common,  not  possessed 
by  any  other.  It  is  true  that  if  the  universe  of  quality 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.   163 

is  limited,  this  is  not  altogether  true ;  but  it  remains 
true  that  unless  we  have  some  special  premise  from 
which  to  infer  the  contrary,  it  always  may  be  possible 
to  assign  some  common  character  of  the  instances  £',  S", 
S'",  etc.,  drawn  at  random  from  among  the  M' s,  which 
does  not  belong  to  the  M'a  generally.  So  that  if  the 
character  P  were  not  predesignate,  the  deduction  of 
which  our  induction  is  the  apagogical  inversion  would 
not  be  valid ;  that  is  to  say,  we  could  not  reason  that  if 
the  M'B  did  not  generally  possess  the  character  P,  it 
would  not  be  likely  that  the  £'s  should  all  possess  this 
character. 

I  take  from  a  biographical  dictionary  the  first  five 
names  of  poets,  with  their  ages  at  death.  They  are, 

Aagard,     died  at  48. 

Abeille,"      "      "  76. 

Abulola,      «      "  84. 

Abunowas,  "      "  48. 

Accords,      "      "  45. 

These  five  ages  have  the  following  characters  in  com 
mon  :  — 

1.  The   difference  of  the  two  digits   composing  the 
number,  divided  by  three,  leaves  a  remainder  of  one. 

2.  The  first  digit  raised  to  the  power  indicated  by  the 
second,  and  then  divided  by  three,  leaves  a  remainder  of 
one. 

3.  The  sum  of  the  prime  factors  of  each  age,  including 
one  as  a  prime  factor,  is  divisible  by  three. 

Yet  there  is  not  the  smallest  reason  to  believe  that  the 
next  poet's  age  would  possess  these  characters. 

Here  we  have  a  conditio  sine  qud  non  of  valid  induc 
tion  which  has  been  singularly  overlooked  by  those  who 
have  treated  of  the  logic  of  the  subject,  and  is  very  fre- 


164   A  THEORY  OF  PEOBABLE  INFERENCE. 

quently  violated  by  those  who  draw  inductions.  So  ac 
complished  a  reasoner  as  Dr.  Lyon  Playfair,  for  instance, 
has  written  a  paper  of  which  the  following  is  an  abstract. 
He  first  takes  the  specific  gravities  of  the  three  allotropic 
forms  of  carbon,  as  follows  :  — 

Diamond,  3.48 
Graphite,  2.29 
Charcoal,  1.88 

He  now  seeks  to  find  a  uniformity  connecting  these  three 
instances;  and  he  discovers  that  the  atomic  weight  of 
carbon,  being  12, 

Sp.  gr.  diamond  nearly  =  3.46  — 


"      "    graphite     "       =  2.29  =  y!2 
"      "    charcoal     «       =  1.86  =  j/12 

This,  he  thinks,  renders  it  probable  that  the  specific 
gravities  of  the  allotropic  forms  of  other  elements  would, 
if  we  knew  them,  be  found  to  equal  the  different  roots  of 
their  atomic  weight.  But  so  far,  the  character  in  which 
the  instances  agree  not  having  been  predesignated,  the 
induction  can  serve  only  to  suggest  a  question,  and  ought 
not  to  create  any  belief.  To  test  the  proposed  law,  he 
selects  the  instance  of  silicon,  which  like  carbon  exists 
in  a  diamond  and  in  a  graphitoidal  condition.  He  finds 
for  the  specific  gravities  — 

Diamond  silicon,     2.47 
.    Graphite  silicon,     2.33.* 

*  The  author  ought  to  have  noted  that  this  number  is  open  to  some 
doubt,  since  the  specific  gravity  of  this  form  of  silicon  appears  to  vary 
largely.  If  a  different  value  had  suited  the  theory  better,  he  might  have 
been  able  to  find  reasons  for  preferring  that  other  value.  But  I  do  not 
mean  to  imply  that  Dr.  Playfair  has  not  dealt  with  perfect  fairness  with 
his  facts,  except  as  to  the  fallacy  which  I  point  out. 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    165 

Now,  the  atomic  weight  of  silicon,  that  of  carbon  being 
12,  can  only  be  taken  as  28.  But  2.47  does  not  approx 
imate  to  any  root  of  28.  It  is,  however,  nearly  the 
cube  root  of  14,  (<\X-i-  X  28  =  2.41),  while  2.33  is  nearly 
the  fourth  root  of  28  (v"28  =  2.30).  Dr.  Playfair  claims 
that  silicon  is  an  instance  satisfying  his  formula.  But 
in  fact  this  instance  requires  the  formula  to  be  modified ; 
and  the  modification  not  being  predesignate,  the  instance 
cannot  count.  Boron  also  exists  in  a  diamond  and  a 
graphitoidal  form ;  and  accordingly  Dr.  Playfair  takes 
this  as  his  next  example.  Its  atomic  weight  is  10.9,  and 
its  specific  gravity  is  2.68 ;  which  is  the  square  root  of 
f  X  10.9.  There  seems  to  be  here  a  further  modification 
of  the  formula  not  predesignated,  and  therefore  this  in 
stance  can  hardly  be  reckoned  as  confirmatory.  The 
next  instances  which  would  occur  to  the  mind  of  any 
chemist  would  be  phosphorus  and  sulphur,  which  exist 
in  familiarly  known  allotropic  forms.  Dr.  Playfair  ad 
mits  that  the  specific  gravities  of  phosphorus  have  no 
relations  to  its  atomic  weight  at  all  analogous  to  those 
of  carbon.  The  different  forms  of  sulphur  have  nearly 
the  same  specific  gravity,  being  approximately  the  fifth 
root  of  the  atomic  weight  32.  Selenium  also  has  two 
.allotropic  forms,  whose  specific  gravities  are  4.8  and  4.3 ; 
one  of  these  follows  the  law,  while  the  other  does  not. 
For  tellurium  the  law  fails  altogether  ;  but  for  bromine 
and  iodine  it  holds.  Thus  the  number  of  specific  gravi 
ties  for  which  the  law  was  predesignate  are  8 ;  namely, 
2  for  phosphorus,  1  for  sulphur,  2  for  selenium,  1  for 
tellurium,  1  for  bromine,  and  1  for  iodine.  The  law 
holds  for  4  of  these,  and  the  proper  inference  is  that 
about  half  the  specific  gravities  of  metalloids  are  roots 
of  some  simple  ratio  of  their  atomic  weights. 

Having  thus   determined    this   ratio,   we   proceed   to 


166    A  THEORY  OF  PEOBABLE  INFERENCE. 

inquire  whether  an  agreement  half  the  time  with  the 
formula  constitutes  any  special  connection  between  the 
specific  gravity  and  the  atomic  weight  of  a  metalloid. 
As  a  test  of  this,  let  us  arrange  the  elements  in  the  order 
of  their  atomic  weights,  and  compare  the  specific  gravity 
of  the  first  with  the  atomic  weight  of  the  last,  that  of 
the  second  with  the  atomic  weight  of  the  last  but  one, 
and  so  on.  The  atomic  weights  are  — 

Boron,             10.9  Tellurium,  128.1 

Carbon,            12.0  Iodine,  126.9 

Silicon,            28.0  Bromine,  80.0 

Phosphorus,    31.0  Selenium,  79.1 

Sulphur,  32. 

There  are  three  specific  gravities  given  for  carbon,  and 
two  each  for  silicon,  phosphorus,  and  selenium.  The 
question,  therefore,  is,  whether  of  the  fourteen  specific 
gravities  as  many  as  seven  are  in  Playfair's  relation 
with  the  atomic  weights,  not  of  the  same  element,  but 
of  the  one  paired  with  it.  Now,  taking  the  original 
formula  of  Playfair  we  find 


Sp. 

gr. 

boron 

=  2.68 

^Te 

=  2 

.64 

3d 

Sp. 

gr. 

carbon 

=  1.88 

/V/I 

=  1 

.84 

2d 

Sp. 

gr. 

carbon 

=  2.29 

V* 

=  2 

.24 

1st 

Sp. 

gr. 

phosphorus 

=  1.83 

^/Se 

=  1 

.87 

2d 

Sp. 

gr. 

phosphorus 

=  2.10 

'V/Se 

=  2 

.07 

or  five  such  relations  without  counting  that  of  sulphur 
to  itself.  Next,  with  the  modification  introduced  by  Play- 
fair,  we  have 

1st  Sp.  gr.  silicon  =  2.47  $%  X  Br  =  2.51 

2d  Sp.  gr.  silicon  =  2.33  A/2  X  Br  =  2.33 

Sp.  gr.  iodine  =  4.95  ^2x0=  4.90 

1st  Sp.  gr.  carbon  =  3.48  ^  X  I    =  3.48 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    167 

It  thus  appears  that  there  is  no  more  frequent  agree 
ment  with  Playfair's  proposed  law  than  what  is  due  to 
chance.1 

Another  example  of  this  fallacy  was  "  Bode's  law  "  of 
the  relative  distances  of  the  planets,  which  was  shattered 
by  the  first  discovery  of  a  true  planet  after  its  enuncia 
tion.  In  fact,  this  false  kind  of  induction  is  extremely 
common  in  science  and  in  medicine.2  In  the  case  of 
hypothesis,  the  correct  rule  has  often  been  laid  down ; 
namely,  that  a  hypothesis  can  only  be  received  upon  the 
ground  of  its  having  been  verified  by  successful  prediction. 
The  term  predesignation  used  in  this  paper  appears  to  be 
more  exact,  inasmuch  as  it  is  not  at  all  requisite  that  the 
ratio  p  should  be  given  in  advance  of  the  examination  of 
the  samples.  Still,  since  p  is  equal  to  1  in  all  ordinary 
hypotheses,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  rule  of  pre 
diction,  so  far  as  it  goes,  coincides  with  that  here  laid 
down. 

We  have  now  to  consider  an  important  modification  of 
the  rule.  Suppose  that,  before  sampling  a  class  of  objects, 
we  have  predesignated  not  a  single  character  but  n  char 
acters,  for  which  we  propose  to  examine  the  samples. 
This  is  equivalent  to  making  n  different  inductions  from 
the  same  instances.  The  probable  error  in  this  case  is 
that  error  whose  probability  for  a  simple  induction  is  only 
(|)n,  and  the  theory  of  probabilities  shows  that  it  in- 

1  As  the  relations  of  the  different  powers  of  the  specific  gravity  would 
be  entirely  different  if  any  other  substance  than  water  were  assumed  as 
the  standard,  the  law  is  antecedently  in  the  highest  degree  improbable. 
This  makes  it  likely  that  some  fallacy  was  committed,  but  does  not  show 
what  it  was. 

2  The  physicians  seem  to  use  the  maxim  that  you  cannot  reason  from 
post  hoc  to  propter  hoc  to  mean  (rather  obscurely)  that  cases  must  not  be 
used  to  prove  a  proposition  that  has  only  been  suggested  by  these  cases 
themselves. 


168    A  THEOEY  OF  PEOBABLE  INFEEENCE. 

creases  but  slowly  with  n ;  in  fact,  for  n  —  1000  it  is  only 
about  five  times  as  great  as  for  n  =  1,  so  that  with  only 
25  times  as  many  instances  the  inference  would  be  as 
secure  for  the  former  value  of  n  as  with  the  latter ;  with 
100  times  as  many  instances  an  induction  in  which  n  — 
10,000,000,000  would  be  equally  secure.  Now  the  whole 
universe  of  characters  will  never  contain  such  a  number 
as  the  last ;  and  the  same  may  be  said  of  the  universe  of 
objects  in  the  case  of  hypothesis.  So  that,  without  any 
voluntary  predesignation,  the  limitation  of  our  imagina 
tion  and  experience  amounts  to  a  predesignation  far 
within  those  limits ;  and  we  thus  see  that  if  the  number 
of  instances  be  very  great  indeed,  the  failure  to  predes- 
ignate  is  not  an  important  fault.  Of  characters  at  all 
striking,  or  of  objects  at  all  familiar,  the  number  will 
seldom  reach  1,000 ;  and  of  very  striking  characters  or 
very  familiar  objects  the  number  is  still  less.  So  that  if 
a  large  number  of  samples  of  a  class  are  found  to  have 
some  very  striking  character  in  common,  or  if  a  large 
number  of  characters  of  one  object  are  found  to  be  pos 
sessed  by  a  very  familiar  object,  we  need  not  hesitate  to 
infer,  in  the  first  case,  that  the  same  characters  belong 
to  the  whole  class,  or,  in  the  second  case,  that  the  two 
objects  are  practically  identical ;  remembering  only  that 
the  inference  is  less  to  be  relied  upon  than  it  would  be 
had  a  deliberate  predesignation  been  made.  This  is  no 
doubt  the  precise  significance  of  the  rule  sometimes  laid 
down,  that  a  hypothesis  ought  to  be  simple,  —  simple 
here  being  taken  in  the  sense  of  familiar. 

This  modification  of  the  rule  shows  that,  even  in  the 
absence  of  voluntary  predesignation,  some  slight  weight 
is  to  be  attached  to  an  induction  or  hypothesis.  And 
perhaps  when  the  number  of  instances  is  not  very  small, 
it  is  enough  to  make  it  worth  while  to  subject  the  in- 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    169 

ference  to  a  regular  test.  But  our  natural  tendency  will 
be  to  attach  too  much  importance  to  sucli  suggestions, 
and  we  shall  avoid  waste  of  time  in  passing  them  by 
without  notice  until  some  stronger  plausibility  presents 
itself. 

IX. 

In  almost  every  case  in  which  we  make  an  induction 
or  a  hypothesis,  we  have  some  knowledge  which  renders 
our  conclusion  antecedently  likely  or  unlikely.  The  ef 
fect  of  such  knowledge  is  very  obvious,  and  needs  no 
remark.  But  what  also  very  often  happens  is  that  we 
have  some  knowledge,  which,  though  not  of  itself  bearing 
upon  the  conclusion  of  the  scientific  argument,  yet  serves 
to  render  our  inference  more  or  less  probable,  or  even 
to  alter  the  terms  of  it.  Suppose,  for  example,  that  we 
antecedently  know  that  all  the  M's  strongly  resemble 
one  another  in  regard  to  characters  of  a  certain  order. 
Then,  if  we  find  that  a  moderate  number  of  M9s  taken 
at  random  have  a  certain  character,  P,  of  that  order,  we 
shall  attach  a  greater  weight  to  the  induction  than  we 
should  do  if  we  had  not  that  antecedent  knowledge. 
Thus,  if  we  find  that  a  certain  sample  of  gold  has  a 
certain  chemical  character, —  since  we  have  very  strong 
reason  for  thinking  that  all  gold  is  alike  in  its  chemical 
characters,  —  we  shall  have  no  hesitation  in  extending 
the  proposition  from  the  one  sample  to  gold  in  general. 
Or  if  we  know  that  among  a  certain  people,  —  say  the 
Icelanders,  —  an  extreme  uniformity  prevails  in  regard 
to  all  their  ideas,  then,  if  we  find  that  two  or  three  in 
dividuals  taken  at  random  from  among  them  have  all 
any  particular  superstition,  we  shall  be  the  more  ready 
to  infer  that  it  belongs  to  the  whole  people  from  what 
we  know  of  their  uniformity.  The  influence  of  this  sort 


170   A  THEORY  OF  PKOBABLE  INFERENCE. 

of  uniformity  upon  inductive  conclusions  was  strongly  in 
sisted  upon  by  Philodemus,  and  some  very  exact  concep 
tions  in  regard  to  it  may  be  gathered  from  the  writings 
of  Mr.  Galton.  Again,  suppose  we  know  of  a  certain 
character,  P,  that  in  whatever  classes  of  a  certain  des 
cription  it  is  found  at  all,  to  those  it  usually  belongs  as 
a  universal  character ;  then  any  induction  which  goes 
toward  showing  that  all  the  M's  are  P  will  be  greatly 
strengthened.  Thus  it  is  enough  to  find  that  two  or 
three  individuals  taken  at  random  from  a  genus  of  ani 
mals  have  three  toes  on  each  foot,  to  prove  that  the  same 
is  true  of  the  whole  genus  ;  for  we  know  that  this  is  a 
generic  character.  On  the  other  hand,  we  shall  be  slow 
to  infer  that  all  the  animals  of  a  genus  have  the  same 
color,  because  color  varies  in  almost  every  genus.  This 
kind  of  uniformity  seemed  to  J.  S.  Mill  to  have  so  con 
trolling  an  influence  upon  inductions,  that  he  has  taken 
it  as  the  centre  of  his  whole  theory  of  the  subject. 

Analogous  considerations  modify  our  hypothetic  infer 
ences.  The  sight  of  two  or  three  words  will  be  sufficient 
to  convince  me  that  a  certain  manuscript  was  written  by 
myself,  because  I  know  a  certain  look  is  peculiar  to  it. 
So  an  analytical  chemist,  who  wishes  to  know  whether  a 
solution  contains  gold,  will  be  completely  satisfied  if  it 
gives  a  precipitate  of  the  purple  of  cassius  with  chloride 
of  tin  ;  because  this  proves  that  either  gold  or  some  hith 
erto  unknown  substance  is  present.  These  are  examples 
of  characteristic  tests.  Again,  we  may  know  of  a  certain 
person,  that  whatever  opinions  he  holds  he  carries  out 
with  uncompromising  rigor  to  their  utmost  logical  con 
sequences  ;  then,  -if  we  find  his  views  bear  some  of  the 
marks  of  any  ultra  school  of  thought,  we  shall  readily 
conclude  that  he  fully  adheres  to  that  school. 

There  are  thus  four  different  kinds  of  uniformity  and 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    171 

non-uniformity  which  may  influence  our  ampliative  in 
ferences  :  — 

1.  The  members  of  a  class  may  present  a  greater  or 
less  general  resemblance  as  regards  a  certain  line  of  char 
acters. 

2.  A  character  may  have  a  greater  or  less  tendency 
to  be  present  or  absent  throughout  the  whole  of  whatever 
classes  of  certain  kinds. 

3.  A  certain  set  of   characters   may  be  more  or  less 
intimately  connected,  so  as  to  be  probably  either  present 
or  absent  together  in  certain  kinds  of  objects. 

4.  An   object   may   have   more    or  less    tendency   to 
possess  the  whole  of  certain  sets  of  characters  when  it 
possesses  any  of  them. 

A  consideration  of  this  sort  may  be  so  strong  as  to 
amount  to  demonstration  of  the  conclusion.  In  this  case, 
the  inference  is  mere  deduction, —  that  is,  the  application 
of  a  general  rule  already  established.  In  other  cases,  the 
consideration  of  uniformities  will  not  wholly  destroy  the 
inductive  or  hypothetic  character  of  the  inference,  but 
will  only  strengthen  or  weaken  it  by  the  addition  of  a 
new  argument  of  a  deductive  kind. 


X. 

We  have  thus  seen  how,  in  a  general  way,  the  processes 
of  inductive  and  hypothetic  inference  are  able  to  afford 
answers  to  our  questions,  though  these  may  relate  to 
matters  beyond  our  immediate  ken.  In  short,  a  theory 
of  the  logic  of  verification  has  been  sketched  out.  This 
theory  will  have  to  meet  the  objections  of  two  opposing 
schools  of  logic. 

The  first  of  these  explains  induction  by  what  is  called 
the  doctrine  of  Inverse  Probabilities,  of  which  the  follow- 


172   A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

ing  is  an  example :  Suppose  an  ancient  denizen  of  the 
Mediterranean  coast,  who  had  never  heard  of  the  tides, 
had  wandered  to  the  shore  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  and 
there,  on  a  certain  number  m  of  successive  days  had 
witnessed  the  rise  of  the  sea.  Then,  says  Quetelet,  he 
would  have  been  entitled  to  conclude  that  there  was  a 
probability  equal  to  ^  t_  that  the  sea  would  rise  on  the 
next  following  day.1  Putting  m  =  0,  it  is  seen  that 
this  view  assumes  that  the  probability  of  a  totally  un 
known  event  is  £;  or  that  of  all  theories  proposed  for 
examination  one  half  are  4;rue.  In  point  of  fact,  we 
know  that  although  theories  are  not  proposed  unless 
they  present  some  decided  plausibility,  nothing  like  one 
half  turn  out  to  be  true.  But  to  apply  correctly  the 
doctrine  of  inverse  probabilities,  it  is  necessary  to  know 
the  antecedent  probability  of  the  event  whose  proba 
bility  is  in  question.  Now,  in  pure  hypothesis  or  induc 
tion,  we  know  nothing  of  the  conclusion  antecedently 
to  the  inference  in  hand.  Mere  ignorance,  however, 
cannot  advance  us  toward  any  knowledge ;  therefore  it 
is  impossible  that  the  theory  of  inverse  probabilities 
should  rightly  give  a  value  for  the  probability  of  a  pure 
inductive  or  hypothetic  conclusion.  For  it  cannot  do 
this  without  assigning  an  antecedent  probability  to  this 
conclusion ;  so  that  if  this  antecedent  probability  rep 
resents  mere  ignorance  (which  never  aids  us),  it  cannot 
do  it  at  all. 

The  principle  which  is  usually  assumed  by  those  who 
seek  to  reduce  inductive  reasoning  to  a  problem  in  in 
verse  probabilities  is,  that  if  nothing  whatever  is  known 
about  the  frequency  of  occurrence  of  an  event,  then  any 
one  frequency  is  as  probable  as  any  other.  But  Boole 

1  See  Laplace,  "Theorie  Analitique  des  Probabilites,"  livre  ii.  chap.  vi. 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    173 

has  shown  that  there  is  no  reason  whatever  to  prefer  this 
assumption,  to  saying  that  any  one  "  constitution  of  the 
universe"  is  as  probable  as  any  other.  Suppose,  for 
instance,  there  were  four  possible  occasions  upon  which 
an  event  might  occur.  Then  there  would  be  16  "  con 
stitutions  of  the  universe,"  or  possible  distributions  of 
occurrences  and  non-occurrences.  They  are  shown  in 
the  following  table,  where  Y  stands  for  an  occurrence 
and  N  for  a  non-occurrence. 


4  occurrences. 

3  occurrences. 

2  occurrences. 

1  occurrence. 

0  occurrence. 

YYYY 

YYYN 

YYNN 

YNNN 

NNNN 

YYNY 

YNYN 

NYNN 

YNYY 

YNNY 

NNYN 

NYYY 

NYYN 

NNNT 

NYNY 

NNYY 

It  will  be  seen  that  different  frequencies  result  some 
from  more  and  some  from  fewer  different  "  constitutions 
of  the  universe,"  so  that  it  is  a  very  different  thing  to 
assume  that  all  frequencies  are  equally  probable  from 
what  it  is  to  assume  that  all  constitutions  of  the  universe 
are  equally  probable. 

Boole  says  that  one  assumption  is  as  good  as  the  other. 
But  I  will  go  further,  and  say  that  the  assumption  that 
all  constitutions  of  the  universe  are  equally  probable  is 
far  better  than  the  assumption  that  all  frequencies  are 
equally  probable.  For  the  latter  proposition,  though  it 
may  be  applied  to  any  one  unknown  event,  cannot  be 
applied  to  all  unknown  events  without  inconsistency. 
Thus,  suppose  all  frequencies  of  the  event  whose  occur 
rence  is  represented  by  I^in  the  above  table  are  equally 
probable.  Then  consider  the  event  which  consists  in  a 
Y  following  a  Y  or  an  N  following  an  N.  The  possible 


174   A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

ways  in  which  this  event  may  occur  or  not  are  shown  in 
the  following  table :  — 


3  occurrences. 

YYYY 

NNNN 

2  occurrences, 

YYYN 

NNNY 

1  occurrence. 

YYNY 

NNYN 

0  occurrence. 

YNYN 
NYNY 

YYNN 
NNYY 

YNNY 
NYYN 

N  YYY 

YNNN 

YNYY 

NYNN 

It  will  be  found  that  assuming  the  different  frequencies 
of  the  first  event  to  be  equally  probable,  those  of  this  new 
event  are  not  so,  —  the  probability  of  three  occurrences 
being  half  as  large  again  as  that  of  two,  or  one.  On  the 
other  hand,  if  all  constitutions  of  the  universe  are  equally 
probable  in  the  one  case,  they  are  so  in  the  other  ;  and 
this  latter  assumption,  in  regard  to  perfectly  unknown 
events,  never  gives  rise  to  any  inconsistency. 

Suppose,  then,  that  we  adopt  the  assumption  that  any 
one  constitution  of  the  universe  is  as  probable  as  any 
other  ;  how  will  the  inductive  inference  then  appear,  con 
sidered  as  a  problem  in  probabilities  ?  The  answer  is 
extremely  easy  ; 1  namely,  the  occurrences  or  non-occur 
rences  of  an  event  in  the  past  in  no  way  affect  the  proba 
bility  of  its  occurrence  in  the  future. 

Boole  frequently  finds  a  problem  in  probabilities  to  be 
indeterminate.  There  are  those  to  whom  the  idea  of  an 
unknown  probability  seems  an  absurdity.  Probability, 
they  say,  measures  the  state  of  our  knowledge,  and  ig 
norance  is  denoted  by  the  probability  |.  But  I  appre 
hend  that  the  expression  "  the  probability  of  an  event " 
is  an  incomplete  one.  A  probability  is  a  fraction  whose 

1  See  Boole,  "Laws  of  Thought." 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    175 

numerator  is  the  frequency  of  a  specific  kind  of  event, 
while  its  denominator  is  the  frequency  of  a  genus  embrac 
ing  that  species.  Now  the  expression  in  question  names 
the  numerator  of  the  fraction,  but  omits  to  name  the  de 
nominator.  There  is  a  sense  in  which  it  is  true  that  the 
probability  of  a  perfectly  unknown  event  is  one  half ; 
namely,  the  assertion  of  its  occurrence  is  the  answer  to 
a  possible  question  answerable  by  "  yes  "  or  "  no,"  and 
of  all  such  questions  just  half  the  possible  answers  are 
true.  But  if  attention  be  paid  to  the  denominators  of 
the  fractions,  it  will  be  found  that  this  value  of  J  is  one 
of  which  no  possible  use  can  be  made  in  the  calculation 
of  probabilities. 

The  theory  here  proposed  does  not  assign  any  proba 
bility  to  the  inductive  or  hypothetic  conclusion,  in  the 
sense  of  undertaking  to  say  how  frequently  that  conclu 
sion  would  be  found  true.  It  does  not  propose  to  look 
through  all  the  possible  universes,  and  say  in  what  pro 
portion  of  them  a  certain  uniformity  occurs  ;  such  a 
proceeding,  were  it  possible,  would  be  quite  idle.  The 
theory  here  presented  only  says  how  frequently,  in  this 
universe,  the  special  form  of  induction  or  hypothesis 
would  lead  us  right.  The  probability  given  by  this  theory 
is  in  every  way  different  —  in  meaning,  numerical  value, 
and  form  —  from  that  of  those  who  would  apply  to  am- 
pliative  inference  the  doctrine  of  inverse  chances. 

Other  logicians  hold  that  if  inductive  and  hypothetic 
premises  lead  to  true  oftener  than  to  false  conclusions, 
it  is  only  because  the  universe  happens  to  have  a  certain 
constitution.  Mill  and  his  followers  maintain  that  there 
is  a  general  tendency  toward  uniformity  in  the  universe, 
as  well  as  special  uniformities  such  as  those  which  we 
have  considered.  The  Abbe*  Gratry  believes  that  the 
tendency  toward  the  truth  in  induction  is  due  to  a  mirac- 


176    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

ulous  intervention  of  Almighty  God,  whereby  we  are  led 
to  make  such  inductions  as  happen  to  be  true,  and  are 
prevented  from  making  those  which  are  false.  Others 
have  supposed  that  there  is  a  special  adaptation  of  the 
mind  to  the  universe,  so%  that  we  are  more  apt  to  make 
true  theories  than  we  otherwise  should  be.  Now,  to  say 
that  a  theory  such  as  these  is  necessary  to  explaining  the 
validity  of  induction  and  hypothesis  is  to  say  that  these 
modes  of  inference  are  not  in  themselves  valid,  but  that 
their  conclusions  are  rendered  probable  by  being  probable 
deductive  inferences  from  a  suppressed  (and  originally 
unknown)  premise.  But  I  maintain  that  it  has  been 
shown  that  the  modes  of  inference  in  question  are  neces 
sarily  valid,  whatever  the  constitution  of  the  universe,  so 
long  as  it  admits  of  the  premises  being  true.  Yet  I  am 
willing  to  concede,  in  order  to  concede  as  much  as  possi 
ble,  that  when  a  man  draws  instances  at  random,  all  that 
he  knows  is  that  he  tries  to  follow  a  certain  precept ;  so 
that  the  sampling  process  might  be  rendered  generally 
fallacious  by  the  existence  of  a  mysterious  and  malign 
connection  between  the  mind  and  the  universe,  such  that 
the  possession  by  an  object  of  an  unperceived  character 
might  influence  the  will  toward  choosing  it  or  rejecting 
it.  Such  a  circumstance  would,  however,  be  as  fatal  to 
deductive  as  to  ampliative  inference.  Suppose,  for  exam 
ple,  that  I  were  to  enter  a  great  hall  where  people  were 
playing  rouge  et  noir  at  many  tables ;  and  suppose  that 
I  knew  that  the  red  and  black  were  turned  up  with  equal 
frequency.  Then,  if  I  were  to  make  a  large  number  of 
mental  bets  with  myself,  at  this  table  and  at  that.  I.  might, 
by  statistical  deduction,  expect  to  win  about  half  of  them, 
—  precisely  as  I  might  expect,  from  the  results  of  these 
samples,  to  infer  by  induction  the  probable  ratio  of  fre 
quency  of  the  turnings  of  red  and  black  in  the  long  run, 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    177 

if  I  did  not  know  it.  But  could  some  devil  look  at  eacli 
card  before  it  was  turned,  and  then  influence  me  mentally 
to  bet  upon  it  or  to  refrain  therefrom,  the  observed  ratio 
in  the  cases  upon  which  I  had  bet  might  be  quite  different 
from  the  observed  ratio  in  those  cases  upon  which  I  had 
not  bet.  I  grant,  then,  that  even  upon  my  theory  some 
fact  has  to  be  supposed  to  make  induction  and  hypothe 
sis  valid  processes  ;  namely,  it  is  supposed  that  the  su 
pernal  powers  withhold  their  hands  and  let  me  alone, 
and  that  no  mysterious  uniformity  or  adaptation  inter 
feres  with  the  action  of  chance.  But  then  this  negative 
fact  supposed  by  my  theory  plays  a  totally  different  part 
from  the  facts  supposed  to  be  requisite  by  the  logicians 
of  whom  I  have  been  speaking.  So  far  as  facts  like  those 
they  suppose  can  have  any  bearing,  they  serve  as  major 
premises  from  which  the  fact  inferred  by  induction  or 
hypothesis  might  be  deduced  ;  while  the  negative  fact 
supposed  by  me  is  merely  the  denial  of  any  major  premise 
from  which  the  falsity  of  the  inductive  or  hypothetic  con 
clusion  could  in  general  be  deduced.  Nor  is  it  necessary 
to  deny  altogether  the  existence  of  mysterious  influences 
adverse  to  the  validity  of  the  inductive  and  hypothetic 
processes.  So  long  as  their  influence  were  not  too  over 
whelming,  the  wonderful  self-correcting  nature  of  the 
ampliative  inference  would  enable  us,  even  if  they  did 
exist,  to  detect  and  make  allowance  for  them. 

Although  the  universe  need  have  no  peculiar  consti 
tution  to  render  ampliative  inference  valid,  yet  it  is  worth 
while  to  inquire  whether  or  not  it  has  such  a  constitu 
tion  ;  for  if  it  has,  that  circumstance  must  have  its  effect 
upon  all  our  inferences.  It  cannot  any  longer  be  denied 
that  the  human  intellect  is  peculiarly  adapted  to  the 
comprehension  of  the  laws  and  facts  of  nature,  or  at 
least  of  some  of  them ;  and  the  effect  of  this  adaptation 


178   A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

upon  our  reasoning  will  be  briefly  considered  in  the  next 
section.  Of  any  miraculous  interference  by  the  higher 
powers,  we  know  absolutely  nothing ;  and  it  seems  in 
the  present  state  of  science  altogether  improbable.  The 
effect  of  a  knowledge  of  special  uniformities  upon  ampli- 
ative  inferences  has  already  been  touched  upon.  That 
there  is  a  general  tendency  toward  uniformity  in  nature 
is  not  merely  an  unfounded,  it  is  an  absolutely  absurd, 
idea  in  any  other  sense  than  that  man  is  adapted  to  his 
surroundings.  For  the  universe  of  marks  is  only  limited 
by  the  limitation  of  human  interests  and  powers  of  ob 
servation.  Except  for  that  limitation,  every  lot  of  objects 
in  the  universe  would  have  (as  I  have  elsewhere  shown) 
some  character  in  common  and  peculiar  to  it.  Conse 
quently,  there  is  but  one  possible  arrangement  of  charac 
ters  among  objects  as  they  exist,  and  there  is  no  room 
for  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  uniformity  in  nature.  If 
nature  seems  highly  uniform  to  us,  it  is  only  because  our 
powers  are  adapted  to  our  desires. 

XI. 

The  questions  discussed  in  this  essay  relate  to  but  a 
small  part  of  the  Logic  of  Scientific  Investigation.  Let 
us  just  glance  at  a  few  of  the  others. 

Suppose  a  being,  from  some  remote  part  of  the  uni 
verse,  where  the  conditions  of  existence  are  inconceivably 
different  from  ours,  to  be  presented  with  a  United  States 
Census  Report,  —  which  is  for  us  a  mine  of  valuable  in 
ductions,  so  vast  as  almost  to  give  that  epithet  a  new  signi 
fication.  He  begins,  perhaps,  by  comparing  the  ratio  of 
indebtedness  to  deaths  by  consumption  in  counties  whose 
names  begin  with  the  different  letters  of  the  alphabet. 
It  is  safe  to  say  that  he  would  find  the  ratio  everywhere 


B    a    i     T    i     s 


WINTER  KA1N  FATX 

CASchott 


A  THEOKY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    179 


the  same,  and  thus  his  inquiry  would  lead  to  nothing. 
For  an  induction  is  wholly  unimportant  unless  the  pro 
portions  of  P's  among  the  M's  and  among  the  non-M's 
differ ;  and  a  hypothetic  inference  is  unimportant  unless 
it  be  found  that  S  has  either  a  greater  or  a  less  propor 
tion  of  the  characters  of  M  than  it  has  of  other  charac 
ters.  The  stranger  to  this  planet  might  go  on  for  some 
time  asking  inductive  questions  that  the  Census  would 
faithfully  answer,  without  learning  anything  except  that 
certain  conditions  were  independent  of  others.  At  length, 
it  might  occur  to  him  to  compare  the  January  rain-fall 
with  the  illiteracy.  What  he  would  find  is  given  in  the 
folio  win":  table1 :  — 


REGION. 

January  Rain-fall. 

Illiteracy. 

Atlantic  Sea-coast,  Port-) 
land  to  Washington      ) 

Inches. 

0.92 

Per  cent. 
11 

Vermont,  Northern  and) 
Western  New  York      ) 

0.78 

7 

Upper  Mississippi  E/iver  . 

0.52 

3 

Ohio  River  Valley   .     .     . 

0.74 

8 

Lower  Mississippi,   Red) 
River,  and  Kentucky   ) 

1.08 

50 

Mississippi     Delta    and) 
Northern  Gulf  Coast    ) 

1.09 

57 

Southeastern  Coast  .     .     . 

0.68 

40 

1  The  different  regions  with  the  January  rain-fall  are  taken  from  Mr. 
Schott's  work.  The  percentage  of  illiteracy  is  roughly  estimated  from  the 
numbers  given  in  the  Keport  of  the  1870  Census. 


180    A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE. 

He  would  infer  that  in  places  that  are  drier  in  January 
there  is,  not  always  but  generally,  less  illiteracy  than 
in  wetter  places.  A  detailed  comparison  between  Mr. 
Schott's  map  of  the  winter  rain-fall  with  the  map  of 
illiteracy  in  the  general  census,  would  confirm  the  result 
that  these  two  conditions  have  a  partial  connection. 
This  is  a  very  good  example  of  an  induction  in  which 
the  proportion  of  P's  among  the  M9s  is  different,  but 
not  very  different,  from  the  proportion  among  the  non- 
Jf's.  It  is  unsatisfactory  ;  it  provokes  further  inquiry  ; 
we  desire  to  replace  the  M  by  some  different  class,  so 
that  the  two  proportions  may  be  more  widely  separated. 
Now  we,  knowing  as  much  as  we  do  of  the  effects  of 
winter  rain-fall  upon  agriculture,  upon  wealth,  etc.,  and 
of  the  causes  of  illiteracy,  should  come  to  such  an  inquiry 
furnished  with  a  large  number  of  appropriate  conceptions ; 
so  that  we  should  be  able  to  ask  intelligent  questions  not 
unlikely  to  furnish  the  desired  key  to  the  problem.  But 
the  strange  being  we  have  imagined  could  only  make  his 
inquiries  hap-hazard,  and  could  hardly  hope  ever  to  find 
the  induction  of  which  he  was  in  search. 

Nature  is  a  far  vaster  and  less  clearly  arranged  reper 
tory  of  facts  than  a  census  report ;  and  if  men  had  not 
come  to  it  with  special  aptitudes  for  guessing  right,  it 
may  well  be  doubted  whether  in  the  ten  or  twenty  thou 
sand  years  that  they  may  have  existed  their  greatest 
mind  would  have  attained  the  amount  of  knowledge 
which  is  actually  possessed  by  the  lowest  idiot.  But, 
in  point  of  fact,  not  man  merely,  but  all  animals  derive 
by  inheritance  (presumably  by  natural  selection)  two 
classes  of  ideas  which  adapt  them  to  their  environment. 
In  the  first  place,  they  all  have  from. birth  some  notions, 
however  crude  and  concrete,  of  force,  matter,  space,  and 
time ;  and,  in  the  next  place,  they  have  some  notion  of 


A  THEORY  OF  PROBABLE  INFERENCE.    181 

what  sort  of  objects  their  fellow-beings  are,  and  of  how 
they  will  act  on  given  occasions.  Our  innate  mechanical 
ideas  were  so  nearly  correct  that  they  needed  but  slight 
correction.  The  fundamental  principles  of  statics  were 
made  out  by  Archimedes.  Centuries  later  Galileo  began 
to  understand  the  laws  of  dynamics,  which  in  our  times 
have  been  at  length,  perhaps,  completely  mastered.  The 
other  physical  sciences  are  the  results  of  inquiry  based 
on  guesses  suggested  by  the  ideas  of  mechanics.  The 
moral  sciences,  so  far  as  they  can  be  called  sciences, 
are  equally  developed  out  of  our  instinctive  ideas  about 
human  nature.  Man  has  thus  far  not  attained  to  any 
knowledge  that  is  not  in  a  wide  sense  either  mechanical 
or  anthropological  in  its  nature,  and  it  may  be  reasonably 
presumed  that  he  never  will. 

Side  by  side,  then,  with  the  well  established  propo 
sition  that  all  knowledge  is  based  on  experience,  and 
that  science  is  only  advanced  by  the  experimental  verifi 
cations  of  theories,  we  have  to  place  this  other  equally 
important  truth,  that  all  human  knowledge,  up  to  the 
highest  flights  of  science,  is  but  the  development  of  our 
inborn  animal  instincts. 


NOTE    A. 


BOOLE,  De  Morgan,  and  their  followers,  frequently 
speak  of  a  "  limited  universe  of  discourse  "  in  logic.  An 
unlimited  universe  would  comprise  the  whole  realm  of  the 
logically  possible.  In  such  a  universe,  every  universal 
proposition,  not  tautologous,  is  false ;  every  particular 
proposition,  not  absurd,  is  true.  Our  discourse  seldom 
relates  to  this  universe :  we  are  either  thinking  of  the 
physically  possible,  or  of  the  historically  existent,  or  of 
the  world  of  some  romance,  or  of  some  other  limited 
universe. 

But  besides  its  universe  of  objects,  our  discourse  also 
refers  to  a  universe  of  characters.  Thus,  we  might 
naturally  say  that  virtue  and  an  orange  have  nothing 
in  common.  It  is  true  that  the  English  word  for  each 
is  spelt  with  six  letters,  but  this  is  not  one  of  the  marks 
of  the  universe  of  our  discourse. 

A  universe  of  things  is  unlimited  in  which  every  com 
bination  of  characters,  short  of  the  whole  universe  of 
characters,  occurs  in  some  object.  In  like  manner,  the 
universe  of  characters  is  unlimited  in  case  every  aggre 
gate  of  things  short  of  the  whole  universe  of  things 
possesses  in  common  one  of  the  characters  of  the  uni 
verse  of  characters.  The  conception  of  ordinar}^  syllo 
gistic  is  so  unclear  that  it  would  hardly  be  accurate  to 
say  that  it  supposes  an  unlimited  universe  of  characters ; 


ON   A   LIMITED   UNIVERSE    OF   MARKS.         183 

but  it  comes  nearer  to  that  than  to  any  other  consistent 
view.  The  non-possession  of  any  character  is  regarded 
as  implying  the  possession  of  another  character  the  nega 
tive  of  the  first. 

In  our  ordinary  discourse,  on  the  other  hand,  not  only 
are  both  universes  limited,  but,  further  than  that,  we 
have  nothing  to  do  with  individual  objects  nor  simple 
marks  ;  so  that  we  have  simply  the  two  distinct  universes 
of  things  and  marks  related  to  one  another,  in  general,  in 
a  perfectly  indeterminate  manner.  The  consequence  is,4 
that  a  proposition  concerning  the  relations  of  two  groups 
of  marks  is  not  necessarily  equivalent  to  any  proposition 
concerning  classes  of  things ;  so  that  the  distinction 
between  propositions  in  extension  and  propositions  in 
comprehension  is  a  real  one,  separating  two  kinds  of 
facts,  whereas  in  the  view  of  ordinary  syllogistic  the 
distinction  only  relates  to  two  modes  of  considering  any 
fact.  To  say  that  every  object  of  the  class  S  is  included 
among  the  class  of  P's,  of  course  must  imply  that  every 
common  character  of  the  P's  is  a  common  character  of 
the  $'s.  But  the  converse  implication  is  by  no  means 
necessary,  except  with  an  unlimited  universe  of  marks. 
The  reasonings  in  depth  of  which  I  have  spoken,  suppose, 
of  course,  the  absence  of  any  general  regularity  about  the 
relations  of  marks  and  things. 

I  may  mention  here  another  respect  in  which  this  view 
differs  from  that  of  ordinary  logic,  although  it  is  a  point 
which  has,  so  far  as  I  am  aware,  no  bearing  upon  the 
theory  of  probable  inference.  It  is  that  under  this  view 
there  are  propositions  of  which  the  subject  is  a  class  of 
things,  while  the  predicate  is  a  group  of  marks.  Of  such 
propositions  there  are  twelve  species,  distinct  from  one 
another  in  the  sense  that  any  fact  capable  of  being  ex 
pressed  by  a  proposition  of  one  of  these  species  cannot 


184         ON   A   LIMITED   UNIVERSE    OF   MARKS. 

be  expressed  by  any  proposition  of  another  species.     The 
following  are  examples  of  six  of  the  twelve  species  :  — 

1.  Every  object  of  the  class  S  possesses  every  character  of 
the  group  TT. 

2.  Some   object  of  the  class  S  possesses  all  characters  of 
the  group  TT. 

3.  Every  character  of  the  group  TT  is  possessed  by  some 
object  of  the  class  S. 

4.  Some  character  of  the  group  TT  is  possessed  by  all  the 
objects  of  the  class  S. 

5.  Every  object  of  the  class  S  possesses  some  character  of 
the  group  TT. 

6.  Some  object  of  the  class  S  possesses  some  character  of 
the  group  TT. 

The  remaining  six  species  of  propositions  are  like  the 
above,  except  that  they  speak  of  objects  wanting  charac 
ters  instead  of  possessing  characters. 

But  the  varieties  of  proposition  do  not  end  here ;  for 
we  may  have,  for  example,  such  a  form  as  this :  "  Some 
object  of  the  class  S  possesses  every  character  not  want 
ing  to  any  object  of  the  class  P."  In  short,  the  relative 
term  "  possessing  as  a  character,"  or  its  negative,  may 
enter  into  the  proposition  any  number  of  times.  We 
may  term  this  number  the  order  of  the  proposition. 

An  important  characteristic  of  this  kind  of  logic  is  the 
part  that  immediate  inference  plays  in  it.  Thus,  the 
proposition  numbered  3,  above,  follows  from  No.  2,  and 
No.  5  from  No.  4.  It  will  be  observed  that  in  both  cases 
a  universal  proposition  (or  one'  that  states  the  non- 
existence  of  something)  follows  from  a  particular  propo 
sition  (or  one  that  states  the  existence  of  something). 
All  the  immediate  inferences  are  essentially  of  that 
nature.  A  particular  proposition  is  never  immediately 
inferable  from  a  universal  one.  (It  is  true  that  from 


ON   A   LIMITED    UNIVERSE    OF    MARKS.         185 

"  no  A  exists "  we  can  infer  that  "  something  not  A 
exists ;  "  but  this  is  not  properly  an  immediate  infer 
ence, —  it  really  supposes  the  additional  premise  that 
u  something  exists.")  There  are  also  immediate  in 
ferences  raising  and  reducing 'the  order  of  propositions. 
Thus,  the  proposition  of  the  second  order  given  in  the 
last  paragraph  follows  from  "  some  S  is  a  P."  On  the 
other  hand,  the  inference  holds,  — 

Some  common  character   of  the  S's  is  wanting  to  every 
thing  except  _P's ; 
.'.  Every  S  is  a  P. 

The  necessary  and  sufficient  condition  of  the  existence 
of  a  syllogistic  conclusion  from  two  premises  is  simple 
enough.  There  is  a  conclusion  if,  and  only  if,  there  is 
a  middle  term  distributed  in  one  premise  and  undistribu 
ted  in  the  other.  But  the  conclusion  is  of  the  kind  called 
spurious  l  by  De  Morgan  if,  and  only  if,  the  middle  term 
is  affe'cted  by  a  "  some  "  in  both  premises.  For  exam 
ple,  let  the  two  premises  be, — 

Every  object  of  the  class  /S  wants  some  character  of  the 
group  p.; 

Every  object  of  the  class  P  possesses  some  character  not  of 
the  group  //,. 

The  middle  term  /JL  is  distributed  in  the  second  premise, 
but  not  in  the  first ;  so  that  a  conclusion  can  be  drawn. 
But,  though  both  propositions  are  universal,  ^  is  under 
a  "  some  "  in  both  ;  hence  only  a  spurious  conclusion 
can  be  drawn,  and  in  point  of  fact  we  can  infer  both  of 
the  following :  — 

1  On  spurious  propositions,  see  Mr.  B.  I.  Oilman's  paper  in  the  Johns 
Hopkins  University  Circular  for  August,  1882.  The  number  of  such 
forms  in  any  order  is  probably  finite. 


186         ON   A   LIMITED    UNIVERSE    OF   MARKS. 

Every  object  of  the  class  S  wants  a  character  other  than 
some  character  common  to  the  class  P  ; 

Every  object  of  the  class  P  possesses  a  character  other 
than  some  character  wanting  to  every  object  of  the  class  S. 

The  order  of  the  conclusion  is  always  the  sum  of  the 
orders  of  the  premises  ;  but  to  draw  up  a  rule  to  deter 
mine  precisely  what  the  conclusion  is,  would  be  difficult. 
It  would  at  the  same  time  be  useless,  because  the  prob 
lem  is  extremely  simple  when  considered  in  the  light  of 
the  logic  of  relatives. 


NOTE    B. 


A  DUAL  relative  term,  such  as  "  lover,"  "  benefactor," 
"  servant,"  is  a  common  name  signifying  a  pair  of  ob 
jects.  Of  the  two  members  of  the  pair,  a  determinate 
one  is  generally  the  first,  and  the  other  the  second ;  so 
that  if  the  order  is  reversed,  the  pair  is  not  considered  as 
remaining  the  same. 

Let  A,  B,  C,  D,  etc.,  be  all  the  individual  objects  in 
the  universe  ;  then  all  the  individual  pairs  may  be  arrayed 
in  a  block,  thus :  — 

A:A  A:B  A:C  A  :  D  etc. 
B:A  B:B  B:C  B  :  D  etc. 
C:A  C:B  C:C  C:D  etc. 
D:A  D  :  B  D  :  C  D  :  D  etc. 
etc.  etc.  etc.  etc.  etc. 

A  general  relative  may  be  conceived  as  a  logical  aggre 
gate  of  a  number  of  such  individual  relatives.  Let  I  de 
note  "  lover ;  "  then  we  may  write 


where  (Z)#  is  a  numerical  coefficient,  whose  value  is  1  in 
case  I  is  a  lover  of  J,  and  0  in  the  opposite  case,  and 
where  the  sums  are  to  be  taken  for  all  individuals  in  the 


unverse. 


188  THE    LOGIC    OF   EEL  ATI  YES. 

Every  relative  term  has  a  negative  (like  any  other 
term)  which  may  be  represented  by  drawing  a  straight 
line  over  the  sign  for  the  relative  itself.  The  negative 
of  a  relative  includes  every  pair  that  the  latter  excludes, 
and  vice  versa.  Every  relative  has  also  a  converse,  pro 
duced  by  reversing  the  order  of  the  members  of  the  pair. 
Thus,  the  converse  of  u  lover"  is  "loved."  The  con 
verse  may  be  represented  by  drawing  a  curved  line  over 
the  sign  for  the  relative,  thus  :  I.  It  is  defined  by  the 
equation 


The  following  formulae  are  obvious,  but  important  :  — 


(i  -<  b)  =  (l  -<  i)  (i  -<  b)  =  (l-<  b). 

Relative  terms  can  be  aggregated  and  compounded  like 
others.  Using  -f  for  the  sign  of  logical  aggregation,  and 
the  comma  for  the  sign  of  logical  composition  (Boole's 
multiplication,  here  to  be  called  non-relative  or  internal 
multiplication),  we  have  the  definitions 


The  first  of  these  equations,  however,  is  to  be  understood 
in  a  peculiar  way  :  namely,  the  +  in  the  second  member 
is  not  strictly  addition,  but  an  operation  by  which 


Instead  of  (l)$  +  (&)y-  ,  we  might  with  more  accuracy 
write 

0 


THE   LOGIC    OF   EELATIVES.  189 

The  main  formulas  of  aggregation  and  composition  are 

( If  I  -<  s  and  b  -<  s,  then  I  +  b  — <  s.  |_ 
(If  s  — <  I  and  s  -<  b,  then  s-<  £,&.       I 

( If  Z  +  £  -<  5,  then  Z  -<  s  and  £  -<  s.  \ 
(If  5-<  Z,#,  then  s  — <  Z  and  s  -<  &.       ) 

(  (I  +  &)  ?s  -<  l,s  +  &,$•        ) 
1  (I  +  s),(b  +  s)  -<  lt b  +  s.  ) 

The  subsidiary  formulas  need  not  be  given,  being  the 
same  as  in  non-relative  logic. 

We  now  come  to  the   combination  of  relatives.     Of 
these,  we  denote  two  by  special  symbols ;  namely,   we 

write 

lb  for  lover  of  a  benefactor, 
and 

I  f  b  for  lover  of  everything  hut  benefactors. 

The  former  is  called  a  particular  combination,  because 
it  implies  the  existence  of  something  loved  by  its  relate 
and  a  benefactor  of  its  correlate.  The  second  combina 
tion  is  said  to  be  universal,  because  it  implies  the  non- 
existence  of  anything  except  what  is  either  loved  by  its 
relate  or  a  benefactor  of  its  correlate.  The  combination 
lb  is  called  a  relative  product,  /  f  b  a  relative  sum.  The 
I  and  b  arc  said  to  be  undistributed  in  both,  because  if 
I  -  C  s,  then  lb  -  C  sb  and  I  f  b  ^<  s  f  b  ;  and  if  b  -<  5, 
then  lb  -  C  Is  and  I  f  b  -<  I  f  .9. 

The  two  combinations  are  defined  by  the  equations 


The  sign  of  addition  in  the  last  formula  has  the  same 
signification  as  in  the  equation  defining  non-relative 
multiplication. 


190  THE   LOGIC    OF   KELATIYES. 

Relative  addition  and  multiplication  are  subject  to  the 
associative  law.     That  is, 


l(bs)  = 

Two  formulae  so  constantly  used  that  hardly  anything 
can  be  done  without  them  are 


The  former  asserts  that  whatever  is  lover  of  an  object 
that  is  benefactor  of  everything  but  a  servant,  stands  to 
everything  but  servants  in  the  relation  of  lover  of  a 
benefactor.  The  latter  asserts  that  whatever  stands  to 
any  servant  in  the  relation  of  lover  of  everything  but  its 
benefactors,  is  a  lover  of  everything  but  benefactors  of 
servants.  The  following  formulas  are  obvious  and  triv 
ial:— 

Is  +  Is  -<  (l+b)s 

z,&t«-<(*t«)»(at«)- 

Unobvious  and  important,  however,  are  these  :  — 
(I  +  b)  s  -<  Is  +  bs 

(Jt*),(&t*)-<MU 

There  are  a  number  of  curious  development  formulae. 
Such  are 


(I  +  b)  t  s  =  2P  {\l  f  (s 

n  (b  +  s)  =  2P{\_(1  +P)  t  b-],[_(l  +p)  f  s-]}. 

The  summations  and  multiplications  denoted  by  ^  and  IT 
are  to  be  taken  non-relatively,  and  all  relative  terms  are 
to  be  successively  substituted  for  p. 


THE   LOGIC    OF   RELATIVES.  191 

The  negatives  of  the  combinations  follow  these  rules : 

I  I  b  =  Ib  I  b  =  I  ~f  b 

The  converses  of  combinations  are  as  follows  :  — 

Individual  dual  relatives  are  of  two  types,  — 
A  :  A         and         A  :  B. 

Relatives  containing  no  pair  of  an  object  with  itself  are 
called  alio-relatives  as  opposed  to  self -relatives.  The 
negatives  of  alio-relatives  pair  every  object  with  itself. 
Relatives  containing  no  pair  of  an  object  with  anything 
but  itself  are  called  concurrents  as  opposed  to  opponents. 
The  negatives  of  concurrents  pair  every  object  with  every 
other. 

There  is  but  one  relative  which  pairs  every  object  with 
itself  and  with  every  other.  It  is  the  aggregate  of  all 
pairs,  and  is  denoted  by  GO.  It  is  translated  into  ordi 
nary  language  by  "  coexistent  with."  Its  negative  is  0. 
There  is  but  one  relative  which  pairs  every  object  with 
itself  and  none  with  any  other.  It  is 

(A  :  A)  +  (B  :  B)  +  (C  :  C)  +  etc. ; 

is  denoted  by  1,  and  in  ordinary  language  is  "identical 
with  — ."  Its  negative,  denoted  by  n,  is  "  other  than—," 
or  "  not." 

No  matter  what  relative  term  x  may  be,  we  have 

0  -<  x  x  -<  oo. 


192  THE   LOGIC    OF   RELATIVES. 

Hence,  obviously 

x  +  0  =  x  x,  GO  =  x 

a?-foo—  OQ  cc ,  0  =  0. 

The  last  formula  hold  for  the  relative  operations  ;  thus, 

#  f     GO  :=    00  XO  =  0. 

GO  f  sc  =  oo  0  a?  —  0. 

The  formulas 

X  +  0  =  X  X,  GO  =  X 

also  hold  if  we  substitute  the  relative  operations,  and 
also  1  for  oo,  and  n  for  0  ;  thus, 

x  f  n  =  x  x~L  =  x. 

n  -f  x  =  x  \x  =  x. 
We  have  also 

l  +  l=o,  1,1  =  0. 

To  these  partially  correspond  the  following  pair  of  highly 
important  formulas :  — 

1  -<  1 1 1  l~l  -<  n. 

The  logic  of  relatives  is  highly  multiform  ;  it  is  char 
acterized  by  innumerable  immediate  inferences,  and  by 
various  distinct  conclusions  from  the  same  sets  of  premi 
ses.  An  example  of  the  first  character  is  afforded  by 
Mr.  Mitchell's  Flv  following  from  Flv,.  As  an  instance 
of  the  second,  take  the  premises, 

Every  man  is  a  lover  of  an  animal ; 
and 

Every  woman  is  a  lover  of  a  non-animal. 

From  these  we  can  equally  infer  that 

Every  man  is  a  lover  of  something  which  stands  to  each 
woman  in  the  relation  of  not  being  the  only  thing  loved 
by  her, 


THE   LOGIC    OF   RELATIVES.  193 


and  that 


Every  woman  is  a  lover  of  something  which  stands  to 
each  man  in  the  relation  of  not  being  the  only  thing  loved 
by  him. 

The  effect  of  these  peculiarities  is  that  this  algebra  can 
not  be  subjected  to  hard  and  fast  rules  like  those  of 
the  Boolian  calculus  ;  and  all  that  can  be  done  in  this 
place  is  to  give  a  general  idea  of  the  way  of  working  with 
it.  The  student  must  at  the  outset  disabuse  himself  of 
the  notion  that  the  chief  instruments  of  algebra  are  the 
inverse  operations.  General  algebra  hardly  knows  any 
inverse  operations.  When  an  inverse  operation  is  iden 
tical  with  a  direct  operation  with  an  inverse  quantity 
(as  subtraction  is  the  addition  of  the  negative,  and  as 
division  is  multiplication  by  the  reciprocal),  it  is  useful  ; 
otherwise  it  is  almost  always  useless.  In  ordinary  alge 
bra,  we  speak  of  the  "  principal  value  "  of  the  logarithm, 
etc.,  which  is  a  direct  operation  substituted  for  an  in 
definitely  ambiguous  inverse  operation.  The  elimination 
and  transposition  in  this  algebra  really  does  depend, 
however,  upon  formulae  quite  analogous  to  the 

x  +  (-  x)  =  0  x  X  \  =  1, 

of  arithmetical  algebra.     These  formulas  are 


I  +  1  =  oo        1  -<  1  1  . 

For  example,  to  eliminate  *  from  the  two  propositions 
1-C  Is  l-<  sb, 

we  relatively  multiply  them  in  such  an  order  as  to  bring 
the  two  s's  together,  and  then  apply  the  second  of  the 
above  formulas,  thus  :  — 

1  -<  IsSb  -<  l\\b. 


194  THE   LOGIC    OF   EELATIVES. 

This  example  shows  the  use  of  the  association  formulae 
in  bringing  letters  together.  Other  formulas  of  great 
importance  for  this  purpose  are 


The  distribution  formula  are  also  useful  for  this  pur 
pose. 

When  the  letter  to  be  eliminated  has  thus  been  re 
placed  by  one  of  the  four  relatives,  —  0,  GO,  1,  n,  —  the 
replacing  relative  can  often  be  got  rid  of  by  means  of 
one  of  the  formulae 


When  we  have  only  to  deal  with  universal  propositions, 

.it  will  be  found  convenient  so  to  transpose  everything 

from  subject  to  predicate  as  to  make  the  subject  L    Thus, 

if  we  have  given  I  -<  6,  we  may  relatively  add  I  to  both 

sides  ;  whereupon  we  have 


Every  proposition  will  then  be  in  one  of  the  forms 
1  -<  b  1  1  l-<bl. 


With  a  proposition  of  the  form  1  —  <^  b  f  ?,  we  have  the 
right  (1)  to  transpose  the  terms,  and  (2)  to  convert  the 
terms.  Thus,  the  following  are  equivalent  :  — 

1  -<  b  1  1 


1  -<  ?t  ft- 

With  a  proposition  of  the  form  1  -<  b  I,  we  have  only 
the  right  to  convert  the  predicate  giving  1  -<  I  b. 


THE   LOGIC    OF   RELATIVES.  195 

With  three  terms,  there  are  four  forms  of  universal 
propositions,  namely  :  — 


Of  these,  the  third  is  an  immediate  inference  from  the 
second. 

By  way  of  illustration,  we  may  work  out  the  syllo 
gisms  whose  premises  are  the  propositions  of  the  first 
order  referred  to  in  Note  A.  Let  a  and  c  be  class  terms, 
and  let  {3  be  a  group  of  characters.  Let  p  he  the  relative 
"  possessing  as  a  character."  The  non-relative  terms 
are  to  be  treated  as  relatives,  —  a,  for  instance,  being 
considered  as  "  a  coexistent  with  "  and  a  as  "  coexistent 
with  a  that  is."  Then,  the  six  forms  of  affirmative 
propositions  of  the  first  order  are 


The  various  kinds  of  syllogism  are  as  follows  :  — 
1.  Premises  :   1  -<  a  f  p  f  /3         1  -<  c  ^  p  t  /?• 
Convert  one  of  the  premises  and  multiply, 


The  treatment  would  be  the  same  if  one  or  both  of 
the  premises  were  negative  ;  that  is,  contained  p  in  place 
of  p. 


196  THE   LOGIC    OF   RELATIVES. 

2.  Premises  :   1  -<  a  ^p  t  /?        1  -<  c  (p  f  fi). 
We  have 


The  same  with  negatives. 

3.  Premises  :   1  -<  a  (  p  f  j3)         1  -<  %  (p  t  /•?). 

1  -<  «  (JP  t  P)  (£t£)  c  -< 
The  same  with  negatives. 

4.  Premises  :   1  -<  «  f.p  f  /?        1  -<    c 


If  one  of  the  premises,  say  the  first,  were  negative,  we 
should  obtain  a  similar  conclusion,  — 


but  from  this  again  jt?  could  be  eliminated,  giving 
1  -<  a  f  c,     or     a  -<  c. 

5.  Premises  :   1  -<  «  (p  t  /3)         1  -<  (c  t^?)  y^. 

1  -<  o  (p  t/3)^  (^  t  0  -<  «-P  (^  t  c). 
If  either  premise  were  negative,  ^>  could  be  eliminated, 
giving  1  ^^  «  0,  or  some  a  is  c. 

6.  Premises  :   1  -<  (a  t^)  /?         1  -<  (c  ^  p)  ft. 


7.  Premises  :  1  -<  a  f.P  t 

l-<  («f^t/5)( 

8.  Premises  :    1  -<  a  (p  -\  j3)         l-<cp1[ 


9.  Premises  :   1  -<  (a  f  ^)  y8         1  -<  gp  t  A 
1  -<  («tjP))8  (jSt^c)  -< 


THE   LOGIC   OF   RELATIVES.  197 

If  one  premise  is  negative,  we  have  the  further  conclu 
sion  1  —<[  dc. 


10.  Premises  :   1  -<  ap  f  ft         1  -<  cp 

1  -<  (ap  t  /?)  (j8  t  $  c)  -<  «.p  t  j><?. 

11.  Premises  :    I  -<  a^p-fft        1  -< 


We  might  also  conclude 


but  this  conclusion  is  an  immediate  inference  from  the 
other  ;  for 


If  one  premise  is  negative,  we  have  the  further  conclu 
sion  1  -<  a  f  c. 


12.    Premises:   1  -<  a  (j?  |  /*)         l 
1  -<  «(^t)8)  08j>  t<0  -< 
If  one  premise  is  negative,  we  have  the  further  inference 


13.  Premises  :   l-<(a^p)(3        1  -<  £  f  ^  A 

1  -<  («  t^)  /5  (^  t  c)  -<  ("v  t^)  («^  t  c). 
14  Premises:   1  -<  ap-\  ft        1  -<  c-fp/3. 


If  one  premise  is  negative,  we  have  the  further  spurious 
inference  1  -<^  a  n  f  <?. 


15.  Premises:    l-< 

1  -<  («  t^«  (       t  0  -<  «  tl>  (u/>  t 
We  can'al&o  infer  1  -<  (a  f^)^  t  c- 


198  THE   LOGIC    OF   RELATIVES. 

16.  Premises  :   1  -<  a  ^p  f  (3        1  -<  cpp. 


If  one  premise  is  negative,  we  can  further  infer 

17.  Premises  :   1  -<  a  (p  f  /?)         l-<cpp. 

1  -<  a  (p  t  P)  fipc  -<  appc. 
If  one  premise  is  negative,  we  have  the  further  spurious 


conclusion  1  —  <[  a  lie. 

18.  Premises:   1  -<  (a^p~)p         1  -< 


19.  Premises:   1  -<  ap}  (3        l-<cp(3. 

l-<  (ap-tP)jtpc-<  appc. 
If  one  premise  is  negative,  we  further  conclude  1 

20.  Premises  :   1  -<  a  -\p  p         l-<cpp. 


21.  Premises:   1  -< 


When  we  have  to  do  with  particular  propositions,  we 
have  the  proposition  oo  -<[  0,  or  "something  exists;" 
for  every  particular  proposition  implies  this.  Then  every- 
proposition  can  be  put  into  one  or  other  of  the  four 
forms 

oo  -<  0-j^tO 

00  -<    (0  t  0   00 

oo  -<  (0  1  1  oo 

OO  -<    00   I    00. 

Each  of  these  propositions  immediately  follows  from  the 
one  above  it.     The  enveloped  expressions  which  form  the 


THE    LOGIC    OF   EELATIYES.  199 

predicates  have  the  remarkable  property  that  each  is 
either  0  or  oo.  This  fact  gives  extraordinary  freedom 
in  the  use  of  the  formulas.  In  particular,  since  if  any 
thing  not  zero  is  included  under  such  an  expression,  the 
whole  universe  is  included,  it  will  be  quite  unnecessary 
to  write  the  GO  -<^  which  begins  every  proposition. 

Suppose  that  /  and  g  are  general  relatives  signifying 
relations  of  things  to  times.  Then,  Dr.  Mitchell's  six 
forms  of  two  dimensional  propositions  appear  thus  :  — 


^ttv  =  oo/oo. 
It  is  obvious  that  I  f  0  -<  Z,  for 

Z|0-<  (7-j-O)  oo  -<  ZfO  oo-<  Jttt-<  l 

If  then  we  have  Of/fO  as  one  premise,  and  the  other 
contains  g,  we  may  substitute  for  g  the  product  (/,  g). 

g  -<  0r,  oo  -<  g,  (0  f/t  0)  -<  g,f. 
From  the  two  premises 

oo  (/t  0)         and         0  f  g  oo, 
by  the  application  of  the  formulas 


we  have 


These  formulae  give  the  first  column  of  Dr.  Mitchell's 
rule  on  page  90. 


200  THE   LOGIC   OF   KELATIVES. 

The  following  formulae  may  also  be  applied 


2.  (Ot/)oo 

3.  (Of/)oc 

4.  (Of/)Gc     (0  |  S)  oc  -<  (0  t/)yo, 

5.  (Ot/tO)(Ot0oo)    =  Of  (#/,/)  t 

6.  (Ot/)oo      (Of  #00)    =  (0t  <//,/)  oo. 


8. 

9-      (Ot/«>),(0tflroo)       =0f/oo,!7oo. 

10.    (ot/t  o)«>  000       =  ot  (/-//,/)  to. 

11.  (Of/)Go      00,700       =(0t/)^oo 

12.  (Of/oo)     oo^oc       =(0t/^oo)  + 

13.  GO/GO        oo^oo  =  -oo/yoo  +  oo 

When  the  relative  and  non-relative  operations  occur 
together,  the  rules  of  the  calculus  become  pretty  com 
plicated.  In  these  cases,  as  well  as  in  such  as  involve 
plural  relations  (subsisting  between  three  or  more  ob 
jects),  it  is  often  advantageous  to  recur  to  the  numerical 
coefficients  mentioned  on  page  187.  Any  proposition 
whatever  is  equivalent  to  saying  that  some  complexus  of 
aggregates  l  and  products  of  such  numerical  coefficients 
is  greater  than  zero.  Thus, 

^A>o 

means  that  something  is  a  lover  of  something  ;  and 

JW<,  >  o 

means  that  everything  is  a  lover   of  something.     We 

1  The  sums  of  page  188. 


THE    LOGIC    OF    RELATIVES.  201 

shall,  however,  naturally  omit,  in  writing  the  inequali 
ties,  the  >  0  which  terminates  them  all ;  and  the  above 
two  propositions  will  appear  as 

The  following  are  other  examples  :  — 


means  that  everything  is  at  once  a  lover  and  a  benefac 
tor  of  something. 

means  that  everything  is  a  lover  of  a  benefactor  of  itself. 


means  that  there  is  something  which  stands  to  some 
thing  in  the  relation  of  loving  everything  except  bene 
factors  of  it. 

Let  a  denote  the  triple  relative  "  accuser  to  —  of  —  ," 
and  «  the  triple  relative  "  excuser  to  —  of  —  .     Then, 


means  that  an  individual  i  can  be  found,  such,  that  tak 
ing  any  individual  whatever,  j,  it  will  always  be  possible 
so  to  select  a  third  individual,  k,  that  i  is  an  accuser  to 
j  of  '&,  and  j  an  excuser  to  k  of  i. 

Let  TT  denote  "  preferrer  to  —  of — ."     Then, 


means  that,  having  taken  any  individual  i  whatever,  it 
is  always  possible  so  to  select  two,  j  and  k,  that  i  is  an 
accuser  to  j  of  &,  and  also  is  either  excused  by  j  to  &  oi 
ls  something  to  which/  is  preferred  by  k. 

When  we  have  a  number  of  premises  expressed  in  this 
manner,  the  conclusion  is  readily  deduced  by  the  use  of 
the  following  simple  rules.  In  the  first  place,  we  have 


202  THE    LOGIC    OF    EELATIYES. 

In  the  second  place,  we  have  the  formulae 


In  the  third  place,  since  the  numerical  coefficients  are 
all  either  zero  or  unity,  the  Boolian  calculus  is  applicable 
to  them. 

The  following  is  one  of  the  simplest  possible  examples. 
Required  to  eliminate  servant  from  these  two  premises  : 

First  premise.  There  is  somebody  who  accuses  every 
body  to  everybody,  unless  the  unaccused  is  loved  by 
some  person  that  is  servant  of  all  to  whom  he  is  not  ac 
cused. 

Second  premise.  There  are  two  persons,  the  first  of 
whom  excuses  everybody  to  everybody,  unless  the  un- 
excused  be  benefited  by,  without  the  person  to  whom  he 
is  unexcused  being  a  servant  of,  the  second. 

These  premises  may  be  written  thus  : 


The  second  yields  the  immediate  inference, 


Combining  this  with  the  first,  we  have 

2x2u2y2v(euyx  +  syvbvx)  (axuv  +  syvlyu}. 

Finally,  applying  the  Boolian  calculus,  we  deduce  the 
desired  conclusion 


Uyxaxuv  +  f«yJyu  +  «xuA-:r)- 

The  interpretation  of  this  is  that  either  there  is  some 
body  excused  by  a  person  to  whom  he  accuses  somebody, 
or  somebody  excuses  somebody  to  his  (the  excuser's) 
lover,  or  somebody  accuses  his  own  benefactor. 


THE    LOGIC    O*'    RELATIVES.  203 

The  procedure  may  often  be  abbreviated  by  the  use 
of  operations  intermediate  between  II  and  £.  Thus, 
we  may  use  Hr,  II",  etc.  to  mean  the  products  for  all 
individuals  except  one,  except  two,  etc.  *  Thus, 

n/n/%+^ 

will  mean  that  every  person  except  one  is  a  lover  of 
everybody  except  its  benefactors,  and  at  most  two  non- 
benefactors.  In  the  same  manner,  S7,  £",  etc.  will  de 
note  the  sums  of  all  products  of  two,  of  all  products  of 
three,  etc.  Thus, 

«'(W 

will  mean  that  there  are  at  least  three  things  in  the 
universe  that  are  lovers  of  themselves.  It  is  plain  that 
if  m  <  n,  we  have 

Um  -     IP        2n  -     ^'m. 


(n/V)  (n/%)  -<  np+'fai  .  yi) 

Mr.  Schlotel  has  written  to  the  London  Mathematical  Society, 
accusing  me  of  having,  in  my  Algebra  of  Logic,  plagiarized  from  his 
writings.  He  has  also  written  to  me  to  inform  me  that  he  has  read 
that  Memoir  with  "  heitere  Ironie,"  and  that  Professor  Drobisch,  the 
Berlin  Academy,  and  I  constitute  a  "  lederliche  Kleeblatt,"  with 
many  other  things  of  the  same  sort.  Up  to  the  time  of  publishing 
my  Memoir,  I  had  never  seen  any  of  Mr.  Schlotel's  writings  ;  I  have 
since  procured  his  Logik,  and  he  has  been  so  obliging  as  to  send  me 
two  cuttings  from  his  papers,  thinking,  apparently,  that  I  might  be 
curious  to  see  the  passages  that  I  had  appropriated.  But  having  ex 
amined  these  productions,  I  find  no  thought  in  them  that  I  ever  did, 
or  ever  should  be  likely  to  put  forth  as  my  own. 


TIIE    END. 


BY 

PRESERVATION 
SERVICES 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


FOR  USE  IN 
LIBRARY  ONLY